PUMA 165 PUMA 180 PUMA 195 PUMA 210 Tractors OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Electro-magnetic Interference (EMC) This tractor complies strictly with the European Regulations on electro-magnetic emissions. However, interference may arise as a result of add-on equipment which may not necessarily meet the required standards. As such interference can result in serious malfunction of the unit and/or create unsafe situations, you must observe the following: •
Ensure that each piece of non-Case IH equipment fitted to the tractor bears the CE mark.
•
The maximum power of emission equipment (radio, telephones, etc.) must not exceed the limits imposed by the national authorities of the country where you use the tractor.
•
The electro-magnetic field generated by the add-on system should not exceed 24 V/m at any time and at any location in the proximity of electronic components.
Failure to comply with these rules will render the Case IH warranty null and void.
CONTENTS Title
Page
Section 1 -- General Information and Safety To the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1 End User License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--2 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3 Ecology and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7 Safety Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--14 International Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--19 Airborne Noise Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20 Section 2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4 Electrical Power Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--20 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--23 Handbrake, Throttle and Foot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31 Instrument Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--33 Analogue/Digital Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--36 Full Powershift Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--77 Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--97 Section 3 -- Field Operation Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--2 Boosting the Tractor Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--4 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5 Stopping the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10 Constant Engine Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11 Headland Management Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13 Turn Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--24 Rear Power Take--Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--26 Front Power Take--Off and Hydraulic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--40 Electronic Hitch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--57 Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--69 Electro--Hydraulic Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--75 Three--point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--93 Quick Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--99 Linkage Stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--101 Drawbars and Towing Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--106 Trailer Braking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--119 Front Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--126 Rear Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--134 Ballasting and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--144
Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1 Guard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5 Lubrication and Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10 Servicing: When Warning Lights Illuminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--11 10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--15 50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--17 100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--30 300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--29 600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--33 1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--40 1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--46 Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--54 General Maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--55 Storing the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--73 Section 5 -- Fault Finding Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7 Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8 3-point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10 Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--11 Section 6 -- Accessories AFS 200 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Coolant Immersion Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Oil Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Amp Socket and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Isolator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Front Fenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6--2 6--3 6--3 6--4 6--4 6--5 6--6 6--7
Section 7 -- Specification General Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2 Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO TAG Lubricant and Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8 Transmission Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8 Maximum Operating Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9 Rear Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9 Front Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9 Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10 Rear 3-Point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10 Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO TAG Front 3--Point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14 Front Remote Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15 Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16 Hardware Torque Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
Section 8 -- First 50--hour Service Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1 Section 9 -- Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
BLANK
SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY TO THE OWNER
SAFETY
GENERAL
Pages 1--7 to 1--13 inclusive list the precautions to be observed to ensure your safety and the safety of others. Read the safety precautions and follow the advice offered before operating the tractor.
This Manual has been prepared to assist you in the correct procedure for running--in, driving and operating and for the maintenance of your new tractor. Read this Manual carefully. Your tractor is intended for use in normal and customary agricultural applications. If at any time you require advice concerning your tractor, do not hesitate to contact your authorised dealer. He has factory trained personnel, genuine manufacturers’ parts and the necessary equipment to carry out all your service requirements. Your tractor has been designed and built to give maximum performance, economy and ease of operation under a wide variety of operating conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefully inspected, both at the factory and by your dealer to ensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. To maintain this condition and ensure trouble--free operation, it is important that the routine services, as specified in Section 4 of this Manual, are carried out at the recommended intervals. OPERATORS MANUAL STORAGE A storage pocket for the Operators Manual can be found on the rear of the seat. The manual should be kept in this pocket at all times when not in use. CLEANING THE TRACTOR Your tractor is a state-of-the-art machine with sophisticated, electronic controls. This should be taken into consideration when cleaning the tractor, particularly if using a high pressure washer. Even though every precaution has been taken to safeguard electronic components and connections, the pressure generated by some of these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed. When using a high pressure washer, do not stand too close to the tractor and avoid directing the jet at electronic components, electrical connections, breathers, seals, filler caps, etc. Never direct a cold water jet at a hot engine or exhaust.
FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE In Section 9, at the back of this Manual, you will find the 50--hour service reports. After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take your tractor, together with this Manual, to your dealer. He will then perform the factory recommended 50 hour service and complete the service report sheets (pages 9--1 and 9--3). The first sheet (page 9--1) is the dealer’s copy and should be removed by the dealer after the service has been carried out. The second sheet (page 9--3) is your copy of the service performed. Ensure that you and the dealer sign both copies. SERVICE PARTS It should be pointed out that genuine parts have been examined and approved by the Company. The installation and/or use of ‘non-genuine’ products could have negative effects upon the design characteristics of your tractor and thereby affect it’s safety. The Company is not liable for any damage caused by the use of ‘non--genuine’ parts and accessories. Only genuine CASE IH replacement parts should be used. The use of non-genuine parts may invalidate legal approvals associated with this product. It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the tractor unless specifically authorised, in writing, by the After Sales Service department of the Company. WARRANTY Your tractor is warranted according to legal rights in your country and the contractual agreement with the selling dealer. No warranty shall, however, apply if the tractor has not been used, adjusted and maintained according to the instructions given in the Operator’s Manual.
1--1
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS •
You have acquired a device (”DEVICE”) that includes Software licensed by CHN America LLC from Microsoft Licensing, GP or its affiliates (”MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (”SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
•
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (”EULA”0, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT CNH AMERICA LLC FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT.)
•
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license: --
You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
--
NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. CNH AMERICA LLC HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS RELIED UPON CNH AMERICA LLC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
--
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON, MS.
--
No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED AND FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00)
--
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by application law notwithstanding this limitation.
--
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the DEVICE, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
--
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end--user, end--use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
1--2
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION The tractor and major components are identified using serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes. Tractor identification data must be supplied to the dealer when requesting parts or service and will also be needed to aid in identifying the tractor if it is ever stolen.
1
The following provides the locations of the identification data.
1
Vehicle Identification Plate The vehicle identification plate, (1) Figure 1 is located on the left-hand radiator support. Record the information on the sample identification plate provided below.
2
Tractor Identification The serial number and model identification information is stamped on the right--hand side of the front support (1). These numbers are also repeated on the vehicle identification plate reproduced above.
3
1--3
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY Engine Information The engine serial number and date of manufacture are stamped on the engine iinformation plate located on the left side of the engine oil pan. Engine Serial No.
4 Further information relating to engine adjustments and emission level compliance are also shown on the engine information plate.
Driveline Identification The serial number plate (1) is located on the transmission casing. Access to the number can be gained by removing the plate in the floor of the cab as shown in the illustration. This number is repeated on the vehicle identification plate. Record the information below for quick reference. Driveline Serial No.
5
1--4
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY Cab Identification The cab serial number and other information is on the OECD certification plate. This plate can be found on the right--hand side of the cab trim panel, below the rear window. Record the cab serial number below for quick reference.
6
Cab Serial No. Vehicle Weight Information The Vehicle Weighting Plate provides important information on tractor and towed equipment weight combinations. This plate can be found on the right--hand side of the cab trim panel, below the rear window. The figures shown are the maximum permissible weights and should not be exceeded, to do so may affect the safe operation of the tractor.
7
1--5
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Soil, air and water are vital factors of agriculture and life in general. Where legislation does not yet rule the treatment of some of the substances which are required by advanced technology, common sense should govern the use and disposal of products of a chemical and petrochemical nature. The following are recommendations which may be of assistance: •
Become acquainted with and ensure that you understand the relative legislation applicable to your country.
•
Where no legislation exists, obtain information from suppliers of oils, filters, batteries, fuels, anti freeze, cleaning agents, etc., with regard to their effect on man and nature and how to safely store, use and dispose of these substances. Agricultural consultants will, in many cases, be able to help you as well.
4. Avoid spillage when draining off used engine coolant mixtures, engine, gearbox and hydraulic oils, brake fluids, etc. Do not mix drained brake fluids or fuels with lubricants. Store them safely until they can be disposed of in a proper way to comply with local legislation and available resources. 5. Modern coolant mixtures, i.e. antifreeze and other additives, should be replaced every two years. They should not be allowed to get into the soil but should be collected and disposed of safely. 6. Do not open the air-conditioning system yourself. It contains gases which should not be released into the atmosphere. Your dealer or air conditioning specialist has a special extractor for this purpose and will have to recharge the system anyway.
HELPFUL HINTS
7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling or hydraulic system immediately.
1. Avoid filling tanks using unsuitable containers or inappropriate pressurised fuel delivery systems which may cause considerable spillage.
8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised circuit as this may lead to the components exploding.
2. In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, acids, solvents, etc. Most of them contain substances which can be harmful to your health.
9. Protect hoses during welding as penetrating weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken them, causing the loss of oils, coolant, etc.
3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn contaminated fuels and/or waste oils in ordinary heating systems.
1--6
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A careful operator is the best operator. Most accidents can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To help prevent accidents, read and take the following precautions before driving, operating or servicing the tractor. Equipment should be operated only by those who are responsible and instructed to do so.
THE TRACTOR 1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge can lead to accidents.
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
2. Only allow properly trained and qualified persons to operate the tractor.
Throughout this Manual you will see text, preceded by the words NOTE, ATTENTION, IMPORTANT, CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER. Such text has the following significance:
3. To prevent falls, use the handrails and step plates when getting on and off the tractor. Keep steps and platform clear of mud and debris.
MACHINE SAFETY
4. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety decals.
NOTE: This text stresses a correct operating technique or procedure.
5. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.
ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed. IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of something that he needs to know to prevent minor machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed. PERSONAL SAFETY
CAUTION
The word CAUTION is used where a safe behavioural practice, according to operating and maintenance instructions and common safety practices will protect the operator and others from accident involvement.
WARNING
The word WARNING denotes a potential or hidden hazard which could possibly cause serious injury. It is used to warn operators and others to exercise due care and attention to avoid a surprise accident with machinery.
DANGER
The word DANGER denotes a forbidden practice in connection with a serious hazard.
6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on the tractor except for driver training or instruction. When used for these purposes an additional seat may be fitted in the cab. Passengers should not be carried on the tractor at any time. 7. Keep children away from the tractor and farm machinery at all times. 8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to modify or alter the tractor or any of its components or any tractor function without first consulting your dealer. 9. Install all guards before starting the engine or operating the tractor.
Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and DANGER instructions may result in serious bodily injury or even death.
1--7
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY DRIVING THE TRACTOR 1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or driving the tractor. 2. When driving on public roads, have consideration for other road users. Pull in to the side of the road occasionally to allow any following traffic to pass. Do not exceed the legal speed limit set in your country for agricultural tractors. 3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving Vehicle warning when driving on public roads to indicate that the vehicle is slow moving and is a possible hazard. 4. Dip the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at night. Make sure the lights are adjusted to prevent blinding the driver of an oncoming vehicle. 5. Reduce speed before turning or applying the brakes. Brake both wheels simultaneously when making an emergency stop. Ensure that both brake pedals are locked together when travelling at road speeds or when on public roads to ensure correct operation of trailer brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and four wheel braking (4WD tractors only).
8. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going downhill as would be used when going uphill. Do not coast or freewheel down hills. 9. For safe operation any towed vehicle whose total weight exceeds that of the towing tractor must be equipped with a braking system that complies with the legal requirements of that country. 10. Never apply the differential lock when turning. When engaged, the differential lock will prevent the tractor from turning. 11. Always check overhead clearance, especially when transporting the tractor. Watch where you are going, especially at row ends, on roads and around trees and low overhanging obstacles. 12. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and at speeds compatible with safety, especially when operating over rough ground, when crossing ditches or slopes and when turning corners.
6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front axle is automatically engaged, to provide four wheel braking, when both footbrakes are applied. Owners should be aware of the effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly enhances braking performance. Appropriate care should be exercised during fierce braking. 7. Use extreme caution and avoid hard application of the tractor brakes when towing heavy loads at road speeds. 1--8
13. Use extreme caution when operating on steep slopes. 14. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tyres are frozen to the ground, reverse the tractor out to prevent overturning.
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY OPERATING THE TRACTOR 1. Apply the parking brake, place the PTO control in the ‘OFF’ position, the lift control lever in the down position, the remote control valve levers in the neutral position and the transmission levers in neutral before starting the tractor. 2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other than externally located hydraulic lift or PTO switches, if fitted) while standing beside the tractor. Always sit in the tractor seat when starting the engine or operating the controls. 3. Do not bypass the transmission and PTO neutral start switches. Consult your authorised dealer if your neutral start controls malfunction. Use jump leads only in the recommended manner. Improper use can result in a tractor runaway.
8. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline. 9. The cab is designed to provide the minimum noise level at the operator’s ears and meets or exceeds applicable standards in this respect. However, noise (sound pressure level) in the workplace can exceed 85 dB(A) when working between buildings or in confined spaces, with cab windows open. Therefore, it is recommended that operators wear suitable ear protectors when operating in high noise level conditions.
4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift levers while the engine is running. Unexpected tractor movement can result from such contact. 5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion. 6. If the power steering or engine ceases operating, stop the tractor immediately as the tractor will be more difficult to control. 7. Before leaving the tractor, park the tractor on level ground, apply the parking brake, lower attached implements to the ground, disengage the PTO and stop the engine.
10. Do not run the tractor engine in an enclosed building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust fumes are toxic and can cause death. 11. Pull only from the pick-up hitch, swinging drawbar or the lower link drawbar in the lowered position. Use only a drawbar pin that locks in place. Pulling from the tractor rear axle or any point above the axle may cause the tractor to overturn.
1--9
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY 12. Always select Position Control when attaching equipment and when transporting equipment. Be sure hydraulic couplers are properly mounted and will disconnect safely in case of accidental detachment of the implement.
13. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when heavy implements are attached to the three--point hitch, install front end or front wheel weights. Do not operate the tractor with a light front end. 14. Engage the clutch slowly when driving out of a ditch, gully or up a steep hillside. Disengage the clutch promptly if the front wheels rise off the ground.
OPERATING THE PTO 1. When operating PTO- driven equipment, shut off the engine, switch off the PTO and wait until the PTO stops before getting off the tractor and disconnecting the equipment.
2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the power take-off or especially when near rotating equipment. 3. When operating stationary PTO-driven equipment, always apply the tractor parking brake and block the rear wheels front and back.
15. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories are correctly installed, are approved for use with the tractor, do not overload the tractor and are operated and maintained in accordance with the instructions issued by the equipment or accessory manufacturer. 16. Remember that your tractor, if abused or incorrectly used, can be dangerous and become a hazard both to the operator and to bystanders. Do not overload or operate with attached equipment which is unsafe, not designed for the particular task or is poorly maintained. 17. Do not leave equipment in the raised position when the vehicle is stopped or unattended. 18. Do not drive equipment near open fires. 19. Always wear a protective mask when working with toxic spray chemicals. Follow the directions on the chemical container.
1--10
4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog or service PTO driven equipment when the tractor engine is running. Ensure that the PTO is switched off. 5. Make sure the PTO guard is in position at all times and always replace the PTO cap when the PTO is not in use.
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY Unqualified persons should not remove or attempt to adjust a pump, injector, nozzle or any other part of the fuel injection or hydraulic systems. Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.
SERVICING THE TRACTOR
•
Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
•
Stop the engine and relieve pressure before connecting or disconnecting lines.
•
Tighten all connections before starting the engine or pressurising lines.
•
If fluid is injected into the skin obtain medical attention immediately or gangrene may result.
1. The cooling system operates under pressure which is controlled by the expansion tank cap. It is dangerous to remove the cap while the system is hot. Always turn the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to escape before removing the cap entirely. Never remove the cap from the top of the radiator unless the expansion tank pressure cap has first been removed. 2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep any type of open flame away. 3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure your safety and comply with legal requirements. 4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames away from battery or cold weather starting aids. To prevent sparks which could cause explosion, use jumper cables according to instructions. 5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning system. It is possible to be severely frost bitten or injured by escaping refrigerant. Special equipment and instruments are required to service the air conditioning system. See your authorised dealer for service. 6. Stop the engine before performing any service on the tractor. 7. Hydraulic fluid and fuel oil in the injection system operate under high pressure. Escaping hydraulic fluid or fuel oil under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to modify or alter the tractor or any of its components or any tractor function without first consulting an authorised dealer. 9. Continuous long term contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged contact with used engine oil. Wash skin promptly with soap and water. 10. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained. 11. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters properly. 12. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and cause injury.
1--11
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY DIESEL FUEL 1. Under no circumstances should gasoline, alcohol or blended fuels be added to diesel fuel. These combinations can create an increased fire or explosive hazard. In a closed container such as a fuel tank these blends are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do not use these blends. 2. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the engine running or hot. 3. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or when standing near fuel. Keep any type of open flame away. 4. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when filling the tank. 5. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Fill only to the bottom of the filler neck to allow room for expansion. 6. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately. 7. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely. 8. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with an approved cap. A non--approved cap may not be safe. 9. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes. 10. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade fuels are not held over and used in the winter.
WHENEVER YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL IT MEANS: ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
1--12
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
WARNING Your machine is equipped with an operator Protective Structure, such as: a Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) or Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS) or Cab with ROPS. A ROPS may be a cab frame or a two--posted or four--posted structure used for the protection of the operator to minimise the possibility of serious injury. The Protective Structure is a special safety component of your machine. DO NOT attach any device to the Protective Structure for pulling purposes. DO NOT drill holes to the Protective Structure. The Protective Structure and interconnecting components are a certified system. Any damage, fire, corrosion or modification will weaken the structure and reduce your protection. If this occurs, the Protective Structure MUST be replaced so that it will provide the same protection as a new Protective Structure. Contact your dealer for Protective Structure inspection and replacement. After an accident, fire, tip or roll over, the following MUST be performed by a qualified technician before returning the machine to field or job site operation. •
The Protective Structure MUST be replaced.
•
The mounting or suspension for the Protective Structure, operator seat and suspension, seat belts and mounting components and wiring within the operator’s protective system MUST be carefully inspected for damage.
•
All damaged parts MUST be replaced.
DO NOT WELD, DRILL HOLES, ATTEMPT TO STRAIGHTEN OR REPAIR THE PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE. MODIFICATION IN ANY WAY CAN REDUCE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE STRUCTURE WHICH COULD CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN THE EVENT OF FIRE, TIP, ROLL OVER, COLLISION OR ACCIDENT.
1--13
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
SAFETY DECALS The decals reproduced on the following pages were installed on your tractor in the positions indicated in the drawings below. They are intended for your safety and for those working with you. Please take this Manual and walk around your tractor, noting the location of the decals and their significance. Review the decals and operating instructions detailed in this Manual with the machine operators. Keep the decals clean and legible. If they become damaged or illegible, obtain replacements from your authorised dealer.
1--14
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY 1. Location: Left and right-hand side of fan guard To prevent serious injury, keep hands and clothing away from rotating fan and drive belt. Part No. 81871830
2. Location: Right--hand side of radiator Warning! Pressurised cooling system. Allow to cool then remove cap carefully. Using a cloth, turn cap to the first stop and allow pressure to subside before removing cap completely. Part No. 5194556
3. Location: Left--hand ’A’ pillar, inside cab General warning. Read and understand all the warning notes printed in this Operator’s Manual. In particular, see pages 1--7 to 1--13 inclusive. Part No. 82001826
4. Location: Rear of both fenders (with external power controls only) To avoid injury, do not stand on the implement or between the implement and tractor while operating the external lift or PTO controls. Part No. 83982553
1--15
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY 5. Location: Left--hand ‘A’ pillar inside the cab In an overturn, hold on tightly to the steering wheel. Do not attempt to jump out. Part No. 82016113
6. Location: Top of toolbox Do not stand on toolbox. Part No. 82010947
7. Location: Top of battery Danger! Corrosive acid. Explosive gas. Wear eye protection. Avoid producing sparks. See Operator’s Manual.
1--16
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY 8. Location: Radar sensor mounting bracket To avoid possible eye damage from micro-wave signals emitted by the radar sensor, do not look directly into the sensor face. Part No. 82002071
9. Location: Hydraulic Accumulator/s Caution! High pressure hydraulic/gas accumulator. Follow service manual instructions for removal or repair. Part No. 82029751
10.Location: Location: Right--hand ’A’ pillar inside cab Caution! Read Operator’s Manual. before attempting to tow. Part No. 82030522
11.Location: Air conditioning compressor Warning! Fluid under pressure, do not disconnect any lines. Read Operator’s Manual. Part No. 83946774
1--17
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY 12.Location: Right--hand control console Caution! Always use grab handles when entering or leaving the platform/cab Part No. 81871702
13.Location: Left--hand side of radiator Warning! Heater Grid cold start aid. Do not use ether or risk of explosion will occur. Part No. 87802167
14.Location: Right--hand ’A’ pillar inside cab Warning! De--activate Fast Steer system before travelling on the highway. Read Operator’s Manual. Part No. 87331567
15.Location: Right--hand access door Cab exit door only, cannot be opened from outside. Read Operator’s Manual. Part No. 87390270
1--18
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various universal symbols have been utilised on the instruments, controls, switches, and fuse box. The symbols are shown below with an indication of their meaning. Thermostart starting aid Alternator charge
Fuel level Automatic Fuel shut-off Engine speed (rev/min x 100)
KAM
Keep alive memory
Turn signals Turn signals --one trailer Turn signals --two trailers
Hours recorded
Front windscreen wash/wipe
Engine oil pressure
Rear windscreen wash/wipe
Engine coolant temperature Coolant level
PTO
Radio
Heater temperature control Heater fan
N
Transmission in neutral Creeper gears Slow or low setting Fast or high setting Ground speed Differential lock Rear axle oil temperature Transmission oil pressure
Air conditioner Tractor lights
Headlamp main beam
Air filter blocked Parking brake
FWD engaged FWD disengaged
Position Control Draft Control Accessory socket Implement socket %age slip Hitch raise (rear) Hitch lower (rear) Hitch height limit (rear) Hitch height limit (front) Hitch disabled Hydraulic and transmission filters Remote valve extend
Headlamp dipped beam
Brake fluid level
Warning!
Remote valve retract
Work lamps
Trailer brake
Hazard warning lights
Remote valve float
Stop lamps
Roof beacon
Variable control
Malfunction! See Operator’s Manual
Horn
Warning! Corrosive substance
Pressurised! Open carefully
Malfunction! (alternative symbol) 1--19
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION In accordance with E.E.C. directives, the noise levels of tractors covered by this manual are as follows: Tractors with Cabin and Fixed Windscreen with Air Cleaner Extraction System Noise level at operators ear Closed
(1)
Open
Drive by noise level
(2)
Model
Transmission
Annex II*
Annex II*
Annex VI**
Puma 165
Full Powershift
71.0 dB(A)
79.0 dB(A)
80.0 dB(A)
Puma 180
Full Powershift
70.0 dB(A)
80.0 dB(A)
82.0 dB(A)
Puma 195
Full Powershift
70.0 dB(A)
79.1 dB(A)
81.0 dB(A)
Puma 210
Full Powershift
70.0 dB(A)
79.0 dB(A)
81.0 dB(A)
* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II. Maximum noise level at the operators ear with: 1) all cab windows and doors closed, tractor off load 2) rear window and roof hatch open, tractor off load. ** Test results are in accordance with directive 74/151/EEC Annex VI.
1--20
SECTION 2 CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
BEFORE OPERATING
CAUTION
Before driving or operating the tractor, study the safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. Read this section thoroughly. It details the location and operation of the various instruments, switches and controls on your tractor. Even if you operate other tractors, you should thoroughly read this section of the manual and ensure that you are familiar with the location and function of all the features of the tractor. Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of the tractor, consult your authorised dealer. Pay particular attention to the recommendations for running-in to ensure that your tractor will give the long and dependable service for which it was designed. See page 3--2 . This section is split into various subjects, as follows. Where a feature requires setting up and running adjustments in the field, detailed instructions will be found in Section 3, Field Operation. Instructions for the operation of various optional accessories will be found in Section 7. Lubrication and maintenance requirements will be found in Section 4. Tractor specifications are listed in Section 8. A comprehensive index is provided at the end of this manual.
PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS Your tractor is equipped with APM (Automatic Productivity Management), a system that utilises electronic memory facilities to programme and control various operating functions. An operating memory temporarily stores settings and adjustments made while operating the tractor and these are transferred to the main memory when you key--off (engine stop). If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data is being transferred between the operating and main memories, some of the data may be lost or corrupted. If changes have been made to any memorised settings while operating the tractor, pause for five seconds between key--off and key--on to provide sufficient time for data to transfer between the operating memory and the main memory. Once transferred, the new settings will remain unchanged until they are re--programmed. Subject Cab
Page 2--4
Electrical Power Sockets
2--20
Seats
2--23
Parking Brake, Throttle and Foot Controls
2--31
Steering Column
2--33
Integrated Contol Unit
2--36
Full Powershift Transmission (17 x 6, 18 x 6 and 19 x 6)
2--76
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive
2--97
Front Axle Suspension
2--101
2--1
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
CAB AND PLATFORM CONTROLS
1 General View of Tractor Controls 2--2
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Key to Figure 1
Page Nos. for Reference
1. Foot throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31 2. Joystick control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--47, 3--77 3. Transmission controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--76 4. AFS 200 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2 5. Hydraulics controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--57 6. Remote control valve levers Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--69 Elecro--Hydraulic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--75 7. EHC panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--58 8. PTO controls Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--40 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--26 9. Electrical power panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--20 10. External controls (where fitted) 3--point hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--67 Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--38 11. Release handle Tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--114 Automatic pick--up hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--117 12. Rear window locking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6 13. Cab air recirculation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--15 14. Cab climate controls (’C’ pillar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10, 2--13 15. Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31 16. Instructional seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--30 17. Seat controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--23 18. Clutch/inching pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31 19. Multi--function switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--34 20. Shuttle lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--78 21. Turn Assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--24 22. Key--start switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--33, 3--6 23. Wash/wipe control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--35 24. Foot brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--32 25. Integrated Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--36 26. Enhanced keypad (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--55
2--3
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION CAB Introduction The cab has been designed for operator protection, comfort and convenience. Inside, the frame, roof, and floor are insulated to reduce noise to a minimum. A wide opening door on the left--hand side permits entry to the cab aided by convenient grab handles and footsteps with anti-slip treads. The door and rear window are fitted with gas struts to hold them in the fully open position. Additionally, the rear window may be retained in the partially open position for increased ventilation during operation. The cab features include a fresh air heater/defroster with recirculation, air conditioning, sun visor, tinted glass, interior light, auxiliary power socket, storage facilities, interior/exterior rear view mirrors and a choice of comfortable seats.
2
Options include automatic climate control, high visibility roof panel, radio cassette, CD player, rear windscreen wash/wipe and electrically operated external rear view mirrors. External Door Handle The left--hand door has an external handle with a push button (1). The door may be locked from the outside using the key provided. Insert the key and rotate clockwise a half turn to lock.
3 Interior Door Handle To open the left--hand door from inside the cab, squeeze up the trigger (2) on the underside of the grab handle (1). Use the grab handle to push the door open.
4
2--4
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Right--Hand Access Door The right--hand door can also be used to exit the cab if required. To open the door, lift the locking lever until it clears the retaining pin and push the door open. NOTE: The door cannot be unlatched from outside the tractor. Opening this door also provides easier access to the fuse and relay panels located below removable panels on the right--hand side of the cab. When closing the door, ensure the slot in the locking lever is correctly positioned above the retaining pin then push fully down until it the lever is locked.
5
2--5
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Entering and Exiting the Cab Wherever possible, the cab should be entered from the left side.
CAUTION
When entering the cab from the right-hand side, use only the grab handles to assist in climbing the steps. If the gear levers are grasped inadvertently, a tractor runaway may result. To enter the cab, face the door, then open it. Place one foot on the lowest step plate and, using the grab handles on the ‘A’ post and inside the door, climb the steps and enter the cab.
6
Sit in the seat and, where fitted, pull the door closed using the knob (1). Fasten the seat belt, where fitted. To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door, grasp the grab handles, back out of the cab and descend the steps using the grab handles.
7 Rear Window The rear window may be locked in the closed position or retained in the partially open or fully open positions. To open the window, lift the central locking handle (1) up to the vertical position. Allow the window to open a little then push the handle down so that the locking tongue engages the slot (2) in the framework. Alternatively, the window may be allowed to swing fully open supported by two gas-filled struts. IMPORTANT: Retain control of the window when opening it fully. Do not allow it to swing open freely. Using the grab handle, pull the window closed and push the handle down to lock the window.
2--6
8
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION High Visibility Roof Panel (where fitted) The high visibility roof panel provides the operator with a view to the bucket or grab when the loader is in the raised position. For extra ventilation the roof panel may be opened in one of three ways. Using the grab handles (1), push up at the front or rear to angle the panel or, alternatively, push up in the centre of the grab handles to fully open the panel. To close the panel, grasp both handles and pull the panel down, the spring action of the handles will hold the panel in the closed position.
9
NOTE: When transporting the tractor on a truck or trailer at speeds above 50 K/mh (31 MPH) ensure the roof panel is secured to prevent accidental opening. See page 3--3 for more information. A sliding panel may be adjusted to reduce glare or can be fully closed if required.
10 Sun Visor Pull down the sun visor (1) to protect the driver’s eyes from the glare of the sun. The visor will remain in the chosen position. Push the visor up to retract.
11
2--7
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION External Rear View Mirrors Non--extending arm Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best rearward view. To adjust the angle of the mirror head, loosen the knob (1). Tighten the knob when the mirror is at the correct angle. The mirror arm may be swivelled forward to clear obstructions if necessary.
12 With extending arm Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the telescopic arm may be extended, as shown. This feature will be beneficial when towing wide trailers or equipment. To adjust the angle of the mirror head, loosen the knob (2). Ensure both knobs are fully tightened when the mirror is correctly positioned. The mirror arm may be swivelled forward to clear obstructions if necessary.
13 With Power adjustment With the optional power adjust mirrors the position of the mirror head may be adjusted electrically. Select the mirror to be adjusted by moving the switch (1) to the left or right. Then, using the 4--way control (2) move it sideways to adjust the lateral view or up and down to adjust the vertical position. With the selector switch (1) in the mid position the power adjustment function will be de--activated. 14
2--8
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the telescopic arm may be extended or retracted. To make initial adjustment to the vertical position of the mirror, loosen the clamp screws (2), re--position the mirror head and re--tighten the screws.
15 The power adjust mirrors are also electrically heated. Momentarily depress the switch (1) to turn on the heating element. The mirror heater will automatically switch off after 5 minutes.
16
2--9
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Interior Light The interior light (2), has three operating positions. Depress the front and the light will remain on, depress the rear and the light will illuminate when either of the doors are opened. The step light (1) operates in conjunction with the interior light. This light provides illumination of the step area when the door is opened. When the switch is in the central position, the light is off, irrespective of the position of the doors. 17 Console Light The light (1) provides a soft glow to the gear levers and hydraulic console. The light is illuminated when the tractor lights are turned on. A second light is provided on the left side of the cab to illuminate the drinks holder and storage box.
18 Heater Temperature Control Turn the knob (2) clockwise to increase the temperature of the air from the heater. Turn fully anti-clockwise to obtain unheated air from the heater vents. Blower Control A 4-speed blower is installed for the heater (and air conditioner, where fitted). Turn the switch (1) clockwise to the first position for low speed. Further rotation of the switch in a clockwise direction will increase the fan speed. With the windows closed, the blower may be used to pressurise the cab to exclude dust etc. Provided that the cab air filters are serviced correctly, maximum pressurisation and optimum dust exclusion may be achieved by operating the blower at maximum fan speed.
2--10
19
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Adjustable Air Vents Adjustable air vents are provided throughout the cab for even distribution of heated or cooled air. Vents are located each side of the operators seat and on the instrument console. Each vent may be independently adjusted to direct the air flow (with the blower control actuated) onto the side windows or the operator. The two vents located on the upper part of the instrument console may be adjusted to demist the windscreen. Lift the tag on the rectangular vents to open, and then adjust for air flow and direction as required.
20
Air Conditioner Switch Depress the switch (3), to activate the air conditioner compressor and lower the temperature of the air within the cab. The air conditioner will only operate with the blower (1) switched on. IMPORTANT: The air conditioning system uses R134A refrigerant. Do not mix with other refrigerants. To quickly reduce in cab temperature operate the air conditioner with the blower speed set to maximum and the heater control fully off. When the air has cooled sufficiently, adjust the blower control to maintain the desired temperature. The windows and doors should remain closed. Under certain conditions, it may be desirable to operate both the air conditioner and heater together, e.g. to demist the windscreen and interior door glass on a cold morning. (The air conditioner, as well as cooling, also removes moisture from the air). Run the engine to normal operating temperature, turn the heater temperature control (2) and blower control (1) to the maximum settings (fully clockwise). Turn on the air conditioner (3) and adjust the air vents to direct the air flow, as required.
21
2--11
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION When the windows are clear, turn the air conditioner off and adjust the heater controls to maintain the desired cab air temperature. IMPORTANT: Run the engine at idle speed for at least 3 minutes after switching on the air conditioner, if the air conditioner has been out of use for more than 30 days. IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner off when cooled or de-humified air is not required. For proper operation of the air conditioner, ensure that the cab air filters are serviced regularly. See section 4.
WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system has a boiling point of --12° C (10° F). •
Never expose any part of the air conditioner system to a direct flame or excessive heat because of the risk of fire or explosion.
•
Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the air conditioner system. Escaping refrigerant will cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
•
If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38° C (90 --100° F). Cover the area loosely with a bandage to protect the affected area and to prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
•
If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5 minutes. Consult a doctor immediately.
NOTE: It is the normal function of the air conditioner to extract water from the air. Drain hoses lead from the air conditioner unit to a point beneath the cab. Do not be concerned if a pool of water collects beneath the drain hose outlets when the engine is stopped.
2--12
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) (where fitted) Automatic Control With Automatic Temperature Control the operator can set the temperature inside the cab to maintain a comfortable working environment. By automatically adjusting the output of the heating and air conditioning systems, ATC will provide a stable cab temperature between 16° C (61° F) and 32° C (90° F). The blower control switch (1) has five positions, off, ATC and three blower speeds. With ATC selected the speed of the blower fan is controlled automatically. To set the cab interior temperature, align the mark on the control knob (2) with the desired figure. If required, the control can be set to the intermediate positions between the figures to provide additional temperature levels.
22
If the temperature in the cab remains within 1.1° C (2° F) of that set on the control, the blower fan will maintain a low speed. As the differential between the control setting and the in cab temperature increases, the blower speed will be raised to re--stabilise the temperature. Selecting ’HI’ or ’LO’ on the temperature control will override the automatic system to provide a maximum heating or cooling effect. Manual Control To manually set the cab temperature, switch the blower control to position I, II or III and select a suitable setting on the temperature control. This will disable the ATC function. Although the in cab temperature will be maintained within limits, it will not be as efficient as ATC. Switching to ’LO’ will provide maximum air conditioning output with temperature adjustment through the blower control only.
2--13
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Economy and Defrost Switch The economy and defrost switch has three positions: 1. Left side depressed. ECONomy mode. 2. Central position. ECON and MAX DEF off. 3. Right side depressed. MAX DEFrost on. When the external air temperature is low, operating the air conditioner may not be necessary to maintain a constant temperature inside the cab. To turn off the air conditioner, depress the ECON side of the switch. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor uses engine horespower to drive it. Turning off the air conditioner when not required will aid fuel economy. The cab temperature will be maintained within the specified limits unless the external air temperature rises above that set on the control. Should this occur, select the central switch position to turn on the air conditioner. In very cold conditions where the outside of the cab windows become covered in ice, depress the MAX DEF side of the switch. This will automatically set the heater temperature to maximum, activate the air conditioner (if not already switched on), and select the highest speed setting on the blower fan. This function may also be used to clear heavy misting on the inside of the cab windows.
2--14
23
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Air Recirculation The cab ventilation system has three filters, two external filters through which fresh air is drawn into the cab, and one internal air re--circulation filter (2). Move the slider control (1) fully to the right for maximum air re--circulation.
WARNING
The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the air but will not exclude chemical vapour. Follow the chemical manufacturer’s directions regarding protection from hazardous chemicals. 24 Cab Air Filters When operating with pesticides, both internal (re--circulation) and external cab air filters (1) may be replaced with special charcoal filters. Consult your authorised dealer.
1
CAUTION
Use only genuine CASE IH filter elements when renewing cab air filters. When replacing used filters, follow local regulations in the disposal of contaminated elements. 25 Safety Precautions Although it is possible to pressurise the cab interior to reduce ingress of chemical vapour, the recommended safety procedures, as stipulated by the chemical manufacturer, should be observed at all times. Protective clothing worn when filling the sprayer with pesticides or when carrying out external adjustments, should be removed and stored away carefully before re--entering the tractor cab. To prevent build--up of chemical residue inside the cab, the interior trim and floor covering should be wiped clean with a damp cloth on a regular basis.
2--15
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Cab Pressurisation Monitor (where fitted) To improve protection against chemical vapours entering the cab when spraying, the blower can be used, in conjunction with charcoal filters, to raise the air pressure inside the cab above that of the external air pressure. Whilst this differential is maintained, chemical vapours should not enter the cab. Ensure all cab apertures are fully closed. To monitor the internal pressure, a gauge is mounted inside the cab. Cab Air Pressurisation Gauge Observe the reading on the pressure gauge. If the lower edge (1) of the yellow indicator centres in the green area you have an adequate differential between the internal and external air pressure. Adjust the blower speed to maintain that reading. If the yellow indicator rises into the red area, increase blower speed to raise the internal cab pressure.
CAUTION
If, during spray operations, the lower edge of the yellow indicator enters the red section of the gauge, carry out the checks below and follow the chemical manufacturers recommendations for safe operation. With the blower in the off position the yellow indicator should move into the red area. If the indicator does not register correctly, the gauge should be replaced before operating with chemical spray equipment. If the blower is unable to maintain the correct pressure inside the cab then the following checks should be made to determine the cause. 1. Check blower is on maximum speed. NOTE: If Automatic Temperature Control is activated it may be necessary to switch to manual control to increase blower speed. 2. Ensure all doors, windows and roof panel are fully closed. 3. Check external air filters for blockage or restriction. 4. Examine all cab aperture seals for damage. 5. Check sealing around linkages and levers where they pass through the cab panels. If, after all the checks have been made the cab interior pressure cannot be maintained, consult your authorised dealer.
2--16
26
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Radio/Cassette/CD Player (where fitted) The cab is pre-wired and has two speakers installed in the roof (four speakers are available as a dealer installed accessory). A choice of AM/FM stereo radio/cassette or AM/FM stereo radio/CD players (1) are also available as a dealer installed accessory. Separate operating instructions will be supplied with the radio. NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-start switch in the on or accessories position.
WARNING
27
Ensure the aerial is positioned so it cannot touch overhead power lines.
Work Lamp and Beacon Switch Panel NOTE: The work lamps will only operate with the tractor lights switched on. The switches are located on a panel mounted in the roof console (1). Individual switches control the front and rear work lamps and the rotating beacon (see accessories section). Depress the switches once to illuminate, depress again to turn the lamps off. When the key-start switch is turned on, the switches will be internally illuminated. The light intensity will increase as each switch is activated.
28
NOTE: Do not adjust a fender-mounted, rear work lamp to point fully downwards. The heat generated by the work lamp may distort the plastic housing of the rear lamp cluster.
2--17
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Mobile Telephone Usage A storage bracket (1) is provided on the left--hand cab ’C’ pillar for a mobile telephone. Auxiliary power for the telephone may be taken from the cigarette lighter socket above.
29 Implement Monitor Installation To facilitate installation of an implement monitor, two mounting points are provided: To meet SAE standards, captive bolts (1), protected by plastic covers, are provided on the the right-hand cab ’C’ pillar. It is recommended that a bracket be screwed to the ‘C’ pillar to mount the monitor. A suitable bracket is available from your authorised dealer. 30 An alternative monitor mounting position (1) is provided on the inner face of the right-hand ‘A’ pillar.
31
2--18
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Cable and Harness Routing So the operating cable from the monitor may be conveniently routed to the equipment, a small aperture is provided in the filler plate each side of the lower rear window frame. By making a small incision in the rubber at (1), cables or wiring can be easily routed through the filler plate.
32 In Cab Storage A storage box with a hinged lid (1) is located on the left-hand side of the cab. The lid also incorporates a drinks holder. A recessed tray (2) is provided to the rear of the storage box to hold small tools, oddments, etc.
33
2--19
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTORS Depending on tractor specification there are a number of electrical power connectors provided for various applications. These are as follows: 1. 8 amp. Screw terminals. The red terminal is positive, the black terminal negative. 2. 7 Pole Din/ISO implement socket (with radar option only) provides the information below. 3. 30 amp. ISO/JD implement power socket. Provides constant and key--start switched live feeds.
34
7 Pole Din/ISO Implement Socket Connectors (where fitted) Pin 1. True ground speed. (Radar Sensed) Pin 2. Theoretical ground speed. (Wheel Sensed) Pin 3. Rear PTO speed. Pin 4. Rear 3--point hitch, in work/out of work. Pin 5. Not used Pin 6. 5 amp. power supply. Pin 7. Common ground connection. 35 4. Cigarette lighter/auxiliary power socket for mobile telephone or cooler box (where fitted). 5. 8 amp Single pole auxiliary power socket. Live with key--start in ’on’ position. IMPORTANT: To ensure that the screw terminals and connecting cables do not get excessively hot when loaded with near maximum current it is important to make secure, tight connections to prevent overheating and damage. Ensure that equipment is connected to the terminals with cables of suitable gauge and insulation thickness and fitted with appropriate terminal connectors.
2--20
36
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Multi--Pin Diagnostic Socket
WARNING
For Dealer use only. This socket is provided for dealers to connect diagnostic equipment to the tractor electrical control systems. Any attempt to connect other equipment to this socket may cause damage to the tractor electrical system or its components.
37 Beacon Power Socket Two power sockets for the rotating beacon are provided at the rear of the cab, one on each side.
38
2--21
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet (except North America) A standard 7-pin trailer lighting socket (1), is provided and is mounted at the rear of the tractor. With reference to the picture inset, the socket connections (viewed from the front of the socket) are as follows: Pin No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Wire Colour
Circuit
Yellow Not Used Black Green Blue Red Brown
L.H. Turn Signal -Earth (Ground) R.H. Turn Signal R.H. Parking Light Brake Lights L.H. Parking Light
39
Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet (North America only) A standard SAE 7-pin connector (1) is provided, to operate the electrical system on implements and trailers. With reference to the picture inset, the pin connections (viewed from the front of the socket) are as follows: Pin No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Wire Colour
Circuit
Black Blue Yellow Red Green Brown Not Used
Earth (Ground) R.H. Parking Light L.H. Turn Signal Brake Lights R.H. Turn Signal L.H. Parking Light --
40
Four Pin Implement Socket (all locations) A 4-pin, 40 amp socket (1) is standard on all tractors with cab. (See Section 7 for adaptor cable). NOTE: The 4-pin socket provides power up to 40 amps. However, operator’s should be aware that the screw terminals (4) Figure 34, share the same 40 amp fuse. The combined output of the 4-pin socket and the screw terminals is, therefore, limited to 40 amps.
41
2--22
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION SEATS Two air suspension seats are available. Whichever seat is installed in your tractor, you will find that it has a comprehensive range of adjustments. Before operating the tractor, it is important to adjust the seat to the most comfortable position. Seat adjusters are colour coded grey. See the following text and illustrations for details.
AIR SUSPENSION SEAT NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made while sitting in the seat. Storage pocket A pocket for storing documents, etc., is provided on the back of the seat.
42 Height/weight adjustment The standard air suspension seat has electrically controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust seat height, it is necessary to turn the key-start switch on. Lift the lever (1) and a compressor will raise the seat. When the lever is released the seat will stop at the height selected. Push the lever down to release air and lower the seat. Backrest adjustment Lift the lever (2) on the left-hand side of the seat frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The backrest will lock in position when the lever is released.
43
2--23
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Travel adjustment Lift the travel adjustment lever (1) and move the seat forward or backward, as required. The seat will lock in position when the lever is released. Swivel adjustment To aid observation to the rear of the tractor, the seat may be allowed to swivel. Adjustment is available as follows: a) Lock in one of two positions 14° or 21° to the left of centre.
44
b) Lock in one of three positions at 7°, 14° and 21° to the right of centre. To swivel the seat, lift the handle (2), then rotate the seat to the required position. When the lever is released, the seat will lock at the selected angle. Armrest adjustments The right--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to provide a comfortable operating height. To adjust the height of the armrest, loosen the knob (1). Grasp the armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the complete assembly. Re--tighten the clamp knob securely. Rotate the knurled wheel (2) on the underside of the left--hand armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest. When not required, the armrest may be lifted to the vertical position. The left--hand armrest may also be adjusted for height by loosening the two clamp bolts (3). Move the armrest to a comfortable height and re--tighten the clamp bolts.
2--24
45
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION DELUXE AIR SUSPENSION SEAT NOTE: The following settings and adjustments apply to both cloth and leather trimmed seats (where fitted). The deluxe air suspension seat offers a full range of adjustments for driver comfort. Optional heating elements in the seat cushion and backrest are provided for additional comfort in low temperatures. NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made with the tractor stationary and the parking brake applied. 46 Armrest Controls Seat height adjustment The deluxe air suspension seat has electrically controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust seat height, it is necessary to turn the key-start switch on. Press and hold the top of the rocker switch (2) and a compressor will raise the seat. When the switch is released the seat will stop at the height selected. Press the bottom of the switch to release air and lower the seat. Heating element (where fitted) The heating elements in the seat are controlled by a two position switch (1), on the left--hand armrest. Depressing the upper part of the switch will energise the heat setting. Depress the lower part of the switch to turn off. When energised, a red warning light on the switch will illuminate. The temperature of the seat is controlled by internal sensors within the seat.
47
2--25
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Ride firmness selector (where fitted) The optional Semi--Active suspension system utilises an advanced damper system to reduce vertical jolts and vibrations caused by operating on rough terrain. An electronic controller constantly monitors the motion of the suspension and updates the damping effect to significantly improve operator comfort. A selector switch (3) allows the operator to choose the most comfortable damping position consistent with their weight and the movement of the tractor.
48
With the switch in the central position, the firmness of the ride will suit most average conditions. Depress the top of the switch to increase the damping effect. To reduce the damping effect, depress the bottom of the switch. Seat Controls Cushion tilt The angle of the seat cushion may be adjusted to three positions. Lift the lever (1) and pull or push the front of the seat cushion up or down, as required. The seat cushion will lock in position when the lever is released. Cushion extension To suit drivers of differing heights, the length of the seat cushion may be adjusted by up to 60 mm (2.4 in). Lift the lever (3) and move the cushion forward or rearward, as required. The cushion will lock in position when the lever is released. Travel adjustment Lift the travel adjustment lever (2) and move the complete seat forward or backward, as required. The seat will lock in position when the lever is released.
2--26
49
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Swivel adjustment To facilitate observation of an implement attached to the rear of the tractor, the seat may be allowed to swivel. Adjustment is available as follows: a) Lock in one of two positions 14° or 21° to the left of centre. b) Lock in one of three positions at 7°, 14° and 21° to the right of centre. To swivel the seat, lift the handle (4), then rotate the seat to the required position. When the lever is released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
50
Backrest inclination adjustment Lift the lever (1) on the left-hand side of the seat frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The backrest will lock in position when the lever is released. Travel isolator Having selected the required fore/aft position, the seat is permitted a limited, spring controlled, fore/aft movement (float) if the travel isolator (2) is pulled up. This, in conjunction with the air suspension, will provide the optimum in ride comfort. To cancel the float movement, push the travel isolator down while slowly moving the seat fore and aft until the seat locks in position.
2--27
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Suspension damper Turn the knob (3) clockwise (toward the rear) for a softer ride. Turn anti-clockwise if a firmer ride is required. NOTE: The suspension damper is not fitted to tractors with Ride Firmness control.
51 Right--hand armrest height adjustment The right--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to provide a comfortable operating height. To adjust the height of the armrest, loosen the knob (1). Grasp the armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the complete assembly. Re--tighten the clamp knob securely. Shoulder support The deluxe seat features an integrated shoulder support (2) (upper backrest). The support may be adjusted vertically by using the handgrip at the rear of the cushion. Push down on the top of the support to lower. Lumbar adjustment The seat has a built-in lumbar support actuated by a thumb wheel (3) located at the rear of the seat on the left--hand side. To increase lumbar support, rotate the thumbwheel upwards, to decrease support rotate downwards.
2--28
52
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Left--hand armrest height adjustment The left--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to provide a comfortable operating height. To adjust the height of the armrest, loosen the two bolts (4). Grasp the armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the complete assembly. Re--tighten the two bolts securely. Left--hand armrest angle adjustment Rotate the knurled wheel (5) on the underside of each armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest to a comfortable position. When not required, both armrests may be lifted to the vertical position.
53
Storage pocket A storage pocket for documents, etc., is provided on the back of the seat. Leather trimmed seat Adjustments and settings for leather trimmed seats are the same as the Deluxe Air Suspension seat as previously described.
54
2--29
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION SEAT BELT AND OPERATOR PRESENCE SWITCH (where fitted)
WARNING
Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab and retractable seat belt. Always use the seat belt when a safety cab is fitted. Do not use a seat belt if the tractor is not equipped with a safety cab. To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and push the tongue (1) into the buckle end (2) until a ‘click’ indicates it is properly engaged. To disengage, press the red release button (3) on the buckle and remove the tongue from the buckle.
55
The operator presence switch, installed beneath the seat, is connected to an audible alarm which will sound if the operator leaves the seat with the PTO engaged or without applying the parking brake. INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT (where fitted) A folding instructional seat is available where local legislation permits. To raise the seat backrest, lift to the upright position. The seat will be retained in the upright position by the gas strut (1). When not required fold the upper part of the seat down to reveal the drinks holder.
WARNING
Always use the seat belt with a safety cab or ROPS frame installed. Do not use a seat belt if the tractor is not equipped with a safety cab or ROPS. IMPORTANT: The fold down seat is fitted for operator training or instructional purposes only, it is not intended for passenger conveyance. Passengers should not be carried in the cab at any time.
2--30
56
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION PARKING BRAKE, THROTTLE AND FOOT PEDALS Parking Brake A conventional parking brake lever is installed to the left of the driver’s seat. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up. A warning light will illuminate in the instrument panel when the parking brake is applied. To release, ease the lever up further, depress the button (1) on the end and lower the lever fully.
57
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the parking brake is fully released before driving off. Clutch/Inching Pedal When the clutch pedal (1) is depressed the drive between the engine and transmission will be disengaged. Use the pedal to transfer engine power smoothly to the driving wheels when moving off from a standstill. See ‘TRANSMISSION’ later in this section for further details. NOTE: To avoid premature wear, do not use the clutch pedal as a footrest.
58 Foot Throttle The foot throttle (1) may be used independently of the hand throttle to control the speed of the tractor. It is recommended that you use the foot throttle when driving on the highway. NOTE: When the foot throttle is released, engine speed will reduce to the level set by the hand throttle. When using the foot throttle, set the hand throttle to the minimum speed position (lever fully rearward).
59
2--31
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Hand Throttle The hand throttle (1) may be used independently of the foot throttle to control the speed of the tractor. Move the throttle lever forward to increase engine speed. IMPORTANT: Always return the hand throttle to the idle position when using the foot throttle for road transport applications.
60 Footbrakes The brakes are actuated by the two foot pedals (1) and (2). When operating in the field they may be unlocked and operated independently, to aid turning in confined spaces. When independent braking is not required, ensure both pedals are locked together to provide normal braking.
WARNING
On four wheel drive tractors the drive to the front axle is automatically engaged at speeds above 8.5 km/h (4 MPH) when the brakes are applied to provide four wheel braking. Owners should be aware of the effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly enhances braking performance. Appropriate care should be exercised during heavy braking.
61
IMPORTANT: Hydraulic trailer brakes will only operate when both brakes are applied.
WARNING
For your safety, always lock the brake pedals together when travelling at transport speeds or if a hydraulically braked trailer is attached to the tractor. To lock the pedals together, engage the locking pin in the right pedal and swivel the latch (1), over the left pedal support to lock, as shown.
62
2--32
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS The following text describes the use of the various controls mounted on the steering column. Steering Column Adjustment The steering column on your tractor may be tilted and telescoped. Pull the end of the clamp lever (2) up (toward you). Move the steering column/wheel to the most convenient position and return the clamp lever to the fully down position to lock the steering column assembly. To alter the steering column height, loosen the centre boss (1) on the steering wheel by turning anti--clockwise. Move the steering wheel to the most convenient position and re--tighten the centre boss. IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with hydrostatic power steering. Never hold the steering wheel at full left or right lock (wheels against the steering stops) for more than 10 seconds or for more than a total of 10 seconds in any one minute. Failure to observe this precaution may result in damage to steering system components.
63
Key-start Switch The key-start switch activates the grid heater cold start device, accessories and the starting motor. See ‘Starting the Engine’ in Section 3.
64
2--33
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Multi-function Switch The stalk-type switch is mounted on the left-hand side of the steering column. The switch controls the tractor lights, horn and turn signals. The centre of the stalk switch rotates. With reference to Figure 65, turn the switch away from you, to position 2, to turn on the instrument and position lights. Turn the switch to position 1 to select the headlights. With the headlights on, push the stalk away from you, position 3, to change from dipped to high beam. Pull the stalk toward you, position 4, to change back to dipped beam. With high beam selected, the blue indicator light on the instrument panel is illuminated.
65
With the headlights off, pull the stalk towards you, position 5, against spring pressure, to flash the headlight high beam. The stalk will return to the central position when released. Move the stalk to position 6 to operate the right turn signals, position 7 will activate the left turn signals. Indicator lights on the instrument panel will also flash when the turn signals are actuated. A warning buzzer will sound if the indicators are not cancelled within 20 seconds. NOTE: With the optional self cancelling indicators the warning buzzer is deleted. NOTE: The turn signals will only operate with the key-start switch turned on. Press in the end of the stalk, position 8, to sound the horn. Follow You Home Lights When leaving the tractor at night, external illumination can be provided for a limited period by operating the headlight flasher switch within 30 seconds of key--off. This will illuminate the dip beam headlights and, depending on switch status, one of the worklamps. Each movement of the headlight flasher will provide 30 seconds of illumination up to a maximum of 31/2 minutes after which the lights will automatically extinguish.
2--34
66
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Hazard Warning Lights Switch Press the left-hand side of the switch (1) to operate all the turn signals simultaneously. The switch will flash with the turn signals.
67 Windscreen Wipe/Wash Control The stalk-type control on the right-hand side of the steering column controls the front and rear screen wipe and wash functions. With the key-start switch on, move the stalk rearward, to position 2 and the front wiper will operate at the slower of the two wiper speeds, move to position 3 for the faster speed. Press in the end of the stalk, position 1, to operate the electric screen wash. 68 From the centre ’off’ position move the stalk downward to position 4 for intermittent front wipe. Move the stalk upward against spring pressure for single sweep operation, position 3. On release, the switch will return to the off position. To operate the rear screen wiper, rotate the end of the switch clockwise to position 1 for intermittent rear wipe and to position 2 for rear screen wash. The switch will return automatically to the intermittent mode when released. NOTE: Windscreen washer jets are mounted in the cab frame, immediately beneath the roof. Insert a pin into the jet nozzle to adjust the angle of the jet.
69
2--35
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT The Integrated control unit (ICU) consists of three analogue gauges (1) , a liquid crystal display (2) and a dot matrix display (3). In addition to the gauges and digital displays, there are a number of coloured lights (4) providing other operating information or warning of system malfunction. A keypad (5), located at the bottom of the ICU is used to select and/or change the settings displayed in the digital display screens. The illustration shows a tractor with the optional enhanced keypad.
70
GAUGES Engine Oil Pressure Gauge When the engine is running, this gauge (1) indicates the oil pressure in the engine lubrication system. If the oil pressure falls below safe limits while the engine is running, a warning light in the gauge will illuminate. This will be accompanied by a warning buzzer and symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix Display. Stop the engine and investigate the cause. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge (2) indicates the temperature of the engine coolant. If the needle enters the upper (red) section while the engine is running a warning light in the gauge will illuminate, stop the engine and investigate the cause. Fuel Level Gauge The gauge (3) indicates the combined level of fuel in both tanks and is only operative with the key-start switch turned on. If the quantity of fuel in the tanks falls to a critical level a yellow warning light will illuminate in the gauge. See Section 8 for fuel capacities.
2--36
71
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHTS The coloured lights provide operating information or give warning of system malfunction. Illumination of a warning light may be accompanied by an audible alarm (see page 2--67). NOTE: All indicator and warning lights will illuminate for a short period at ’key--on’ as the electrical systems carry out a self diagnostic check. 1. Red Stop light -- If Stop light comes on stop the tractor immediately and investigate the cause. A warning symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix Display to confirm the location of the fault. 2. Trailer brake pressure. Italy only -- Light will illuminate to indicate that hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit is low. Stop the tractor and investigate the cause. NOTE: Light will also illuminate when the handbrake is applied as this will release pressure in the trailer brake circuit. All air braking systems -- Light will illuminate to indicate the pressure in the air brake system has fallen below 4.5 bar (65.2 lbf.in2). Stop the tractor and investigate the cause. 3. Headlight high beam -- Light will illuminate when the tractor lights are switched to high beam. 4. Amber warning light -- Illumination of this light will be accompanied by a warning symbol in the Dot Matrix Display. Stop the tractor and investigate the cause. 5. Brake pedals not latched -- Light will illuminate to show when pedal latch is unlocked (Japan only).
72
6. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with tractor/trailer turn signals when a trailer is attached
2--37
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Indicator and Warning Lights (continued) 7. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with tractor/trailer turn signals when a second trailer is attached. 8. Rear differential lock -- Light will illuminate when the differential lock is engaged. NOTE: In auto diff lock mode, this light will flash when the diff lock is automatically dis--engaged. 9. Fast Steer -- Orange light will illuminate when steering wheel ring is depressed to engage Fast Steer function. 10. Fast Steer -- Green light will illuminate when Fast Steer system is energised (isolator switch ’ON’). 11. Right turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor right-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20 seconds (tractor moving) or 5 minutes (tractor Stationary). 12. Front auto PTO function -- The light will illuminate when the Auto PTO function is enabled. Each time the implement is raised with Auto PTO activated, the light will flash. When the implement is lowered into work the light will cease to flash and become steady. 13. Not used. 14. Front suspesnsion -- Light will illuminate to indicate front suspension switch is in the locked position (suspension de--activated). 15. Left turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor left-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20 seconds (5 minutes with tractor stationary). 16. Engine exhaust brake -- Light will illuminate when exhaust brake system is activated.
2--38
73
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION 17. Rear Auto PTO function -- The light will illuminate when the Auto PTO function is enabled. Each time the implement is raised and the PTO is stopped, the light will flash. When the implement is lowered into work and the PTO engages, the light will cease to flash and become steady. 18. Four wheel drive -- Light will illuminate when the drive to the front wheels is engaged. NOTE: In auto four wheel drive mode, this light will flash when four wheel drive has been automatically dis--engaged. 19. Parking lights -- Light will illuminate when the tractor lights are switched on. 20. Parking brake -- Light will illuminate with key-start switch on and parking brake applied. If the key-start switch is turned off and the parking brake not applied, or the operator leaves the seat without applying the parking brake, a warning buzzer will sound and the parking brake lamp will flash for approximately 10 seconds or until the parking brake has been applied.
74
2--39
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAYS IMPORTANT: On tractors equipped with the optional AFS 200 Monitor, a number of displays and setting procedures will change. Consult the AFS 200 Monitor Operator’s Manual for details. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) at the top of the instrument panel is divided into three sections covering engine functions, groundspeed and a time display. Engine Function Display (1) The upper part of the engine display consists of a digital tachometer and four warning lights relating to engine functions, these are from left to right: •
Cold start device -- Light will illuminate when the grid heater is activated using the key--start switch.
•
Engine power boost activated -- Light will illuminate to indicate engine power boost has been activated.
•
Engine Speed Management -- Light will iluminate when ESM function is engaged. NOTE: When programme 2 is selected, ’2’ will appear above the symbol, in programme 1 the number is not shown.
Groundspeed Display (2) Displays the tractor groundspeed in MPH or Km/h. (See changing the groundspeed display, page 2--47) Digital Clock (3) The digital clock can be set to display the time in 12 or 24 hour mode. (See changing the clock display, page 2--46)
2--40
75
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION DOT MATRIX AND CENTRAL DISPLAY The Dot Matrix and Central Display consists of five individual sections in which various tractor functions can be displayed. Where Electro Hydraulic Remote Valve* (EHR) functions are shown, the three centre sections are combined into one display. Using the keypad, the displays can be configured to show the following functions: 1. Hourmeter, permanently displays the number of hours the tractor engine has operated. 2. Battery voltage EHR valve* visualisation. Select required valve display by repeated operation of key 2. To toggle between front and rear displays, depress and hold key 2 for two seconds. 3. Rear or front* 3--point hitch position EHR valve* visualisation, select valve by repeated operation of key 3. 4. Air brake system pressure* EHR valve* visualisation.
76
5. Rear or front* PTO shaft speed. Select function using key 1. When the central display is configured for EHR visualisation (Dot Matrix Display), the screen will provide the following information: 1. Hourmeter 2. EHR Visulisation. 3. Rear or front* PTO shaft speed. *Where fitted
77
2--41
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION KEYPAD The standard keypad consists of six keys, a number of which have a dual function. 1. Rear or front* PTO selection. 2. Electro Hydraulic Remote Valve* visualisation. Home/Escape key in SETUP mode. 3. Rear or front* 3--point hitch display. 4. Arrow DOWN / Select Digit. EHR* valve setting, reduce oil flow. 5. Enter SETUP mode. EHR* visualisation, exit display. 6. Arrow UP / Increase Digit value. EHR* valve setting, increase oil flow. *Where fitted.
2--42
78
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION SELECTING OR CHANGING THE DISPLAY SETTINGS Changes to the settings and values within the digital displays are made using the keypad at the bottom of the ICU. NOTE: A delay of more than 2 seconds in the set--up procedure will cause the process to time out and any unsaved changes will be lost. Key Functions 1. Select rear or front Power Take Off speed display. 2. Home/Escape key. Depress this key to exit set--up mode and return to the initial screen after making changes to the display settings. When equipped with Electro Hydraulic Remote Valves, this key selects the flow and directional visualisation for each valve.
1. Rear and front* PTO speed display.
2. Home/Escape key and Electro Hydraulic Remote Valve (EHR) display*.
NOTE: The Home/Escape key can also be used to exit set--up at any time but any unsaved data will be lost.
3. Rear or front* 3--point hitch position.
3. This key toggles between the rear and front 3--point hitch position display: ’0’ = 3--point hitch fully lowered. ’100’ = 3--point hitch fully raised.
4. Menu scroll UP/change digit value and EHR flow setting*.
4. Menu scroll UP. When making a setting change, use this key to scroll UP through the menu screens or to increase the value of a digit. To enter a lower value continue to depress the key until the appropriate value is displayed.
* Where fitted.
When making changes to Electro Hydraulic Remote Valve (EHR) settings, this key INCREASES oil flow through the valve when the appropriate remote valve visualisation is displayed.
2--43
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Key Functions (continued) 5. The Menu/Enter key is used to access the menu and to select the various displays. Depress this key to save any new settings after making changes. 6. Menu scroll DOWN. When making a setting change, use this key to scroll DOWN through the menu screens or to select the digit to be changed. When making changes to the Electro Hydraulic Remote Valve (EHR) settings, this key REDUCES oil flow through the valve when the appropriate remote valve visualisation is displayed.. Changing the Display Set--up With the tractor stationary and the key--start ON, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds, the SETUP MENU screen will appear, pause for two seconds and one of the following displays will appear. CAL (tractors without groundspeed radar only) OR Clock setup (tractors with groundspeed radar) Using the UP/DOWN keys other displays can now be accessed. Each time the DOWN key is depressed new displays will appear in the following order, using the UP key this order will be reversed. Clock setup (tractors without groundspeed radar) MPH/Km/h setup BEEP On/Off Implement Width (tractors with enhanced keypad and performance monitor only)
2--44
5. Menu/Enter key.
6. Menu scroll DOWN/select digit and EHR flow setting*. * Where fitted.
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Wheelslip Alarm (tractors with enhanced keypad and groundspeed radar) Service Interval (tractors with enhanced keypad) Engine Auto Shutdown Error Code Visualisation AFS 200 Monitor ON/OFF line (where fitted) Instrument Cluster Backlight Adjustment SETUP SCREEN (tractors with enhanced keypad) DIGITAL CLOCK The digital clock provides a constant read--out of the time and can be set to display the hours in 12 or 24 hour configuration. Setting the Time To set the time carry out the following procedure. •
With the clock screen displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key to select the clock symbol and SET screen.
•
Depress the Menu/Enter key and the display will change to show 00:00 (or a previously set time display). The left--hand digit in the display will start to flash.
•
Use the UP key to set the value of the first digit. If a lower figure is required, continue to depress the UP key until the lower figure appears. With the first figure set, depress the DOWN key to select the next digit to be changed.
•
Repeat the above procedure until the time display is correct.
•
Depress the Menu/Enter key again, Value XX:XX* Saved will appear in the display and the LCD clock will automatically update. Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display.
79
*XX:XX represents the time display.
2--45
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Changing the Time Display The clock can be set to show the time in either 12 or 24 hour modes, the display can be changed using the following method. •
With the clock screen displayed depress the Menu/Enter key to select the clock symbol and SET screen.
•
Using the UP/DOWN keys, select the display showing the clock symbol and 12/24, depress the Menu/Enter key again. 80
•
The new display will provide a choice of 12 or 24 hour time modes, use the UP/DOWN keys to align the arrow with 12 or 24 and then depress the Menu/Enter key.
•
The screen will change to show Value 24h Saved, or Value 12h Saved depending on the time display selected. In the LCD the clock display will automatically update.
•
Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and recall the normal operating display.
2--46
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION TRACTOR SPEED DISPLAY The tractor speed display provides a read--out of the tractor ground speed in Km/h or MPH. Changing the Speed Display •
With the MPH Km/h screen displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key.
•
The screen will change to show values MPH(US), MPH(UK), and Km/h, use the UP/DOWN keys to align the arrow with the desired speed value.
•
With the arrow aligned to the required speed value, depress the Menu/Enter key again, Value XXX Saved* will appear in the screen and the LCD speed display will automatically update.
•
81
Pause for 2 seconds and the display will return to the MPH Km/h set--up screen, depress the home/escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display. . *XXX represents the speed value.
NOTE: Changing the speed setting from Km/h to MPH will cause all other diplay values in the LCD and DMD to change from Metric to Imperial. IMPORTANT: For operations in the UK, ensure MPH (UK) is selected otherwise the accuracy of any area/fuel calculations will be compromised. As liquid volume based on the US gallon are smaller than UK volumes, it is important the correct value is used during the set--up procedure.
82
2--47
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION AUDIBLE ’BEEP’ ON/OFF The keypad can be set to provide an audible ’beep’ each time a key is depressed. If this feature is not required the ’beep’ can be turned off. •
With the BEEP On/Off screen displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key.
•
The display will change to the On/Off selection screen. Using the UP/DOWN keys move the arrow to align with Off and depress the Menu/Enter key again. 83
•
The screen will now show Value OFF Saved. Pause for 2 seconds and the display will return to the BEEP On/Off screen, depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display.
2--48
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION BACKLIGHT ADJUSTMENT The brightness of the instrument displays may be adjusted to suit varying light conditions. •
With the Tachometer symbol depress the Menu/Enter key.
displayed,
•
The screen will change to show a MIN -- MAX bargraph display that represents the level of backlighting.
•
By depressing the UP/DOWN keys the bargraph, and backlight intensity, will increase or decrease accordingly.
•
To save the setting, depress the Menu/Enter key again, Value Saved will appear in the display.
•
Pause for 2 seconds until the Tachometer Symbol appears in the display then depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display.
84
2--49
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN Your tractor is equipped with an automatic engine shut--down function for protectection against accidental damage should an engine based malfunction occur. Further details can be found on page 3--9. The mode of engine shutdown can only be selected by your authorised dealer using specialised equipment. •
•
With the Engine symbol displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key. The display will change to show the Engine Symbol and NO, YES1 or YES2 (depending on tractor specification).
NOTE: This display is advisory only, no changes can be made to the setting shown on the display. •
Depress the Home/Escape key TWICE to exit the engine shutdown screen and return to the normal operating display.
2--50
85
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION CALIBRATING THE GROUND SPEED DISPLAY Should you wish to install alternative rear tyre equipment that would provide a radius difference of more than 13 mm (0.5 in), then the electronic control module should be re--calibrated to display an accurate ground speed figure. To re--calibrate use one of the following methods: IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the optional slip control feature, then the ground speed displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit, calibration is therefore not required and the calibration menu will not be available in SETUP. •
Ensure that the tyre pressures are correct for the load being carried. (See Tyre Load/Inflation tables in Section 3 of this manual).
•
Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground (preferably concrete) and carefully measure out a distance of exactly 100.0 m (328 feet). Mark the start and finish of this measured distance with a bold chalk line.
Auto Calibration •
Park the tractor a short distance from the start line and, with the engine running, depress the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds.
•
SETUP_MENU will appear in the Dot Matrix Display, pause for two seconds and the display will change to CAL. Depress the Menu/Enter key again to display CAL manual. Using the scroll UP/DOWN keys select CAL auto. Depress the Menu/Enter key to confirm selection and the display will change to CAL auto READY, the counter at the top of the screen will show 0000.
NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at any time by turning the key--start off or depressing the Home/Escape key.
86
2--51
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION •
Select a suitable transmission ratio to provide a speed above 3 km/h (1.8 MPH) and drive up to the start line at a constant speed. As the centre of the front tyres pass over the start line, press and release the Menu/Enter key. CAL auto ON will appear in the Dot Matrix Display. The four digit figure in the counter will increase as the tractor moves forward.
NOTE: If the calibration procedure is incorrectly performed i.e. speed below 3 Km/h (1.8 MPH), the dot matrix display will revert to CAL auto READY. Start the sequence again increasing the tractor speed.
•
87
As the centre of the front tyres pass over the finish line, press and release the Menu/Enter key again, CAL auto OK will appear in the display. Depress the Menu/Enter key again to save the setting and return to the CAL AUTO/MAN screen, depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operation display.
If the auto set--up procedure was not completed successfully, the display will show CAL auto NOT OK. Depress the Home/Escape key to return to the CAL auto screen and then Menu/Enter to re--start the calibration procedure. 88
2--52
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Manual Calibration The manual calibration allows the operator to set the rolling circumference of the rear tyre without the need to drive over a measured distance. Consult the table on page 2--54 and make a note of the rolling circumference figure for your tyre size. If the correct tyre size is not in the table obtain the figure from your authorised dealer or tyre supplier. IMPORTANT: When entering a new tyre rolling circumference figure, use metric values (centimetres) with Km/h speedometer reading and Imperial values (inches) with MPH reading. •
With the tractor stationary and the key--start on, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds.
•
SETUP_MENU will appear in the dot matrix display, pause for two seconds and the display will change to CAL. Depress the Menu/Enter key to display the CAL manual screen, depress the Menu/Enter key again to access the set--up display CAL man 100.0.
•
The first digit on the left side of the display will start to flash. Using the scroll UP key, set the value of the first digit. When the value has been set use the scroll DOWN key to move the cursor to the next figure on the right and repeat the process. 89
•
When the new rolling circumference figure has been entered into the display, depress the Menu/Enter key again to save the setting. The display will change to Value XXX.X Saved*. *XXX.X represents the rolling circumference figure.
•
Pause for 2 seconds and the display will change to CAL AUTO/MAN. Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display.
NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at any time by depressing the Home/Escape key.
90
2--53
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Ground Speed Calibration Factors The rolling circumference for any given tyre size will vary depending on tyre manufacturer. The figures shown in the table are an average based on rolling circumference data supplied by several manufacturers. To obtain an accurate figure for your rear tyres, consult your authorised dealer or tyre supplier. If the size of tyre on your tractor is not listed, then the road speed calibration may be carried out using one of the following procedures. Carry out the Auto calibration as previously described or measure the rear tyre rolling circumference. 1. To measure the rolling circumference of the rear tyre, park the tractor on a level surface and make a vertical chalk mark on the sidewall where the tyre tread contacts the ground. Make a second chalk mark on the ground aligning with the mark on the tyre. 2. Slowly drive the tractor forward until the rear wheel has made one revolution and the chalk mark on the sidewall is again in contact with the ground. Mark the ground again and measure the distance between the two chalk marks. IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the optional slip control feature, then the ground speed displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit, calibration is therefore not required.
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor emits a low intensity microwave signal which will not cause any ill effects in normal use. Although the signal intensity is low, do not look directly into the face of the sensor while in operation so as to avoid eye damage.
2--54
Rear Tyre Rolling Circumferences Tyre Size 20.8R 580/70R 650/65R 650/75R 710/70R 710/60R 18.4R 20.8R 580/70R 650/65R 620/70R 14.9R 420/80R 480/80R 520/85R 18.4R 320/90R 320/90R
-------------------
Tyre Rolling Circumference 38 38 38 38 38 42 42 42 42 42 42 46 46 46 46 46 50 54
Centimetres
Inches
550.1 543.6 545.3 581.1 576.2 567.5 555.7 581.5 569.0 577.6 580.9 554.2 555.5 587.2 608.8 587.0 559.0 529.0
216.6 214.0 214.7 228.8 226.8 223.4 218.8 228.9 224.0 227.4 228.7 218.2 218.7 231.2 239.7 231.1 220.1 208.3
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION ENHANCED KEYPAD AND PERFORMANCE MONITOR (where fitted) The enhanced keypad consists of a number of buttons or ’keys’ that select, control or programme various tractor functions and displays in the central and dot matrix screens. Keys 6, 8, 9 and 10 are used to set--up and programme many of the enhanced keypad functions. Unless otherwise described, depress the keys once to obtain the appropriate display. A symbol will appear in the display to confirm the function selected. 1. PTO Speed. Depress once to display rear Power Take Off speed, press again for front PTO speed (where fitted). 2. Rear Wheel Slip. The level of rear wheel slip will appear as a one or two digit percentage (%) figure (with radar option only). 3. Combined function, Hourmeter and Trailer Brake Air Pressure. Hourmeter. Touch the key to view total number of hours that the tractor has operated. The hours recorded should be used as a guide to the service intervals for the tractor. Trailer Brake Air Pressure. The display will show the air pressure in the trailer braking system in bar graph format (where fitted).
91
4. Hitch Height Position. Depress once to display the rear hitch height, press again to show front linkage height (where fitted). The display will show a percentage figure between ’0’ (fully lowered) and ’100’ (fully raised). 5. Odometer (D). The odometer provides a visual record of the distance travelled in kilometres or miles depending on the ground speed unit selected. Depress repeatedly to toggle between displays 1 and 2.
2--55
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION ENHANCED KEYPAD (continued) 6. Home/Escape. Use this key to Exit or cancel set--up and programming modes. 7. Remote Valve Operation. The display will show the flow rate through each valve as a percentage (%), the direction of cylinder movement (extend, retract or neutral), the number and location of the valve selected (front or rear). (See Electronic Remote Control Valves in Section 3). 8. Menu Scroll Down or Digit Select. Depress this key to scroll downwards through the menu or select an alternative digit in the Dot Matrix Display. Also used to decrease oil flow when programming Electronic Remote Valves. (See Electronic Remote Control Valves in Section 3). 9. Menu Scroll Up or Digit Value. Depress this key repeatedly to scroll upwards through the menu or change the value of a number. Also used to increase oil flow when programming Electronic Remote Valves. (See Electronic Remote Control Valves in Section 3). 10. Menu Enter. Depress and hold for three seconds to select set--up and programming modes. This key is also used to exit Electronic Remote Valve visualisation, depress once to exit. 11. Programmed Maintenance Reminder. The maintenance schedule key provides two levels of reminder identified as ’Heavy’ and ’Light’. Depress key repeatedly to toggle between ’Heavy’ and ’Light’ displays. 12. Area Accumulator or Area Forecaster. Depress key to access dual display: Upper display: Area Accumulator -- The total area worked will be displayed in hectares or acres depending on the ground speed unit selected. Lower display: Area per Hour Forecaster -The area/hour symbol will display together with a forecast of the area that will be worked in one hour if the current rate of work is continued.
2--56
92
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION DOT MATRIX AND CENTRAL DISPLAY with PERFORMANCE MONITOR When equipped with Enhanced Keypad and Perfomance Monitor, the Central and Dot Matrix screens are multi--functional. Each of the five sections can be configured to provide different operating information. When it is required to use the Dot Matrix Display, the three centre sections combine to make one screen. The lower section can be used to permanently display one of the tractor functions when the three centre sections are used in the Dot Matrix format. Using the Enhanced Keypad, the displays can be configured to show the following functions:
1. Central Display (Tractor hours displayed). Rear or front* PTO shaft speed. Rear or front* 3--point hitch position. Rear wheel slip factor. 2. Configurable display 1. (Battery voltage displayed) EHR visualisation*. Performance Monitor display. 3. Configurable display 2. (Rear hitch position displayed) EHR visualisation*. Performance Monitor display.
93
4. Configurable display 3. (Air brake pressure displayed) EHR visualisation*. Performance Monitor display. 5. Configurable for permanent display. (Rear PTO displayed) *Where fitted
2--57
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Configurable Displays Each of the four configurable displays can be set to show one of the following screens (depending on tractor specification). •
Battery voltage
•
Wheelslip (%)
•
Front hitch height (%)
•
Rear hitch height (%)
•
Front PTO speed
•
Rear PTO speed
•
Engine hours
•
Heavy service reminder
•
Light service reminder
•
Air brake pressure (%)
•
Odometer 1
•
Odometer 2
•
Area worked
•
Area per hour
94
Configuring the Displays To configure the screens for Sections 2, 3, 4 and 5 carry out the following procedure. •
With the tractor stationary and the key--start on, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds.
•
SETUP MENU will appear in the Dot Matrix Display, depress the Menu/Enter or UP/DOWN keys to display CAL. (Alternatively, pause for 2 seconds and the display will automatically change from SETUP MENU to CAL).
NOTE: On tractors with groundspeed radar CAL will not be shown. The display will change from SETUP MENU to CLOCK. •
Using the UP/DOWN keys, scroll through the various screens until SETUP SCREEN appears. Depress the Menu/Enter key again and a 5 section screen will appear.
2--58
95
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION •
The screen will show the segment numbers for each of the displays i.e. #1, #2, #3 and #4. The number for segment #1 will be enclosed by a black box. Using the UP/DOWN keys, move the box to the display that is to be re--configured.
•
With the display number outlined in the required section, depress the Menu/Enter key and the box will move to the right. The symbol within that box will appear inversed (grey symbol on black background) Use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll through the symbols until the required symbol is displayed. Depress the Menu/Enter key again to save the setting.
96
By following the above procedure, the remaining configurable displays can be changed to provide the desired operating information. •
After setting the configurable displays, depress the Home/Escape key twice to exit setup and return to the normal operating display.
NOTE: Operating information shown in Section 5 will remain constantly displayed irrespective of any changes made to the Central or Dot Matrix Displays. NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at any time by depressing the Home/Escape key but any unsaved information will be lost.
2--59
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION PERFORMANCE MONITOR Odometer (Distance Record) The odometer provides a visual record of the distance travelled in kilometres or miles depending on the ground speed unit selected. Depress the Odometer key to display the distance travelled. Two displays are available, ’1’ and ’2’. ’1’ may be used for individual journey distances and ’2’ to provide a total for all journeys travelled. Both displays may be reset to zero. Touch the key once to select reading ’1’, touch again to select reading ’2’. Keeping the key depressed for more than 3 seconds will re--set the selected odometer to zero. The journey distance in the display will appear in steps of: 0 to 19.999 Km/Miles
0.001 Km/Miles
20 to 199.99 Km/Miles
0.01 Km/Miles
200 to 1999.9 Km/Miles
0.1 Km/Miles
2000 to 19999 Km/Miles
1.0 Km/Miles
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, distance calculations are based on axle rotation and are subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that may occur.
2--60
97
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Area Accumulator (upper display) NOTE: Before activating the area accumulator function ensure the correct implement width has been entered into the TPM memory. The accumulated area (total area worked) and area forecaster (Ha/Acre per hour) can be displayed by depressing the AREA key (1). Depending on the unit set in the tractor speed display (K/mh or MPH) the reading will be in hectares or acres. Depress the area key repeatedly to toggle through the three displays in the dot matrix screen: 1. Auto. Area accumulation will start recording when the tractor moves and the implement is lowered. It will stop accumulating when the implement is raised.
98
2. On. Area accumulator on. Area will be accumulated as the tractor moves irrespective of the position of the implement. 3. Off. The area accumulator is stopped but the area forecaster will continue to function. The symbols for area accumulator (2) and area forecaster (3) will appear in the display along with the relevant figures. With trailed equipment, area accumulation may be temporarily interrupted, for example, at the headland, by means of a switch connected into the implement status socket (where fitted). See ‘Electrical Power Panel’ on page 2--20.
99
2--61
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION The area measurement in the display (3) will appear in steps of: 0 to 199.99 Ha/acre
0.01 Ha/acre
200 to 1999.9 Ha/acre
0.1 Ha/acre
2000 to 19999 Ha
1.0 Ha
2000 to 49418 acre
1.0 acre
Area accumulation can be reset to zero at any time by selecting OFF and holding down the AREA key (1) Figure 98, until the display returns to zero. Area per Hour Forecaster (lower display) The area forecast will appear in steps of 1.0 Ha/Acre per hour. NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per hour calculations are based on axle speed and are subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that may occur.
2--62
100
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Setting the Implement Width In order that the micro-processor may calculate the cumulative area worked or arear/hour figure, the working width of the implement must be entered into the memory. For example, to enter an implement working width of 6.50 metres (21.3 ft.) carry out the following procedure. •
With the implement width symbol displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key to access the width setup screen. The display will show 0.00 (unless a previous width has been entered) and the first digit on the left will be flashing.
NOTE: With display set to provide Imperial values the width measurement will show 00.00 (feet). •
The width is set using the UP key to change the value of the flashing digit and the DOWN key to select the next digit to be changed.
•
To set an implement width of 6.50 meters depress the UP key until left digit reads ’6’. Move the cursor to the right of the decimal point and enter ’5’ then ’0’. The display should now read 6.50 meters (21.3 ft.).
•
Depress the Menu/Enter key again, the display will change to Value 6.50 Saved.
•
Pause for 2 seconds and the display will revert to the implement width setup screen. Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display.
IMPORTANT: The micro--processor cannot calculate the area worked or area/hour figure unless the correct implement width is entered.
101
102
2--63
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Setting the Wheel Slip Alarm Point (where fitted) If your tractor is equipped with optional ground speed radar, the percentage (%) of rear wheel slip may be displayed. The slip factor is calculated from information provided by the transmission speed sensor (theoretical ground speed) and the radar (true ground speed). NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, the slip alarm function will be omitted from the display. The slip alarm point may be set as a one or two digit figure that, if exceeded, will cause an audible alarm to sound. To set a wheel slip limit of 15% carry out the following procedure. •
With the wheel slip screen displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key to select the wheel slip percentage change screen.
•
The first digit in the display will start to flash. To modify the slip factor, use the UP key to change the value of the flashing digit and the DOWN key to select the next digit for change.
•
To set a slip factor of 15, depress the UP key until the flashing digit reads ’1’ then move the cursor to the right using the DOWN key and enter ’5’.
•
Depress the Menu/Enter key again, the display will change to Value 15 Saved.
•
Pause for 2 seconds and the display will revert to the wheel slip setup screen. Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display.
NOTE: The wheel slip alarm is an advisory function only. Any adjustments required to reduce tractor wheel slip must be applied manually.
2--64
103
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Setting a Heavy Service Reminder The service reminder function allows the operator to programme two service interval reminders using the Enhanced Keypad. The following procedure is the same for LIGHT and HEAVY service intervals. •
With the service reminder screen displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key.
•
The HEAVY service screen will appear (to select the LIGHT screen use the UP/DOWN keys). Depress the Menu/Enter key and the display will change to HEAVY 000 and the left--hand figure will flash..
•
To set a heavy service reminder of 600 (hours), depress the UP key until left digit reads ’6’ then move the cursor one place to the right with the DOWN key and enter ’0’, move the cursor again and enter the second ’0’.
•
Depress the Menu/Enter key again, the display will change to Value 600 Saved.
•
Pause for 2 seconds and the display will revert to the service setup screen. Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display.
Light Service Reminder: Two hours before a service is due, the Light Service symbol will be displayed at key--on and for 4 seconds after the engine has started.
104
105
Heavy Service Reminder: Ten hours before the set hours, the Heavy Service symbol and Amber warning light will be displayed at key--on and for 4 seconds after the engine has started. From 10 hours, the Heavy Service symbol and Amber warning light will be displayed every hour along with the remaining number of hours to the service interval. When the service reminder time limit is reached or exceeded, the hour figure will be replaced by 3 flashing bars.
2--65
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Checking Service Reminder Hours The hours remaining to both Light and Heavy service reminders can be accessed using the Maintenance Reminder key on the Enhanced Keypad. Depress the key repeatedly to toggle between Heavy and Light service reminder screens. NOTE: These screens provide a visual reminder only, the content of the screen can only be changed in programme setup mode. Disable the Service Reminder One, or both service reminders can be disabled if not required. •
Enter the service reminder hour setup screen as previously described and, starting with the first digit on the left enter 000. With the cursor flashing on the third digit (0) depress the Menu/Enter key. The display will change to Value OFF Saved and the service reminder will be disabled.
•
Pause for 2 seconds and the display will revert to the service setup screen. Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set--up and return to the normal operating display.
2--66
106
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION ALARM FUNCTIONS The illumination of a warning light may be accompanied by an audible alarm. Depending on the severity of the malfunction, one of the following alarms may be heard. Critical Alarm A continuous pulse alarm accompanied by the red warning light (1). The tractor must be stopped immeadiately. The alarm will sound until the fault is corrected or the engine switched off. Non Critical Alarm A 4 second pulsating alarm will be accompanied by the amber warning light (2). A failure or error has occurred but the operator may continue work. The fault should be rectified as soon as possible. Action Required
107
A two pulse alarm will sound for 1 second to advise the operator that a certain action is required. The alarm will continue to be present until the operator carries out the appropriate action or the tractor engine is switched off. Safety and General Alarms A continuous alarm will sound if the operator attempts to carry out an inappropriate action i.e. driving the tractor with the parking brake applied. Parking Lights A pulse alarm will sound for a short period if the engine is switched off and the parking lights are left on. Status ’Beep’ A ’beep’ will sound each time a key is depressed on the keypad. This sound may be disabled if required, see page 2--48.
2--67
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION ERROR CODES AND WARNINGS The advanced electronics on your tractor are able to detect a malfunction or error occurring in key areas such as engine, transmission, electrical and hydraulic systems. Should a malfunction or error occur, the relevant symbol and error code will appear in the Dot Matrix Display. NOTE: See page 2--71 to 2--75 for an explanation of warning and advisory symbols. This may be accompanied by the illumination of a warning light and an audible alarm depending on the severity of the fault. Consult your authorised dealer. Active and Non Active Warnings In addition to the error codes previously described, there are a number of other warning symbols that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. These symbols will be accompanied by either a Red (critical) or Amber (non--critical) warning light. Critical symbols appearing with a Red warning light will remain permanently displayed until the tractor is stopped and the fault rectified. Depending on the severity of the fault, non critical symbols accompanied by the Amber light will be displayed for five seconds before the DMD defaults to the symbol previously shown. The amber warning light will continue to illuminate. However, if the fault is of a simple nature then the Amber light may go out when the fault code disappears from the display. For more severe faults the Amber warning light may remain illuminated until the fault is recified. By using the keypad, active warnings that are not permanently displayed may be recalled.
2--68
108
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Accessing Stored Error Codes •
With the WARNING symbol screen displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key.
•
If an error code is present, the display will change to show the Code Number and appropriate Symbol. If no error codes are present, the display will not change, depress the Home/Escape key to exit the error code screen.
•
If one or more error codes are present, the display will cycle through all error codes displaying each one for 4 seconds. This will be repeated three times after which the display will return to the initial Error Code screen.
•
109
Depress the Home/Escape key to recall the normal operating display.
See page 5--2 for a list of error code symbols and their application. Consult your authorised dealer.
2--69
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION WARNING AND ADVISORY SYMBOLS There are a number of warning/advisory symbols that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. The symbols can be categorised into four main groups. 1. Warning. These symbols advise of a fault that is critical to the operation of the tractor. Stop the tractor as soon as possible, investigate the cause and rectify the fault. 2. Maintenance. These symbols tell the operator there is a concern relating to the basic functions of the tractor, ie. water contamination in the fuel, alternator not charging etc. 3. System Fault. The system fault symbols relate to an operational fault in one or more of the tractors main components, either electrical or mechanical. May be accompanied by a four digit fault code. Consult your authorised dealer. 4. Advisory. The advisory symbols are not detrimental to the operation of the tractor but should not be ignored. Take appropriate action where necessary.
2--70
110
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION ADVISORY DISPLAYS and INFORMATION DMD
PANEL LAMP
ALARM
CAUSE
ACTION
Amber flashing
Safety
Handbrake applied with vehicle moving.
Release handbrake.
Amber flashing
Safety
Operator leaves seat without applying handbrake.
Apply handbrake.
--
Action required
Handbrake not released during auto take--off.
Release handbrake.
--
Safety
Handbrake not applied at key OFF
Apply handbrake.
--
--
Action required
Drive engaged without depressing clutch pedal.
Cycle clutch pedal.
--
--
Action required
Shuttle lever in drive.
Place shuttle lever in neutral.
--
--
Action required
Transmission park lock engaged.
Disengage park lock.
--
--
Action required
Transmission oil temperature too low.
Run tractor until oil temperature increases.
--
--
Action required
Key ON, engine not running.
Turn key OFF or start engine.
--
--
General
Indicators not cancelled.
Cancel indicators.
--
--
Parking lights
Parking lights ON at key--off.
Turn parking lights OFF.
--
Amber flashing
Safety
Rear Power Take--Off engaged, operator not present.
If accompanied by critical alarm apply parking brake.
--
Amber flashing
Safety
Front Power Take--Off engaged operator not present.
If accompanied by critical alarm apply parking brake.
--
WARNING LAMP
2--71
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION ADVISORY DISPLAYS and INFORMATION (continued) DMD
2--72
PANEL LAMP
WARNING LAMP
ALARM
CAUSE
ACTION
--
Amber flashing
Non critical
Incorrect use of PTO control -- Timed Out.
Do not engage PTO until DMD symbol clears.
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
Non critical
Wheel slip limit exceeded.
Reduce tractor or implement draft load.
--
--
None
Instrument display backlighting.
Adjust backlighting to required level.
--
--
--
AFS 200 monitor present but not configured ’ON LINE’.
Configure to ’ON LINE’ status.
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
Non critical
Front remote valve not functioning due to insufficient oil flow. Lever or joystick not in neutral at key--on.
Reduce oil flow requirements to other services. Move lever or joystick control to neutral.
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
Non critical
Rear remote valve not functioning due to insufficient oil flow. Lever or joystick not in neutral at key--on.
Reduce oil flow requirements to other services. Move lever or joystick control to neutral.
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION WARNING DISPLAYS and INFORMATION DMD
PANEL LAMP
WARNING LAMP
ALARM
CAUSE
--
Red flashing
Critical
Transmission oil pressure low.
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
--
Transmission oil temperature too high.
These symbols advise of a fault that is critical to the operation of the tractor.
--
Red flashing
Critical
Engine coolant temperature too high.
Stop the tractor as soon as possible, investigate the cause and rectify the fault.
Red flashing
Critical
Engine oil pressure too low.
If the fault cannot be easily rectified, consult your authorised dealer.
--
Red flashing
Critical
Power steering oil pressure too low.
--
Red flashing
Non critical
Hydraulic pump charge pressure too low.
--
Amber flashing
Non critical
Network malfunction.
Amber flashing
Non critical
Air brake pressure low.
Amber flashing/ continuous
--
--
Amber flashing
Non critical
Battery voltage too low.
--
Red flashing
Non critical
Brake boost pressure too low.
--
Battery voltage too high.
ACTION
These symbols advise of a fault that may be critical to the operation of the tractor. Stop p the tractor as soon as possible, ibl iinvestigate i the h cause and rectify the fault. If the fault cannot be easily rectified, consult your authorised dealer.
2--73
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION WARNING DISPLAYS and INFORMATION -- WITH ENGINE SHUTDOWN ACTIVATED DMD
PANEL LAMP
WARNING LAMP
ALARM
CAUSE
ACTION
Red flashing
Critical
Engine oil pressure too low.
--
Red flashing
Critical
Transmission oil pressure low.
These symbols advise of a fault that is critical to the operation of the tractor tractor.
--
Red flashing
Critical
Transmission oil temperature too high.
Automatic engine shutdown will be activated and the engine will STOP.
--
Red flashing
Critical
Engine coolant temperature too high.
--
Red flashing
Critical
Engine control system malfunction.
--
Red flashing
Critical
Engine ECU control data compromised.
Investigate the cause and rectify the fault. If the fault cannot be easily rectified, consult your authorised dealer.
The Dot Matrix Display will cycle ENGINE STOP symbol with the appropriate warning symbol.
2--74
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION MAINTENANCE DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
DMD
PANEL LAMP
WARNING LAMP
ALARM
CAUSE
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
--
Alternator not charging.
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
--
Engine intake filter blocked.
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
Non critical
Water contamination in the fuel.
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
--
Transmission/Hydraulic oil filter blocked.
--
Amber flashing/ continuous
--
HEAVY maintenance schedule due in ’xx’ hours*.
--
--
--
LIGHT maintenance schedule due in ’xx’ hours*.
ACTION
These symbols advise of a fault that may y be critical t th to the operation ti off the th tractor. Stop the tractor as soon as possible, investigate the cause and rectify the fault. If the fault cannot be easily rectified, consult your authorised dealer.
* ’xx’ represents number of hours before next service.
2--75
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION This transmission is an electronically controlled full powershift transmission of an advanced design that offers many automated functions for easier operation. Subject to legal requirements in your country, the following transmissions are available 50 km/h transmission. 19 forward and 6 reverse ratios IMPORTANT: When travelling at high road speeds with trailed or semi--mounted equipment attached to the tractor, ensure the equipment is rated for 50 km/h operation in respect to its construction, brakes and tyres. 40 km/h Economy transmission 19 forward and 6 reverse ratios. 40 km/h transmission 18 forward and 6 reverse ratios plus optional 10 x 6 creeper range. 30 km/h transmission 17 forward and 6 reverse ratios (18th. gear cannot be selected) plus optional 10 x 6 creeper range. Details of creeper gear operation will be found on page 2--91. IMPORTANT: A tractor fitted with a full powershift transmission cannot be tow--started and must not be towed other than to remove it from a field or onto a trailer or truck. When towing the tractor, the speed should not exceed 5k/mh (3.1 MPH) with the engine switched off, or 10 k/mh (6.2 MPH) with the engine running. GROUND SPEED CHARTS The ground speed of your tractor may be displayed on the instrument panel. If your tractor is equipped with radar then the ground speed displayed will be a true reading. Tractors without radar will display a ground speed that is subject to minor inaccuracies due to the effects of wheel slip, tyre pressures, change of tyre size, etc. See Calibrating the Ground Speed on page 2--51. The charts starting on page 2--93 show the ground speeds in km/h and MPH. To find the road speed for your tractor in any given gear ratio, use the column with your rear tyre size in the heading.
2--76
111
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Clutch Pedal A clutch pedal (1) is provided but is not required for gear changes or forward/reverse shuttle operations. The clutch pedal is required only for positioning the tractor to attach equipment or if operating in confined spaces when the low ratios do not provide a slow enough speed, at moderate/low engine speeds, to give precise control. NOTE: The clutch pedal incorporates a safety start device and must be depressed when starting the tractor engine. IMPORTANT: To avoid premature wear, do not use the clutch pedal as a footrest.
112
Powershift Control The Powershift transmission is operated by means of a spring centered rocker switch. Depress the top of the switch (1) to upshift through the gears, depress the bottom of the switch (3) to downshift. Changes can be made on the move, even when performing operations such as ploughing, etc. A digital display (2) indicates both forward and reverse gear ratios. It is not necessary to depress the clutch pedal when using the upshift or downshift control. 113 The powershift control may be repositioned to suit the operator. Loosen the clamp knob (1), move the control to the most comfortable position by rotating left or right, or by extending the arm forwards or rearwards. Tighten the knob securely to clamp the powershift control in the new position. To adjust the height of the armrest, loosen the knob (2). Grasp the armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the complete assembly. Re--tighten the clamp knob securely.
114
2--77
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Shuttle Lever Selection of forward or reverse travel is by means of the shuttle lever located to the left of the steering wheel. The lever is spring-loaded to the neutral position to prevent inadvertent movement. It is not necessary to depress the clutch pedal when actuating the shuttle lever. NOTE: If the shuttle lever is moved to the forward or reverse position with the parking brake engaged, an audible alarm will be heard. NOTE: To select forward or reverse drive the operator must be in the tractor seat. If the shuttle lever is inadvertently moved from the neutral position without the operator in the seat, one of the following actions must be taken to re--enable drive:-With the operator in the seat and the shuttle lever in neutral, depress and release the clutch pedal. OR Release the parking brake with the shuttle lever in the neutral position.
WARNING To prevent inadvertent tractor movement, always stop the engine, place the shuttle lever in neutral and firmly apply the parking brake before leaving the tractor. The transmission will not prevent the tractor from rolling when the engine is shut off. NOTE: When operating in low temperatures, upshifting may be restricted to the lower gears until the transmission oil temperature reaches 10° C (50° F). Restricted upshifting will be accompanied by the warning ’CL’ in the digital transmission display. With cold transmission oil, avoid shuttle operations, as far as practicable, until the oil has warmed up.
2--78
115
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Driving the Tractor Start the engine with the shuttle lever in neutral and the clutch pedal depressed. The LCD on the instrument panel will display ’N’. This will be repeated in transmission gear display by a frame surrounding the ‘N’ (for neutral) symbol. The figure ‘7’ will also appear in the upper gear display. (When the tractor is initially started, the transmission will automatically select 7th. gear). NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in neutral and the clutch pedal depressed.
116
For forward travel, with the engine idling, pull the shuttle lever (1) toward the steering wheel, against light spring-pressure, and move it up. The frame around the ’N’ will move up to enclose the forward direction symbol. Each time the shuttle lever is operated, the ’frame’ will move to highlight the forward, neutral or reverse symbol.
117 Once moving, select the required ratio with the upshift control (1) or downshift control (3), as previously described. An example of the display that you will see is shown at (2), where the upper tractor symbol indicates forward and ‘10’ indicates that 10th. gear is selected. The LCD segment for 10th. gear will also be displayed. An alternative lower or higher ratio may be preselected before pulling away. However, if a ratio higher than 12 is selected then the electronic control will select 12, this being the highest ratio permissible when pulling away from a standstill. 118
2--79
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION If, for example, 15th. gear is selected before pulling away, the 15th. gear segment will flash and the 12th. gear segment will be steady. The tractor will pull away in 12th. gear and change up, sequentially, to the selected gear as engine load, engine speed and road speed are optimised. The segments for 13th. and 14th. gears will appear, as these ratios are automatically selected, then the 15th. gear segment will stop flashing and become steady as that gear is reached. NOTE: In very cold conditions it may be necessary to allow the transmission oil to warm up before attempting to shift into the higher gears. Should this occur, a warning symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix Display. When the symbol disappears from the display the transmission will function normally. See page NO TAG for details. To reverse the direction of travel, reduce engine speed, pull the shuttle lever (1) toward the steering wheel, then move it down.
NOTE: When changing from forward to reverse travel, the nearest available ratio will be selected. As there are six ratios available in reverse, the ground speed in reverse gear may be different to the speed in the selected forward gear.
119 When performing shuttle operations in a high gear, for example forward F15 selected, when the shuttle lever is moved to the reverse position, the transmission will select the highest available ratio in reverse (R6). When the shuttle lever is moved forward again, ratio (F12) will be selected and the F12 segment will appear in the display.
120
2--80
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Auto Shift Function Engaging Auto shift permits automatic gear changing in the forward ratios. Two auto shift ranges are available: Field Mode -a range of five gears may be selected between ratios 1 and 11. Road Mode -Lowest auto gear -- 17 (30 km/h transmission) or, Lowest auto gear -- 18 (40 km/h transmission) or, Lowest auto gear -- 19 (50 km/h transmission) 121 Auto Shifting in Road Mode While travelling forward in 12th. gear or higher, press and release the AUTO function switch (1) Figure 121, this will provide Auto shifting from 12th gear upwards. If required, the range of Auto shift gears can be expanded to include additional lower gears where necessary. Any gear between 7 and 11 can be programmed as the Lowest Auto Gear (LAG). To set the lowest gear carry out the following procedure. •
With the key-start off, move the transmission shuttle lever to the forward gear position.
NOTE: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the programme procedure. •
Press and hold down the AUTO switch (1) Figure 121.
•
While holding down the AUTO switch, turn on the key-start switch (but do not start the engine). The central display in the ICU will show ’OPt’.
•
Release the AUTO switch and, using keypad buttons 1 or 3, select ’OPt 2’. Pause for two seconds until the display changes to show the currently selected Lowest Auto Gear.
122
2--81
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION •
Using the keypad buttons again, select the new lowest gear between gears 7 and 11. Depress button (3) to select a higher gear, depress button (1) to select a lower gear.
•
When the new lowest gear has been selected, turn off the key--start to store the setting.
The transmission is now able to automatically make upshifts or downshifts within the selected range of gears, as dictated by engine torque, speed, and the use of brakes and foot throttle. It is now possible to engage the Road Mode while operating in the lower gears providing the current gear engaged is within the extended auto range but below 11th gear. To engage Road Mode press and release the AUTO function switch twice within one second.
123
In Road Mode, with the clutch pedal depressed and the tractor stopped, Auto shift will automatically select the lowest auto gear in the range in preparation to move off. The driver can, if required, manually select a higher gear to move off i.e. on a downhill slope. During road transport operations, it is possible to override the auto function and manually select a lower gear by depressing the downshift button. Providing the downshift does not exceed the preset auto shift load and speed parameters, the auto function will remain engaged. To disengage the Auto shift function and return to manual shifting, press and release the AUTO switch (1). Alternatively, Road Mode may be cancelled by pressing the upshift control or by using the shuttle lever to select reverse.
124
2--82
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Auto Shifting in Field Mode While operating in any forward gear between 1 and 11, press and release the AUTO function switch. This will cause the transmission to momentarily upshift to establish a torque output value from the engine. As the engine speed drops the transmission will downshift again. This sequence will establish the shift parameters and these will be entered into the auto memory. Dependent on load and speed, the transmission is now able to make automatic shifts within a span of five gears. The gear ratio currently selected will already be shown in the Display of Gears with the appropriate LCD segment. When Auto Field is engaged a plough symbol will appear in the lower display. Example 1: While operating in 7th. gear, ‘7’ is displayed along with the 7th. gear segment. If the AUTO switch is pressed, the segments for both 5th. and 9th. gear will flash to indicate that automatic upshifts or downshifts can occur within the 5 to 9 gear span. Example 2: With 11th gear selected and displayed, press the AUTO function switch. The segments for 8th and 12th gears will start to flash indicating the tractor will automatically shift between 8th and 12th gears.
125
Auto Shifting and ’Go To’ modes If the transmission is already in ’Go To’ mode (see page 2--87) when the Auto Field function is selected, the lowest ’Go To’ gear will become the lowest gear of the Auto span unless the current operating gear is lower. If the currently selected gear is lower, then it will become the lowest ’Go To’ gear. With both Auto Field and ’Go To’ modes selected, the lowest limit gear for both functions will always be the same.
2--83
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Changing the Auto Shift Point IMPORTANT: Changes to the Auto Shift point must be made before engaging the Auto Shift function. To suit different applications, the point at which the transmission makes an automatic gear shift may be adjusted from the default setting of 20%. Auto Shift gear changes are related to an increase or decrease in engine speed which can be set at 5, 10, 15, 20 or 25 percent. NOTE: In Road Mode, the shift point will automatically default to 20% and remain at that setting. With the shift point set at 10%, a transmission upshift will occur every time the engine speed increases by 10%. Consequently, as the engine speed decreases by the same amount, the transmission will make a downshift. It is recommended that during field operations the shift point is set at a low percentage. To change the shift point, depress and hold the AUTO function switch for at least one second. The current shift point figure appears in the Display of Gears and the ’ramp’ symbol (1) begins to flash. Depress the AUTO function switch repeatedly to scroll through the shift points.
1
With the new shift point selected, release the AUTO switch and pause for five seconds. The new setting will be memorised and the display will return to normal. IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic programme settings made during tractor operation are transferred from the operating memory to the main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay before turning the key on again.
2--84
126
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Changing the Gear Span The range of plus or minus two gears may be expanded both up and down on the move, using the downshift and upshift controls (1) and (2). Example 1: Upshift gears: When operating in Auto mode in 7th. gear, as described previously, the segments for 5th. and 9th. gear will flash. On reaching 9th gear press the upshift control (1) once to select 10th gear. When the tractor has upshifted to 10th, press the control again to select 11th gear. Auto shifting will now be provided between 5th and 11th gears. The segment for 5th will continue to flash identifying this as the lowest limit gear currently available.
127
Example 2: Downshift gears: Assuming 5th has been selected as the lowest Auto ratio, slow the tractor until this gear has been engaged. Then, using the downshift control (2), select 4th gear and further reduce speed until 4th gear engages. 3rd gear may now be selected if required. Applying this technique it is possible to select gears 1 to 11 in the Auto range. Reducing the gear span If necessary, the number of gears available in the Auto Field range may be reduced by using the upshift and downshift controls in the following way. Example 1: Upshift gears: With the upper limit gear showing as 9th (flashing segment) and the tractor operating in a lower gear, depress the downshift control (2) Figure 127. The flashing segment will show a one gear reduction each time the button is depressed. Example 2: Downshift gears: With the tractor stopped and the engine running, depress the AUTO function switch (1). Using the upshift control (1) Figure 127, move the lower limit gear upwards (flashing segment) until the desired gear is obtained, release the AUTO switch. This procedure will permit the lower limit gear to be changed without affecting the upper limit gear setting in the Auto memory.
128
2--85
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Changing gear shift threshold The point at which the gears change is established by the original throttle setting and torque applied to the engine at the time the AUTO function switch was depressed. It is possible to alter the upshift or downshift point to a higher or lower engine rpm if required. Higher ERPM: Move the hand throttle (2), to a higher erpm setting than originally set. The parameters for the upshift will automatically update and gear shifts will occur at a higher engine speed. Lower ERPM: Reset the hand throttle (2), to provide a lower engine speed than previously set and depress the upshift button (1). The transmission will upshift and the shift parameters will be updated. Auto gear shifting will now occur at a lower engine speed.
129
NOTE: Changing the gear shift parameters may cause the shift point for one or more gears to fall outside the original 5 gear span. If this should occur, widen the gear span using the procedure outlined on the previous page. Standby mode Auto Field mode will be put into the standby mode when: •
The 3 point hitch is raised.
•
The clutch pedal is depressed.
•
Shuttle lever is moved from the forward drive position
While in the standby mode the gear segment LCD’s will continue to flash (unless reverse direction is selected) and the established shift parameters will remain in the Auto function memory. To exit the programme The Auto Field function may be exited in three ways: 1. Momentarily depress the AUTO function switch (1), while in Auto Field mode. 2. Select 13th gear or above while Auto Field mode is active. 3. Engage creeper gears. 130
2--86
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Go To Mode An additional feature on your tractor is the ‘Go To’ mode. The ’Go To’ system can be programmed to downshift to a lower gear below that of the working gear whenever the implement is raised. This feature can be further enhanced by selecting the Auto Field function whereby the tractor will also automatically upshift again on lowering the implement. To programme ’Go To’ mode, proceed as follows. With the engine running, press and hold the AUTO function switch (1).
131 Within one second, press and release the top of the fast raise switch (1) to raise the implement. The Auto Field symbol will appear on the transmission display. Continue to press and hold the AUTO function switch.
132 With the AUTO function switch still depressed, select the required ‘Go To’ gear using the upshift control (1) or downshift control (2). The segment for the ’Go To’ gear selected will flash. Release the AUTO switch. Lower the implement by pressing and releasing the fast raise switch. NOTE: Auto shift in the field range is disengaged every time the implement is raised and re-engaged when it is lowered.
133
2--87
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION To disengage ’Go To’ mode and return to normal shifting, press and hold the AUTO switch (1). Move the fast raise switch (1) Figure 132, to raise or lower the implement. NOTE: With Auto shift selected in conjunction with the ’Go To’ mode, the lowest gear in the Auto function becomes the ’Go To’ gear.
134 Speed Matching When decelerating in the transport range of gears, the transmission is able to automatically select a gear to match engine speed and road speed. As the tractor slows, either depress and release the clutch pedal or, momentarily place the shuttle lever in neutral. The transmission will automatically select a lower gear to match engine speed with road speed. Available ratios: Road Mode -ratios
12 to 17, 18 or 19
Road Mode -- Extended Shift ratios Lowest Auto Gear to 17, 18 or 19 NOTE: Providing the Extended Shift is activated, Speed Matching will function down to the Lowest Auto Gear. The currently selected gear, if higher than the speed matched gear, will be stored as the ’target’ gear identified by its flashing LCD gear segment. If, when in the Extended Shift, the clutch pedal is depressed and the tractor stopped, Speed Matching will enter standby mode. Releasing the clutch pedal will re--engage the Speed Matching function and the tractor will move off in the Lowest Auto Gear. If required, the operator may manually select a different gear to move off. Providing the chosen gear is within the auto shift range, Speed Matching will continue to operate across the full range of gears from the Lowest Auto Gear upwards.
2--88
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Programming Reverse Gear Ratios When changing from forward to reverse, the transmission will normally select the same or closest possible ratio in reverse as was selected for forward travel. For special shuttle shift applications, Power Command transmission offers the advantage of automatically changing the reverse gear ratio up to three ratios higher or lower than the currently engaged forward gear ratio. To programme an alternative reverse gear, proceed as follows: •
Turn the key-start switch off.
135 •
Move the shuttle lever (1) to the forward gear position.
NOTE: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the programme procedure.
136 •
Press and hold down the AUTO switch (1).
•
While holding down the AUTO switch, turn on the key-start switch (but do not start the engine). The central display will show ’OPt’.
•
Release the AUTO switch and, using the keypad buttons (1) or (3), select ’OPt 1’.
137 2--89
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION To programme a higher reverse ratio •
Pause for two seconds and the display will change to show the currently programmed reverse ratio.
NOTE: If the reverse ratio has not been previously changed, the figure will be ’0’. •
Press the upshift control (1) one, two or three times, as required. The display will show ‘1’, ‘2’ or ‘3’. This indicates that when reverse is selected the gear will be one, two or three ratios higher than the forward gear ratio.
138
To programme a lower reverse ratio •
Press the downshift control (2) one, two or three times, as required. The display will show ‘--1’, ‘--2’ or ‘--3’. This indicates that when reverse is selected the gear will be one, two or three ratios lower than the forward gear ratio.
To exit the programme •
Turn the key-start switch off. The transmission is now programmed.
NOTE: Remember that only six reverse gears are available. Consequently, if travelling forward in ratio F13 or above, the transmission will always behave as if ratio F12 (the highest ratio in the field range) is selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been programmed to select 2 ratios lower in reverse, then R4 will be selected. Conversely, if travelling forward in ratios F1--6, the transmission will always behave as if ratio 7 is selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been programmed to select 2 ratios higher in reverse, then R3 will be selected.
2--90
139
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION CREEPER GEARS (where fitted) For operations requiring extra low ground speeds, a reduction gear set (creeper gears) is available. The reduction gear set is installed within the main transmission housing. With the reduction gears, an additional 10 forward and 6 reverse creeper gear ratios are provided. The reduction gear set has the effect of reducing the ratios within the main transmission to provide very low operating speeds. The creeper gears are selected by means of a rocker switch (1) located on the right-hand control console. With the engine running, clutch depressed and the shuttle lever in neutral, apply and hold down the tractor footbrakes. Momentarily depress the upper part of the selector switch (1), Figure 140, to engage the creeper gears.
140 The creep speed symbol (1), will appear flashing in the transmission display. When the creep gears are fully engaged the symbol will cease to flash and become steady. To disengage creeper gears, repeat the above procedure and depress the selector switch again. The creep speed symbol will cease to illuminate. IMPORTANT: The creeper gears offer very low ground speeds. Do not use the low gearing advantage to apply excessive draft loads to the tractor. 141
2--91
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Error Codes In the unlikely event of a fault occurring in the transmission controls or electronic circuit, a malfunction symbol and a four-digit error code, will appear in the Dot Matrix Display. Error codes for the transmission will start with the figure ’2’. The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. In this event, the tractor will require the attention of your authorised dealer. Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become disabled, contact your authorised dealer and report the error code displayed. There are a number of ’action reqired’ error codes which can also appear in the Dot Matrix Display, these are listed below. Error Code Action Required P CP N
Park brake on, release brake lever. Depress clutch pedal to enable transmission (restore drive). Place the shuttle lever in neutral.
Transmission Calibration Should transmission shifts become slow or jerky, the clutches in the transmission may require re--calibrating. Consult your authorised dealer. CALCULATING PTO SPEEDS The gear speeds shown on the following pages are at rated engine speed (2200 r.p.m.). To determine the ground speeds for PTO operations divide the ground speeds in the chart by the rated engine speed and multiply by the PTO engine speed. For example, to determine the ground speed at 540 rev/min PTO speed in gear F7 (5.0 Km/h) use the following calculation: 5.0 (Km/h) ÷ 2200 (rated speed) x 1950 (PTO erpm) = 4.43 Km/h
2--92
142
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION PAGE93GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) for 30 Km/h (17 x 6), 40 Km/h Transmission (18 x 6) or 50 Km/h Transmission (19 x 6), Models 165, 180 and 195 Gear Ratio
Rear Tyre Size
Rear Tyre Size
Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38
20.8R--38
20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Standard Speeds Km/h
MPH
Km/h
MPH
Km/h
MPH
F1
1.7
1.0
1.8
1.1
1.9
1.1
F2
2.1
1.3
2.2
1.3
2.3
1.4
F3
2.4
1.4
2.6
1.6
2.7
1.6
F4
3.0
1.8
3.1
1.9
3.3
2.0
F5
3.6
2.2
3.8
2.3
4.0
2.4
F6
4.3
2.6
4.6
2.8
4.8
2.9
F7
5.0
3.1
5.3
3.2
5.6
3.4
F8
6.0
3.7
6.3
3.9
6.7
4.1
F9
7.2
4.4
7.6
4.7
8.1
5.0
F10
8.7
5.4
9.2
5.7
9.7
6.0
F11
10.5
6.5
11.1
6.8
11.7
7.2
F12
12.5
7.7
13.3
8.2
14.1
8.7
F13
14.4
8.9
15.3
9.5
16.2
10.0
F14
17.4
10.8
18.4
11.4
19.5
12.1
F15
20.9
12.9
22.1
13.7
23.4
14.5
F16
25.1
15.5
26.6
16.5
28.2
17.5
F17
30.2
18.7
32.0
19.8
33.9
21.0
F18
36.3
22.5
38.5
23.9
40.7
25.2
F19
46.1
28.6
48.9
30.3
51.7
32.1
*F19 E
38.3
23.7
42.5
26.4
42.5
26.4
NOTE: Ratios F18 and F19 are not available on 30 Km/h transmissions. NOTE: Ratio F19 is only available with 50 Km/h and 40 Km/h economy transmissions. NOTE: *With 40 Km/h economy transmission the maximum speed in F19E is electronically regulated. Reverse Ratios -- Standard Speeds R1
3.8
2.3
4.0
2.4
4.2
2.6
R2
4.6
2.8
4.8
2.9
5.1
3.1
R3
5.5
3.4
5.8
3.6
6.1
3.7
R4
6.6
4.1
7.0
4.3
7.4
4.5
R5
7.9
4.9
8.4
5.2
8.9
5.5
R6
9.6
5.9
10.1
6.2
10.7
6.6
2--93
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with optional Creeper Gears, Models 165, 180 and 195
Gear Ratio
Rear Tyre Size
Rear Tyre Size
Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38
20.8R--38
20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Creeper Speeds Km/h
MPH
Km/h
MPH
Km/h
MPH
F1
0.28
0.17
0.30
0.18
0.32
0.19
F2
0.34
0.21
0.36
0.22
0.38
0.23
F3
0.41
0.25
0.44
0.27
0.46
0.28
F4
0.50
0.31
0.53
0.32
0.56
0.34
F5
0.60
0.37
0.63
0.39
0.67
0.41
F6
0.72
0.44
0.76
0.47
0.81
0.50
F7
0.83
0.51
0.88
0.54
0.93
0.57
F8
1.00
0.62
1.06
0.65
1.12
0.69
F9
1.20
0.74
1.28
0.79
1.35
0.83
F10
1.45
0.90
1.54
0.95
1.62
1.0
Reverse Ratios -- Creeper Speeds R1
0.63
0.39
0.67
0.41
0.71
0.44
R2
0.76
0.47
0.81
0.50
0.86
0.53
R3
0.92
0.57
0.97
0.60
1.03
0.64
R4
1.10
0.68
1.17
0.72
1.24
0.77
R5
1.33
0.82
1.41
0.87
1.49
0.92
R6
1.60
0.99
1.69
1.05
1.79
1.11
2--94
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) for 30 Km/h (17 x 6), 40 Km/h Transmission (18 x 6) or 50 Km/h Transmission (19 x 6), Model 210 Gear Ratio
Rear Tyre Size
Rear Tyre Size
Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38
20.8R--38
20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Standard Speeds Km/h
MPH
Km/h
MPH
Km/h
MPH
F1
1.5
0.9
1.6
0.9
1.7
1.0
F2
1.9
1.1
2.0
1.2
2.1
1.3
F3
2.3
1.4
2.4
1.4
2.5
1.5
F4
2.7
(1.6
2.9
1.8
3.1
1.9
F5
3.4
2.1
3.6
2.2
3.6
2.2
F6
4.1
2.5
4.4
2.7
4.6
2.8
F7
4.6
2.8
4.9
3.0
5.1
3.1
F8
5.5
3.4
5.9
3.6
6.2
3.8
F9
6.6
4.1
7.0
4.3
7.4
4.5
F10
8.0
4.9
8.5
5.2
9.0
5.5
F11
10.0
6.2
10.6
6.5
11.2
6.9
F12
12.0
7.4
12.7
7.8
13.5
8.3
F13
13.3
8.2
14.1
8.7
14.9
9.2
F14
16.0
9.9
17.0
10.5
16.0
9.9
F15
19.3
11.9
20.4
12.6
21.6
13.4
F16
23.2
14.4
24.6
15.2
26.0
16.1
F17
26.9
16.7
30.7
19.0
32.4
20.1
F18
34.6
21.5
36.9
22.9
39.0
24.2
F19
42.6
26.4
45.2
28.0
47.8
29.7
*F19 E
35.6
22.1
37.8
23.4
39.9
24.7
NOTE: Ratios F18 and F19 are not available on 30 Km/h transmissions. NOTE: Ratio F19 is only available with 50 Km/h and 40 Km/h economy transmissions. NOTE: *With 40 Km/h economy transmission the maximum speed in F19E is electronically regulated. Reverse Ratios -- Standard Speeds R1
3.5
2.1
3.7
2.2
3.9
2.4
R2
4.2
2.6
4.5
2.7
4.7
2.9
R3
5.1
3.1
5.4
3.3
5.7
3.5
R4
6.1
3.7
6.5
4.0
6.8
4.2
R5
7.6
4.7
8.1
5.0
8.5
5.2
R6
9.2
5.7
9.7
6.0
10.3
6.4
2--95
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with optional Creeper Gears, Model 210
Gear Ratio
Rear Tyre Size
Rear Tyre Size
Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38
20.8R--38
20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Creeper Speeds Km/h
MPH
Km/h
MPH
Km/h
MPH
F1
0.26
0.16
0.28
0.17
0.29
0.18
F2
0.32
0.19
0.33
0.20
0.35
0.21
F3
0.38
0.23
0.40
0.24
0.43
0.26
F4
0.46
0.28
0.49
0.30
0.51
0.31
F5
0.57
0.35
0.61
0.37
0.64
0.39
F6
0.69
0.42
0.73
0.45
0.77
0.47
F7
0.77
0.47
0.81
0.50
0.86
0.53
F8
0.92
0.57
0.98
0.60
1.04
0.64
F9
1.14
0.70
1.18
0.73
1.25
0.77
F10
1.34
0.83
1.42
0.88
1.50
0.93
Reverse Ratios -- Creeper Speeds R1
0.58
0.36
0.62
0.38
0.66
0.41
R2
0.70
0.43
0.75
0.46
0.79
0.49
R3
0.85
0.52
0.90
0.55
0.95
0.59
R4
1.02
0.63
1.08
0.67
1.14
0.70
R5
1.27
0.78
1.35
0.83
1.43
0.88
R6
1.53
0.95
1.82
1.13
1.71
1.06
2--96
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION DIFFERENTIAL LOCK Four wheel drive tractors have a differential lock installed in the front and rear axles to lock all four wheels together in conditions where wheel slip may occur. Two wheel drive tractors have a differential lock in the rear axle only. The differential locks are controlled by a spring centred rocker switch on the console to the right of the seat. The differential lock(s) may be operated in manual mode or automatic mode. To confirm mode selected, the appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate when engaged.
143
WARNING
Avoid using the differential lock at speeds above 8km/h (5 MPH) and never at speeds above 15 km/h (9 MPH) or at any time when turning the tractor. When engaged, the differential lock will make steering the tractor very difficult. IMPORTANT: If wheel spin is encountered, reduce engine speed before engaging the differential lock, to avoid shock loads to the transmission. Operating in Manual Mode (all models) In slippery conditions, momentarily depress the bottom of the switch (1) Figure 143 , to lock both wheels together. The differential lock(s) will engage and a warning light in the switch and on the instrument panel (1) will light up. When one or both brake pedals are applied or if the switch is returned to the off (central) position, disengagement will occur and the warning lights in the switch and instrument panel will go out. Alternatively, depress the bottom of the switch again to disengage the differential lock(s).
144
NOTE: The lock(s) will remain engaged until traction at the wheels equalises.
2--97
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION Operating in Automatic Mode To engage both front and rear differential locks in automatic mode, depress the top of the switch (1). The warning light in the switch will illuminate. The indicator light (1) Figure 146 on the instrument panel will also illuminate but will only remain lit while the differential locks are engaged. In automatic mode, disengagement of the locks will occur as follows:
145 Fast raise switch activated (to raise the rear 3--point hitch)
Temporary disengagement (will re--engage when 3--point hitch is lowered
Either brake pedal is applied
Temporary disengagement
Both brake pedals are applied simultaneously
Differential lock remains engaged
Tractor speed exceeds 15 Km/h (9 MPH)
Differential locks will permanently disengage
Front steering angle exceeds pre--set limits (where fitted)
Temporary disengagement (will re--engage when steering angle is reduced)
Momentarily depress the Differential locks will top of the differential lock permanently disengage rocker switch
NOTE: If the differential lock is active when the key--start is turned off, it will remain active when the key--start is switched on again.
2--98
146
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (where fitted) Four wheel drive greatly improves traction in difficult conditions. The drive to the front wheels is designed to be engaged or disengaged with the tractor stationary or moving. NOTE: The drive to the front wheels is actuated by a three position rocker switch on the right--hand control console. To confirm mode selected, the appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate when engaged. 147 Operating in Manual Mode Press the bottom of the switch to engage the drive to the front wheels. Warning lights in the switch and instrument panel will illuminate when four wheel drive is engaged. To disengage four wheel drive return the switch to the off (central) position.
NOTE: If four wheel drive is engaged when the key--start is turned off, it will remain engaged when the key--start is switched on again. Operating in Automatic Mode To engage automatic four wheel drive mode, depress the top of the four wheel drive switch (1) Figure 147. The warning light in the switch will illuminate. The indicator light (1) Figure 148 on the instrument panel will also illuminate but will only remain lit while four wheel drive is engaged. Four wheel drive will remain permanently engaged unless one of the following occurs: •
Wheel speed exceeds 20 Km/h (12.4 MPH). Four wheel drive will re--engage when wheel speed falls below 18 Km/h (11.1 MPH)
148
2--99
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION NOTE: The following applies only to tractors fitted with a steering angle sensor. •
Wheel speed falls below 10 Km/h (6.2 MPH) and steering angle exceeds 30°. Four wheel drive will re--engage when the steering angle is reduced.
•
Wheel speed is between 10 and 20 Km/h (6.2 and 12.4 MPH) and steering angle exceeds 25°. Four wheel drive will re--engage when the steering angle is reduced.
NOTE: The above steering angles are set during manufacture, if an alternative angle setting is required, consult your authorised dealer.
149
The indicator light (1) Figure 149 on the instrument panel will also illuminate but will only remain lit when four wheel drive is engaged. 4WD Operating Precautions
WARNING
Four wheel drive greatly increases traction. Extra caution is needed on slopes. Compared to two-wheel drive, a 4WD tractor maintains traction on steeper slopes, increasing the possibility of overturning. IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive tyre wear when travelling on the public highway or any hard surface, it is recommended that four wheel drive be disengaged. Always use the specified front/rear tyre combinations to ensure acceptable tyre wear.
WARNING
Tractors with four wheel drive engaged or disengaged should not be allowed to exceed 50 km/h (31 MPH) where permitted. Overspeeding by towing or coasting downhill with clutch depressed or transmission in neutral may cause loss of control, personal injury to the operator or bystanders or mechanical failure.
2--100
NOTE: Keep the tractor in the same gear going downhill as would be used when going uphill.
CAUTION
On four wheel drive tractors, drive to the front axle is automatically engaged when both brake pedals are applied simultaneously to provide four wheel braking. Additionally, you may have the optional front disc brakes. The effectiveness of four wheel braking greatly enhances tractor braking performance therefore appropriate care should be exercised during heavy braking. Front tyres should never be inflated above the recommended pressure. Ideally, rear tyre pressures should be maintained at least 0.4 bar (6 lbf/in2) above front tyre pressures, provided the manufacturers’ recommendations are not exceeded. IMPORTANT: Never attempt to drive the tractor with the drive shaft removed, even if you have no intention of using four wheel drive. With the drive shaft removed, application of the brakes will result in severe damage to transmission components.
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION (where fitted) The optional, self-levelling, front axle suspension will provide improved stability, control, comfort and traction. The suspension function is automatically activated each time the tractor is started but will not function at speeds below 1.5 k/mh (0.9 MPH). When operating at speeds up to 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH), the front axle suspension may be locked out if not required. 150 To lock out the suspension, press the top of the switch (1) on the control panel, a warning light (2) on the instrument panel will illuminate to confirm the suspension is locked. Press the top of the switch again to reactivate the suspension facility. At speeds above 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH), the suspension will automatically re--engage, overriding axle lock out. In this situation the warning light will remain on. NOTE: Should the lock out switch warning light begin to flash, this would indicate a malfunction of the suspension system. Consult your authorised dealer. IMPORTANT: See Ballasting and Tyres, page 3--144, regarding the use of front end weights with front axle suspension.
151
WARNING
Hydraulic oil in the front axle suspension system operates under very high pressure. Escaping hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Unqualified persons should not attempt to disconnect any pipework in the front axle hydraulic system. Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.
WARNING
If a transmission ratio is engaged, with the engine running and the tractor supported on axle stands, the self-levelling function of the suspension may cause the axle to make corrections (move up and down). The suspension should be locked out to maintain stability.
2--101
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION NOTES
2--102
SECTION 3 FIELD OPERATIONS BEFORE OPERATING
CAUTION
Before driving or operating the tractor, study the safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual.
Page
Subject
Important Information
3--2
Boosting the Tractor Battery
3--4
Read this section carefully for a thorough understanding of operational requirements. Even if you operate other tractors, you should thoroughly read this section of the manual and ensure that you are familiar with the location and function of all the features of the tractor.
Starting the Engine
3--5
Stopping the Engine
3--8
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of the tractor, consult your authorised dealer.
Power Management (PM)
3--10
Constant Engine Speed (CES)
3--11
Headland Management Control (HMC)
3--13
Turn Assist
3--24
Rear Power Take--Off
3--26
Front Power Take--Off and 3--Point Hitch
3--40
PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS
Electronic Hitch Control
3--57
Your tractor is equipped with a sophisticated electronic network system which utilises variuos memory facilities to programme and control many of the tractor functions. The operating memory temporarily stores settings and adjustments made while operating the tractor and these are transferred to the main memory when you key--off (engine stop).
Load Sensing Remote Control Valves
3--69
Electronic Remote Control Valves
3--75
Continuous Oil Supply for Remote Services
3--90
Three-point Hitch
3--93
Quick Hitch
3--99
If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data is being transferred between the operating and main memories, some of the data may be lost or corrupted.
Linkage Stabilisers
3--101
Drawbars and Towing Attachments
3--106
Trailer Braking Systems
3--119
If changes have been made to any memory settings while operating the tractor, pause for five seconds between key--off and key--on to allow sufficient time for data to transfer between the operating memory and the main memory. Once transferred, the new settings will remain unchanged until they are re--programmed.
Front Wheel Track Adjustment
3--126
Rear Wheel Track Adjustment
3--134
Ballasting and Tyres
3--144
3--1
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS IMPORTANT INFORMATION
PRE-OPERATION CHECKS
Before operating your tractor in the field it is important you read the following information.
Before operating the tractor, ensure that you are thoroughly familiar with the location and operation of the controls.
RUNNING--IN PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Your new tractor will provide long and dependable service if given proper care during the 50 hour running--in period and if serviced at the recommended intervals. Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too high a gear under heavy load may cause excessive engine overloading. Overloading occurs when the engine will not respond to a throttle increase. Do not operate without a load on the engine. This can be as harmful to the engine as overloading. Vary the type of operation undertaken so that the engine is subjected to heavy as well as light loads during the running--in period. Use the lower gear ratios when pulling heavy loads and avoid continuous operation at constant engine speeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear with a light load and high engine speed will waste fuel. You will save fuel and minimise engine wear by selecting the correct gear ratio for each particular operation. Check the instruments and warning lights frequently and keep the radiator and various oil reservoirs filled to the recommended levels.
Perform all daily lubrication and maintenance operations in accordance with Section 4. After completing the daily maintenance operations, perform a walk around visual inspection of the tractor. Pay particular attention to the following items: •
Poly ’V’ belt for cracks or damage
•
Engine and exhaust areas for accumulation of debris
•
Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.
•
Tyres for damage
•
Hardware for looseness
•
Driveline and hydraulic pump/filter areas for leaks or debris accumulation
Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor. PRESSURE WASHING THE TRACTOR Your tractor is fitted with a number of Electronic Control Units (ECU’s) that are linked to various sensors throughout the vehicle. These units electronically control many tractor functions including engine, transmission, PTO and hydraulic systems. It is very important therefore, when cleaning the tractor body or chassis with a high pressure water jet, that care should be taken not to aim the jet directly at any electrical component, wiring harness or connector.
3--2
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TOWING THE TRACTOR IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a short distance, such as out of a building. Do not tow on roadways or as a method of transport. IMPORTANT: If it is necessary to tow the tractor, all transmission controls must be moved to the neutral position before stopping the engine otherwise damage to transmission components may occur during towing. If creeper gears (reduction gear set) are fitted, then the selector control must be in the off position.
CARRYING THE TRACTOR ON A TRANSPORTER Transport the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bed trailer or truck. Securely chain the tractor to the transporter. IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the four wheel drive shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axle or other components that could be damaged by contacting the chain or by heavy loading. Use the drawbar or drawbar hanger for a rear tie down point.
Use a strong chain when towing the tractor. Tow the tractor from the rear using only the drawbar, rear tow hitch or the three-point hitch. Tow the tractor from the front using the tow pin in the front weights or front support. Have an operator steer and brake the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Cover the silencer outlet so that the wind does not spin the turbocharger and damage the bearings. Turbocharger turbine freewheeling (turning without engine running) must be avoided since lubrication will not be provided to the turbocharger bearings.
To avoid damaging the transmission or other components that turn but are not lubricated during towing, observe the following:
TILTING HIGH VISIBILITY ROOF PANEL
•
Only tow a short distance
•
Keep speed below 5 MPH (8 K/mh)
•
If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication and power steering.
Where road speeds in excess of 50 Km/h (31 MPH) are likely to occur when transporting the tractor, it is advisable to secure the high visibility roof panel with ties to prevent it from opening.
IMPORTANT: The brakes on your tractor are hydraulically power assisted. With the engine off, the brakes will still function but with a higher pedal effort.
CAUTION
Do not tow the tractor faster than 5 MPH (8 km/h). The steering is much slower and steering wheel effort is much greater without the engine running. 1
WARNING
Do not use cables or rope to tow the tractor. If the cable or rope breaks or slips, it may whip with sufficient force to cause serious injury. When using a chain, attach the chain with the hook open side facing up. If the hook slips, it will drop down instead of flying up.
Secure both handles to the sun--visor support using a flexible strap such as a cable tie (1) as shown in the illustration above. Do not use wire or metal straps as these may damage the paintwork.
NOTE: Four wheel drive will be engaged if the engine is not running, regardless of the position of the 4WD activation switch.
3--3
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS BOOSTING THE TRACTOR BATTERY Remote Jump Terminals
WARNING
Always sit in the driver’s seat to operate the starter motor. If the key-start switch is by-passed and the tractor has been left in gear, sudden and unexpected movement of the tractor or a tractor runaway may result which could cause serious injury. Wear eye protection when starting the tractor with jump leads or when charging the battery.
If it is necessary to use jump leads (booster cables) to start the tractor, use only heavy duty leads. Proceed as follows: Your tractor is equipped with remote jump terminals installed on the right-hand side of the engine.
1
The positive terminal (1), mounts on the starter solenoid, and is encased in an insulated housing. The negative terminal (2) attaches to the upper mounting bolt of the starter. Connect one end of red jump lead, to the positive, (+), remote jump terminal (1), and the other end to the positive (+), terminal of the auxiliary battery. Connect one end of black jump lead, to the negative, (--), remote jump terminal (2), and the other end to negative, (--), terminal of auxiliary battery. Follow the starting procedure as described later in this Section. When the engine starts allow it to run at idle speed, turn on all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) then disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the connecting procedure. This will help protect the alternator from possible damage due to extreme load changes.
3--4
50032874
2 2
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Turn off all electrical equipment and run the tractor engine until the battery is fully charged. IMPORTANT: When using an auxiliary battery to start the engine, ensure that the polarity of the jump leads is correct -- positive to positive, negative to negative, otherwise the alternator may be damaged. Only use an auxiliary battery if the tractor batteries are discharged. Excessive amperage (above 1600 cca) may damage the starting motor. In the event of the batteries being severely discharged, such that terminal voltage is below 7 volts, recovery will require a special charging procedure. See your authorised dealer.
STARTING THE ENGINE Before starting the engine, always carry out the following procedure: •
Sit in the driver’s seat.
•
Ensure the parking brake is firmly applied.
•
Ensure the shuttle lever is in neutral.
•
Ensure that the PTO knob is in the ‘off’ position.
•
Place the remote control valve levers in the neutral position.
•
Move the hydraulic lift control lever fully forward.
WARNING
Check the area beneath the equipment to ensure that no injury or damage will be caused when equipment is lowered. •
Depress and hold the clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT: The high operating speed of the turbo-charger makes it essential that adequate lubrication is assured when the engine is started. Therefore, idle the engine at 1000 rev/min for approximately one minute before driving the tractor.
3--5
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS GRID HEATER COLD START AID (where fitted)
WARNING
Your tractor may be equipped with an electronic cold weather starting aid. Do not use ether with the cold start aid installed. It will explode in the intake manifold. If any difficulty is experienced when trying to start your tractor in cold temperatures, consult your authorised dealer. The grid heater, which is effective in ambient temperatures down to --18° C (0° F), consists of a heating element installed in the intake manifold. Operation of the grid heater is automatic when the the engine coolant temperature falls to --3° C (26.6° F) or below. A warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate to confirm operation. If temperatures below --18° C (0° F) are encountered, a block coolant heater is available as an accessory. The block coolant heater is effective in ambient temperatures down to --29° C (--20° F) when used in conjunction with the grid heater.
3
Key Start Switch A five-position key-start switch is installed. The key-start switch positions are as follows: Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position 5
Not used Off Accessories on Warning lights, instruments and Grid Heater on Grid heater on, Starter motor engaged
IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to start the engine. Use an auxiliary battery and jump leads. NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in the neutral (N) position.
3--6
4
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Starting in cold weather (with a cold engine) •
Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the key-start switch clockwise to position (4). An indicator light (1) Figure 6, on the instrument panel will illuminate for 10 to 15 seconds to show the grid heater has been activated.
•
When the light extinguishes, turn the key fully clockwise to position (5). Crank the engine until it starts but do not operate the starting motor for more than 60 seconds.
NOTE: If cranking is not carried out within 30 seconds of the light extinguishing, turn the key--start to the ’off’ position, pause and re--start the sequence. •
If the engine fails to start, repeat the foregoing procedure. If the engine still fails to start, allow the battery to recover for 4 -- 5 minutes then repeat the procedure.
•
When the engine starts, return the throttle to the idle position and check that all warning lights extinguish and gauge readings are normal.
5
6 Starting in warm weather or when the engine is hot •
Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the key-start switch fully clockwise to position (5) Figure 5, to operate the starting motor. Crank the engine until it starts but do not operate the starting motor for more than 60 seconds.
NOTE: Once the starter motor has been operated, it is necessary to return the key-start switch back to the ‘off’ position before the starting motor can be re-activated. •
Return the throttle to the idle position and check that all warning lights extinguish and gauge readings are normal.
3--7
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS STOPPING THE ENGINE IMPORTANT: Before stopping, idle the engine at 1000 rev/min for approximately one minute. This will allow the turbo--charger and manifold to cool and prevent possible distortion of components. To stop the engine, carry out the following procedure: •
Sit in the driver’s seat.
•
Close the throttle.
•
Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied.
•
Ensure the PTO is disengaged.
•
Place the remote control valve levers in the neutral position.
•
Lower 3 point hitch mounted equipment to the ground.
•
Turn the key--start switch off -- position (2).
AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN IMPORTANT: Before attempting to start an engine that has automatically shutdown, trace and rectify the fault that caused the engine to be stopped. Automatic engine shutdown is operated through the electronic engine controller (ECU). In the unlikely event that one or more of the following conditions occurs then the engine will be shut down after 30 seconds. •
A critical error is detected within the engine electronic control system.
•
The generated engine horsepower attempts to exceed the specified design limit.
Should either of the above occur and the engine shuts down, consult your authorised dealer before attempting further operations with the tractor. NOTE: Automatic engine shutdown function is permanantly activated and cannot be switched off.
3--8
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Automatic Engine Shutdown with Enhanced Keypad (where fitted) The automatic engine shutdown system on tractors equipped with the optional Enhanced Keypad provides a further level of protection. The system monitors four key areas that are critical to the safe operation of engine and driveline and, in the unlikely event that one or more of these reaches a critical condition, the engine will be shut down. •
Engine oil pressure falls below safe limits.
•
Engine coolant temperature exceeds safe limits.
•
Driveline oil pressure falls below safe limits.
•
Driveline oil temperature rises above safe limits.
Prior to engine shutdown the red Stop light will start to flash and the critical alarm will sound. In addition, the engine fault warning and malfunction symbols will flash alternately in the Dot Matrix Display. If, after 30 seconds, the operator has not stopped the engine, the automatic shutdown feature will be activated and the engine will be shut down.
7
After the engine has shut down, the red Stop light will remain on but the alarm will cease to sound. Both engine and malfunction symbols will continue to flash alternately. The automatic engine shutdown function may be programmed by your authorised dealer to operate in one of three modes: 1. No engine shutdown. In this mode the engine is not capable of automatic shutdown. 2. Always engine shutdown. The engine will shutdown at any time if one or more of the monitored conditions reaches a critical level. 3. Stationary engine shutdown. The engine will shutdown only during stationary operations if one or more of the monitored conditions reaches a critical level. Although the Automatic Engine Shudown linked to the Keypad can be disabled, the ECU controlled system will continue to function in the normal way.
3--9
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS POWER MANAGEMENT Power Management is an automatic system designed to boost engine power levels where tractor performance may be compromised due to increased loads. Once activated, PM will monitor and respond to increased power demands by gradually raising the level of horsepower available. IMPORTANT: Power Management will be disabled if the engine coolant temperature exceeds 105°C (221°F). In this situation either increase the engine speed or reduce the load on the engine until the coolant temperature is reduced. PTO Operations Before PM will operate the following must apply: Engine sped above 1300 e.r.p.m. Tractor forward speed above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH). PTO power output is above 27 kW (36.2 hp.). PTO driveline torque is above 250 Nm. NOTE: Power Management will operate at all PTO speeds, i.e. 540, 540E and 1000 r.p.m. With the tractor moving and the engine speed above 1300 r.p.m. engaging the rear PTO will put PM into standby mode. As the torque and load on the PTO reaches or exceeds the above levels, the warning light (1) will illuminate and Engine Power Management will be activated. When the power requirement is reduced, the amount of boost is also reduced until the system reverts to standby. Road Transport Applications Before PM will operate the following must apply: 16th gear or above must be selected. Auto Transport mode selected. Engine speed between 1800 and 2200 e.r.p.m. Power Management will only function when Auto Shift is selected and the tractor is operating in 16th gear or above. EPM will be de--activated if one or more of the following occurs: Downshifting below 16th gear. Engine speed falls below 1800 e.r.p.m. Auto Shift is disengaged.
3--10
8
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS CONSTANT ENGINE SPEED With Constant Engine Speed, the operator may pre--set one or two fixed engine speeds appropriate to the work in hand. With CES engaged the indicator light on the instrument panel (1), will illuminate to confirm operation. When in operation CES, constantly monitors engine load and speed for any change. If engine load increases and the r.p.m. drops, CES will adjust the engine speed control unit to compensate, thereby maintaining a constant engine r.p.m.
9
Setting Constant Engine Speed With the engine running, set the hand throttle above 1000 r.p.m. To activate Speed Management, momentarily depress the top of the switch (2) on the right--hand console. To deactivate, depress the top of the switch again. Select programme 1 by momentarily depressing the bottom of switch (2) and then, using the speed control switch (1), increase the engine speed to the desired level. When the speed for programme 1 has been entered, programme 2 can then be selected (if required) by momentarily depressing the bottom of switch (2) again. Repeat the above procedure to set the second speed.
10
NOTE: Momentarily depressing the speed adjustment switch will increase or decrease the speed in 10 rpm increments. Maintaining pressure on the switch will permit the speed to ramp up or down at 100 rpm/second, providing there is no load on the engine. IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), programme settings made during tractor operation are transferred from the operating memory to the main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay before turning the key on again.
3--11
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Operating with Constant Engine Speed The Constant Engine Speed function can be engaged at any time providing the engine is running above 1000 r.p.m. Momentarily depress the top of the Speed Control switch (2) to activate CES. The system will automatically default to programme 1, depress the bottom of the control switch to select programme 2. The programme number will appear above the CES symbol in the engine display. When operating in the field, shuttling between programmes 1 and 2 may be achieved by repeatedly depressing the bottom of the control switch or, if more convenient, the Headland Management Control step switch (1) Figure 12.
11
NOTE: If the HMC step switch is used to shuttle between CES speeds, the control switch (2),will be disabled. To re--enable switch operation, exit and re--enter the CES function. NOTE: Moving the hand throttle in CES mode will disable the speed settings and return engine speed control to the hand or foot throttle. Accessing a Previously Stored Setting To access a previously stored speed setting, depress and hold the top of the control switch (2), Figure 11. The indicator light will start to flash in the instrument panel. NOTE: The hand throttle must be set to 1000 e.r.p.m. before depressing the switch. Continue to hold the switch until the light stops flashing and goes out, the engine speed will increase or decrease to the previously stored setting. Depress the bottom of the control switch (2) or the HMC switch (1) to select the required CES programme. NOTE: If the CES switch (2) is released whilst the light is flashing, Constant Engine Speed will reset to the default setting, depress and hold the CES switch again to re--start the procedure. To exit Constant Engine Speed: Depress the CES control switch. Move the hand throttle to idle. Turn the key--start to the off position.
3--12
12
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS HEADLAND MANAGEMENT CONTROL Quick Guide to Headland Management Control (HMC) Where there is a need to repeat a sequence of actions, such as those made during a headland turn, HMC can be used to create, store and play--back a programme of these actions. The following text is provided as a quick guide to the operation of Headland Management Control. A more comprehensive guide to HMC can be found in the pages following this guide. NOTE: For HMC to function, the hand throttle must be set above 900 e.r.p.m. and the tractor travelling at a speed above 0.5 K/mh (0.3 MPH). ACTION -- RECORDING 1.
Depress and hold the top of the record switch for three seconds. The recording symbol will flash in the Display of Gears.
2.
To start recording a sequence, momentarily depress the step switch. The recording symbol will cease to flash and will remain displayed.
3.
Carry out the headland manoeuvre in the normal way. As each step in the sequence is recorded, the relevant symbol will appear in the Display of Gears. Gears When a step is completed and a new one started, the symbol for the completed step will scroll downwards to be replaced by the new one.
CONTROL
VISUAL
To record a second HMC sequence go to paragraph 4. To end the current recording go to paragraph 6.
4.
To record a second sequence after the first one is completed, depress and hold the step switch for three seconds, the recording symbol will start to flash.
5.
To start recording, depress the step switch again. The recording symbol will cease to flash and will remain displayed, the sequence can now be started.
6.
When the HMC recordings are completed, momentarily depress the top of the record switch to save the recorded sequences and exit HMC.
3--13
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS ACTION -- PLAYBACK 1.
To enter play--back mode, depress and hold the top or bottom of the play--back switch. The programme number will appear at the top of the HMC display.
CONTROL
VISUAL
1
Release the switch and the programme symbols will start to flash indicating HMC is in standby mode. NOTE: Depress the top of the switch to provide AUTOMATIC re--play of all programme steps, depress the bottom of the switch to select MANUAL re--play of each individual step. 2.
If a second sequence was recorded, continue to depress the top or bottom of the play--back switch until the required programme number, 1 or 2 is displayed, then release the switch. The programme number will be replaced by a flashing play--back symbol.
3.
To begin play--back, depress and hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard. The play--back symbol will stop flashing and will remain on. NOTE: In MANUAL re--play the programme will pause after each step is completed, momentarily depress the step switch to re--play the next step.
3.
During play--back, the function symbols will scroll upwards towards the top of the HMC display.
4.
After the current sequence has been re--played, the next sequence will be held in standby mode (play--back symbol flashing). Depress and hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, release the switch to begin play--back of the next sequence.
5.
To skip a play--back sequence it will be necessary to exit HMC by depressing the record switch. To re--enter HMC, start at paragraph 1 above.
See page 3--17 for an explanation of HMC symbols.
3--14
2
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Headland Management Control Operation (HMC) In the recording mode a sequence of actions or ’steps’ are recorded to create a programme. In play--back mode, HMC will re--play the sequence exactly as recorded. Programmes may be re--played as a continuous operation (AUTOMATIC) or as a series of individual steps (MANUAL) each one initiated by depressing the step switch. HMC permits up to 28 individual steps to be recorded as one or two separate programmes. Three switches control the operation of HMC: 1. Play--back switch. To re--play a programme momentarily depress the top of this switch (A) for AUTO replay, depress the bottom of the switch for MANUAL replay. 2. Record switch. This switch is used to activate or de--activate the system and to select the record mode. 3. Step switch. The step switch is used to start, pause or stop a programme. The step switch can also be used to insert pauses during a recording or to pause a programme during play--back.
13
NOTE: Each pause inserted during a recording will be recognised as a programme step by HMC. Where HMC is used to create a recording, the following actions or functions may be included in the programme. •
Regulate engine speed.
•
Shift transmission gears up, and/or down.
•
Raise and lower the rear three point hitch.*
•
Raise and lower the front three point hitch.*
•
Operate rear electronic remote valves.
3 14
3--15
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS IMPORTANT: When operating In Field Auto Mode, activating HMC will suspend the Auto Mode function. After completing a headland manoeuvre programme, HMC will be suspended and the Field Auto Mode programme will be resumed. In a similar way, CES will also be disabled when HMC is active and will be re--enabled when HMC is suspended. However, the CES light will still remain illuminated while the programme is disabled. When activated, the HMC symbol will appear in the Display of Gears. The symbol at (2), Figure 15, will show whether HMC is in record or play--back mode. When recording or re--playing a programme, each action or step will be represented by the appropriate symbol, i.e. a gear change or series of gear changes will be accompanied by a transmission symbol. See page 3--17 for an explanation of HMC symbols. As each step is recorded the accompanying symbol will move down the display as the next step begins. The symbol for the new step will appear immediately below the record symbol. During play--back, symbols will scroll upwards from the bottom of the display. When a symbol reaches the top of the display (below the play--back symbol) the corresponding function will begin to operate. A maximum of seven symbols may be displayed at one time. IMPORTANT: If a programme fault occurs and the error symbol is displayed, exit and re--enter HMC to clear the fault.
3--16
15
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Explanation of HMC Symbols The symbols shown below are examples of those which may, depending on programme content, appear in the transmission gear display when HMC is active.
2
HMC Programme
Engine Speed -- Decrease
Programme Number
Transmission Upshift
Switch Symbol -- Record Mode
Transmission Downshift
Record Mode
Remote Cylinder -- Retract
Switch Symbol Manual Playback Mode
Remote Cylinder -- Extend
Switch Symbol Automatic Playback Mode
Remote Cylinder -- Float
Playback Mode
Rear 3--Point Hitch -- Raise
Pause Programme
Rear 3--Point Hitch -- Lower
Error
Front 3--Point Hitch -- Raise
Engine Speed -- Increase
Front 3--Point Hitch -- Lower
3--17
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Recording a Programme NOTE: For HMC to function, the hand throttle must be set to provide an engine speed above 900 e.r.p.m. IMPORTANT: If the tractor is stopped or no controls used for approximately 13 minutes when recording a sequence, the system will automatically revert to standby and any steps recorded will be lost. To record a Headland Management Control sequence, depress and hold the top of the record switch (2), for three seconds. This will activate HMC but the system will remain in standby mode.
16
The HMC symbol will appear in the upper part of the display accompanied by the recording symbol which will start to flash. To start recording, momentarily depress the step switch (3). As each HMC linked control is operated, a grey coloured symbol will appear in the display immediately below the recording symbol. As each symbol moves down the display to be replaced by the next one, the colour will change from grey to black. NOTE: Symbols relating to the function in current use, either in record or play--back mode, will always appear inversed (grey symbol on black background). After the first HMC sequence has been completed, a second (opposite headland) sequence may be recorded. Depress and hold the step switch (3) for three seconds to end the first recording and enter standby mode. The recording symbol will start to flash. To start recording a second sequence, momentarily depress the step switch (3). NOTE: Transmission shifts made whilst the tractor is in reverse will not be recorded or played back by HMC. A pause will be automatically entered in the programme at this point.
3--18
3 17
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS During a recording, pauses may be inserted into the programme by momentarily depressing the step switch (3). HMC recording will pause at this point and a pause symbol will be inserted in the sequence, depress the step switch again to resume recording. To store a recorded sequence, depress the top of the record switch (2) Figure 16. This will de--activate the HMC function and no further recording will occur. NOTE: If, during a recording sequence, the engine is stopped (key--off) then all steps recorded up to that point will be saved. NOTE: Shuttling actions are not recorded but a pause is automatically inserted into the sequence when the shuttle lever is operated.
3 18
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), any adjustments to electronically stored settings made during tractor operation are transferred from the operating memory to the main memory. To allow sufficient time for the data to transfer, pause for a minimum of five seconds before turning the key on again. IMPORTANT: When including electronic remote valve operation in a HMC sequence, it is important to allow sufficient time for the movement of the control lever to be recorded as it passes through R, N, L and F positions (or vice versa). Pausing the lever in each position for approximately 1/2 second will provide sufficient time for the step to be recorded accurately. Moving the lever too quickly may confuse data transfer causing the implement to respond incorrectly on play--back. NOTE: The maximum time permitted for a single step in an EHR valve sequence is 25 seconds. After this time another step will be created to continue the operation and a new icon will appear in the display.
19
3--19
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Playback a Programme
CAUTION
Before commencing work, it is recommended that HMC programmes are given a ’dry run’ to ensure all programme steps have been retained in the memory, and any timed EHR sequences replay correctly. To replay a recorded sequence, momentarily depress the top of the play--back switch (1) for AUTO re--play, depress the bottom of the switch for MANUAL re--play. Play--back will be activated but will remain in standby mode. If the suspend/resume function (step switch) was used to record a second programme, the operator may now cycle between programmes 1 and 2 by holding down the AUTO or MANUAL side of the play--back switch. When the correct number appears at the top of the transmission display, release the switch. The programme number will be replaced by a flashing play--back symbol.
20
When reaching the point at which the programme is to start, depress and hold the step switch (3) until a ’beep’ is heard then release the switch. Play--back will start as soon as the switch is released and the first symbol in the sequence will appear below the play--back symbol. NOTE: To initiate playback, the engine speed must be above 900 e.r.p.m. and the groundspeed must be above 0.5 K/mh (0.31 MPH). When play--back begins, the symbol will stop flashing and will remain displayed. As each function comes into play, the corresponding symbol will appear immediately below the play--back symbol. At this point it will change from black on grey to grey on black (inversed).
3--20
3 21
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Subsequent symbols in the programme sequence will appear below the one currently in play. As each step is completed, the corresponding symbol will disappear from the display to be replaced by the next one. If play--back is activated in MANUAL mode, depressing the step switch will only play the first step in the sequence. When the first step is completed the programme will pause until the step switch is depressed again to start the next action in the sequence. In play--back, each step will be re--played exactly as it was recorded. NOTE: If necessary, the foot throttle may be used to increase engine speed during HMC play--back. If pauses were inserted into the sequence during recording, play--back will automatically stop at each pause point. To resume the sequence, depress and hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard. The next step will start immediately the switch is released. By delaying the point at where the step switch is used to re--start a programme in AUTOMATIC mode, adjustments can be made to the time span of a sequence or to extend the delay between individual steps. This only applies to pauses inserted at the recording stage. In play--back mode, the programme may be stopped at any time by depressing the step switch (3). The programme will pause and play--back symbol will begin to flash.
3 22
3--21
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS IMPORTANT: If the step switch is used to suspend a function in play, all current HMC actions, including timed electronic remote valve sequences, will be aborted and it may be necessary to manually complete the paused step before re--starting HMC play--back. To resume programme play--back, depress and hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, release the switch. IMPORTANT: During play--back, one or more of the following actions will cause HMC to be stopped and all automated functions, including timed EHR sequences, to be terminated: • • • • •
Tractor speed drops below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH), or is stationary for more than 10 seconds. The operator leaves the seat for more than 2 seconds. Fender mounted 3--point hitch or PTO controls are operated. Hand throttle is set to idle. Operating one or more of the HMC linked tractor controls to override the programme.
NOTE: A control is not regarded as overridden by HMC until the sequence reaches the point at which the automated operation of that control begins. At this time, the sequence will be stopped. On completion of a sequence, or if HMC is halted during play--back, electronic remote valves will not return to float even if the relevant lever is in the float position unless: •
The lever was in the float position when the HMC system was activated.
•
The last HMC command step selected the valve float function.
3--22
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS If an EHR function is in play and the step switch (3) is used to cancel the action i.e. to stop a hydraulic cylinder extending, then the cylinder will stop and play--back will be suspended. The cancelled action will be by--passed and the programme will move on to the next step when play--back is re--started. However, the cancelled action will remain in the programme memory for subsequent re--plays. To continue the programme, depress and hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, then release the switch. NOTE: When a HMC programme is suspended, the symbols will flash in the display until the step switch is depressed to re--start the programme.
3 23
IMPORTANT: If an HMC programme is halted by the operator leaving the seat for more than 2 seconds, the current engine speed will be maintained until the operator returns to the seat, the throttle setting is changed or the HMC sequence is cancelled. Before leaving the seat, always de- activate HMC and apply the tractor parking brake.
3--23
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TURN ASSIST (WHERE FITTED) The optional Turn Assist system is designed to provide quick steering response when required i.e. when operating with a front loader. From the straight ahead position, Turn Assist will provide full right or left hand steering lock with less than a 10° movement of the steering wheel. IMPORTANT: Before travelling on the public highway Turn Assist must be de--activated and normal steering re--instated. To check normal steering operation, turn the wheel fully from lock to lock before starting your journey.
24
NOTE: Turn Assist will not operate if the tractor speed is above 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH). To activate the Turn Assist function, depress the isolator switch (1). A green warning light on the instrument panel (3) will illuminate to confirm system activation. To operate Turn Assist, depress and hold the centre ring (4) on the steering wheel, to disengage, release the ring. With the centre ring depressed, a yellow indicator light (2) will illuminate on the instrument panel. It will extinguish when the centre ring is released.
25
NOTE: If the isolator switch (1) is left in the ’ON’ position at engine key--off, then Turn Assist will be de--activated at key--on. The isolator switch warning light will not illuminate and the yellow indicator light (2) will flash if the centre ring is depressed. To re--activate Turn Assist turn the isolator switch ’OFF’ and then ’ON’. Turn Assist can only be operated if the following three conditions are met. 1. The isolator switch is in the ON position and the green warning light is illuminated. 2. The speed of the tractor is below 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH). 3. The transmission oil temperature is above 5° C. NOTE: Attempting to use the Turn Assist function without meeting all the above conditions, will cause the yellow indicator light (2) to flash. 26
3--24
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS NOTE: If tractor speed exceeds 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH) with Turn Assist in operation, it will be disengage and the green indicator light (2) will flash. NOTE: Where the transmission oil temperature is low and Turn Assist is to be used, it is recommended to turn the steering wheel twice, from full lock to full lock, before operating with Turn Assist. Turn Assist will be disabled if a fault occurs. Should the system become disabled, an audible warning will sound and an error code will appear in the Dot Matrix Display. If the fault is of a critical nature, the ’STOP’ warning lamp will also flash on the instrument panel, consult your authorised dealer.
27
To re--activate Turn Assist, turn the isolator switch (1) ’OFF’, correct the fault, and then turn the isolator switch ’ON’. IMPORTANT: To promote safe operation of Turn Assist, it is advised that the operator become familiar with the system before operating in the field.
3--25
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS REAR POWER TAKE--OFF Description The PTO is engaged and disengaged by means of a knob (1) on the right-hand console. The adjacent warning light (2) will illuminate when the PTO is engaged. Three types of rear PTO system are available, dependent upon tractor model and country. a) 540/1000 speeds with inter-changeable output shafts. b) 540/1000 shiftable with inter--changeable output shafts and the option of fender--mounted switches.
28
c) 540E/1000 shiftable with inter-changeable output shafts and the option of fender-mounted switches. An automatic ‘soft start’ facility is provided to permit easy start up of heavy, high inertia, PTO--driven equipment. Soft start modulates PTO clutch torque over the first 5 seconds of engagement to provide a slower, gradual take up of the drive. NOTE: Soft start only operates at engine speeds of 1800 rev/min and below. Above this speed, normal PTO engagement will occur. With shiftable PTO, a range lever is provided to select 540 or 1000 PTO speeds. The range lever (1), is located at the rear of the right-hand console.
29
3--26
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out To engage the PTO, depress the knob (1) then lift the collar (2) and knob together. This movement should be decisive in its application as hesitant or incorrect operation of the knob or collar may cause the PTO system to Time--Out. Do not: •
Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 10 seconds.
•
Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (2) for more than 10 seconds without engaging the PTO.
•
Operate the fender mounted and internal PTO controls simultaneously or within 2 seconds of each other.
30
Any or all of the above actions will cause the PTO to become inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds. Should this occur, the PTO Time--Out symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix Display and the amber warning light will flash for 10 seconds. The non--critical alarm will sound for 4 seconds. During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out period.
3--27
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS ATTACHING PTO DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
Before attaching or detaching equipment or changing the PTO shaft: •
Firmly apply the parking brake.
•
Ensure that all gearshift levers are in neutral.
•
Disengage the PTO (knob fully down) and wait until the PTO and equipment stops. Switch off the engine before getting off the tractor.
With the engine stopped, the PTO brake is released and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid implement shaft alignment. Mount or hitch the equipment to the tractor as outlined in THREE--POINT HITCH on page 3--93. A plastic PTO cap (1) is supplied and should always be installed over the shaft when the PTO is not in use. Store this cover in the tractor toolbox when using the PTO. A flip-up PTO guard is fitted as standard. This also serves as a support for drive-line shields used with PTO-driven equipment and provides for your safety. Do not modify the guard.
31
Remove the ’R’ clip (1) from the locating pin and slide the guard upwards to clear the pin. Rotate the guard to gain access to the PTO shaft. A second locating pin allows the guard to be fixed at 45° if required. To connect PTO-driven equipment to the PTO shaft, tilt the guard up for access NOTE: Tractors with slider type, vertically adjustable drawbars have a flip--up PTO guard plate fixed to the slider frame. See ’Slider Frame Drawbars’ in Section 7. 32
3--28
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Attach the implement to the PTO shaft, ensuring that the implement driveshaft coupler lock pin (3) or detent balls engage the groove in the PTO shaft (2). If the coupler does not have a locking arrangement, pin the coupler to the shaft. Lower the flip-up guard and replace the ’R’ clip. IMPORTANT: After attaching mounted equipment, carefully raise and lower using Position Control and check clearances and PTO shaft slide range and articulation. When attaching trailed equipment, ensure that the drawbar is correctly set. 33 PTO Operating Precautions
WARNING
Whenever operating PTO equipment, observe the following precautions:
•
Check that you are using the correct PTO speed for the implement. Follow the instructions in the equipment operator’s manual.
•
Ensure that the PTO guard is installed when using PTO driven equipment.
•
Do not wear loose clothing when operating PTO driven equipment.
•
Firmly apply the parking brake, place all gearshift levers in neutral and block all four wheels before operating any stationary PTO equipment.
•
Do not approach, clean or adjust PTO driven equipment while the tractor engine is still running. Disengage the PTO (knob fully down) and wait until the PTO and equipment stops. Switch off the engine before getting off the tractor.
•
With the engine stopped, the PTO brake is released and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid the installation or removal of the implement PTO shaft.
34
35
3--29
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TWO--SPEED PTO SYSTEMS General Information
Operating with Stationary PTO Equipment
Generally speaking, PTO driven equipment not having a high power requirement is designed to run at 540 PTO rev/min and will have a 6--spline female coupling. A PTO shaft speed of 540 rev/min is obtained at an engine speed of 1950 rev/min.
Before operating static PTO equipment, make sure the tractor is safely positioned and the parking brake is applied. Sitting in the seat, engage PTO drive and, observing the instrument panel display, set the appropriate speed.
Equipment having a high power requirement is designed to operate at 1000 PTO rev/min and will be provided with a 21--spline female coupling. With the 21--spline shaft installed, run the engine at 2178 rev/min to provide a PTO speed of 1000 rev/min.
NOTE: On tractors fitted with Constant Engine Speed, it may be prudent to use the CES function to maintain a constant speed if the load on the PTO is subject to variations.
Tractors with 2--speed 540E/1000 PTO have the advantage of running low power 540 PTO driven equipment at a reduced engine speed by selecting 540E on the lever. See page 3--31 for PTO and engine speeds. IMPORTANT: Implements with a high power requirement should be operated with the 1000 rev/min. PTO (21--spline shaft). If it is necessary to use the 6--spline shaft (at 540 rev/min.) to operate implements having a power requirement of more than 75 horsepower, then it is strongly recommended that the implement is fitted with a slip clutch to avoid damage to the PTO output shaft and other tractor components. NOTE: When required, change the PTO shaft to suit the operation and equipment in use, as described under ‘Changing the PTO Output Shaft’ on page 3--35 .
3--30
On leaving the tractor seat an intermittent alarm will sound for approximately 5 seconds and the amber warning light will illuminate. If the alarm sound is a constant tone, check to ensure the parking brake is firmly applied.
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TWO--SPEED PTO WITH INTER- CHANGEABLE SHAFTS A 6--spline PTO output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540 rev/min. Dependent upon tractor specification, an alternative 21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., may also be supplied with the tractor or is available from your dealer. An alternative 20--spline shaft of 1.75 in. (44.45 mm) diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is available from your dealer. Operating With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less, press the knob (1) and lift the collar (2) and knob up to engage the PTO The knob will remain up while the PTO is engaged and the adjacent warning light (3) will be illuminated. NOTE: The light will be illuminated when the PTO is engaged. If overspeeding of the PTO occurs (PTO speed exceeds 630 rev/min) the light will flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. When the 1000 rev/min/shaft is in use, the light will also flash (but may be ignored) as PTO shaft speed passes through the 630 rev/min range. The light will flash again at 1100 PTO rev/min to indicate that overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rev/min PTO range.
36
Use the hand throttle to obtain the required engine/PTO speeds, the PTO shaft speed can be displayed at (1). PTO Speeds 540 1000
@ 1950 e.r.p.m. @ 2178 e.r.p.m.
37
3--31
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS To disconnect PTO drive, reduce engine speed and press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage the Power Take Off. If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor ensure any PTO driven equipment is allowed to come to a complete stop before leaving the seat.
DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement, disengage the PTO after each use. NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the PTO will not operate when the engine is restarted until the PTO knob is reset. Return the selector knob manually to the ‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then re-engage the PTO, as previously described.
38
IMPORTANT: An automatic PTO brake is installed to stop shaft rotation quickly when the PTO is disengaged. To avoid overstressing the PTO brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine speed before disengaging the PTO This is particularly important with implements having a high inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be equipped with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake when operating high inertia implements, depress and hold the top of the switch (1), to disengage the brake and allow the implement to come to rest naturally. 39
3--32
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TWO--SPEED, SHIFTABLE PTO (540/1000 or 540E/1000) A 6--spline PTO output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540 rev/min. Dependent upon tractor specification, an alternative 21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., may also be supplied with the tractor or is available from your dealer. An alternative 20--spline shaft of 1.75 in. (44.45 mm) diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is available from your dealer. Operating Before engaging the PTO, select a PTO ratio, as follows: With 6--spline shaft installed •
With the tractor stationary and the PTO control knob in the disengaged position, select the required speed by means of the range lever. Lift the spring-loaded collar (2) beneath the knob (1) and move the lever to engage 540, 540E or 1000 PTO speeds.
IMPORTANT: The PTO range lever cannot be moved until the spring-loaded collar beneath the knob is lifted. 40 With 21--spline shaft installed •
With the tractor stationary and the PTO control knob in the disengaged position, lift the spring-loaded collar (1), beneath the knob (2), and move the lever fully to the right. This will provide a PTO speed of 1000 rev/min at 2178 engine rev/min.
NOTE: The PTO range lever should always be in the 1000 rev/min position when the 21--spline shaft is installed. If you only ever operate with a 21--spline shaft, leave the range lever in this position.
41
3--33
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less, press the knob (1) and lift the collar (2) and knob up to engage the PTO The knob will remain up while the PTO is engaged and the adjacent warning light (3) will be illuminated. NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the PTO will not operate when the engine is restarted until the PTO knob is reset. Return the control knob manually to the ‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then re-engage the PTO, as previously described.
42 With the PTO engaged gradually increase engine r.p.m. using the hand throttle until the appropriate speed is displayed at (1). Range Lever Position
Engine Speed (rev/min)
PTO Speed (rev/min)
Fully rearward (540, 6--spline shaft)
1950
540
Fully rearward (540E, 6--spline shaft)
1526
540E
Fully forward 1000, 21--spline shaft
2178
1000
43
NOTE: If overspeeding of the PTO occurs (i.e. PTO speed exceeds 630 rev/min) the light (2) will flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. When the 1000 rev/min shaft is in use, the light may also flash (but may be ignored) as PTO shaft speed passes through the 630 rev/min range. The light will flash again at 1100 PTO rev/min to indicate that overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rev/min PTO range. To disconnect PTO drive, reduce engine speed and press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage the Power Take Off. If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor ensure any PTO driven equipment is allowed to come to a complete stop before leaving the seat.
3--34
44
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS IMPORTANT: An automatic PTO brake is installed to stop shaft rotation quickly when the PTO is disengaged. To avoid overstressing the PTO brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine speed before disengaging the PTO This is particularly important with implements having a high inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be fitted with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake when operating high inertia implements, hold down the top of the switch (1), to disengage the brake and allow the implement to come to rest naturally.
DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement, disengage the PTO after each use.
45
CHANGING THE PTO OUTPUT SHAFT Using a suitable tool, compress and remove the circlip (1) from the PTO housing and carefully withdraw the PTO stub shaft. With the shaft removed, check the ’O’ ring seal in the PTO housing for any damage. Replace ’O’ ring if worn or damaged. Thoroughly clean the replacement stub shaft before inserting it into the housing. Replace the circlip ensuring it engages fully with the groove in the PTO housing.
46
Protect the removed shaft by wrapping in a clean cloth and place in the tool box.
3--35
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Using the Auto PTO Function (where fitted) The Auto PTO function provides automatic engagement or disengagement of the rear PTO drive when using the EDC raise/lower switch (1). Operating the switch to raise the implement will automatically disengage PTO drive. Lowering the implement with the switch will re--engage PTO drive. The height at which the PTO is engaged or disengaged can be set using the following method. IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and the PTO switched off before attempting this procedure. •
With the engine running and the PTO switched off, operate the lift control to capture the hitch.
•
Depress and hold the PTO switch for 2 seconds. The central display will show ’u’ followed by two figures, for example, ’u38’. The figure 38 representing the current height of the hitch.
•
Raise the hitch to point at which the PTO is to disengage. Depress the PTO switch once, the central display will show ’d xx’ (where ’xx’ is the current height of the hitch).
•
Lower the hitch to the point where the PTO is to re--engage and depress the PTO switch again. The central display will show ’End’ for two seconds and then return to the option selected prior to entering set--up mode.
47
Providing the tractor is stationary and the PTO is disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at any time. The new settings will remain in the memory until re--programmed. To activate the Auto function, engage the PTO as previously described and then depress and hold the switch (1), for more than one second. The Auto PTO lamp on the instrument panel will illuminate to confirm activation.
48
3--36
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS With the 3 point hitch in the lowered position and the PTO engaged, the Auto lamp will remain on. Raising the implement will disconnect PTO drive and cause the Auto lamp to flash. Lowering the implement will re--engage PTO drive, the Auto lamp will cease to flash and will remain on. Depressing the Auto PTO switch again will de--activate the function and the Auto lamp will extinguish. NOTE: The Auto PTO function will be de--activated every time the key start is switched off. Auto PTO will be de--activated should one or more of the following occur: •
The tractor speed is above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH) with the 3 point hitch in the raised position for more than 2 minutes.
•
With the 3 point hitch raised, the tractor speed falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH), or the tractor is stationary for more than 10 seconds with the 3--point hitch in the raised position.
•
If one of the external switches for PTO or 3 point hitch are operated.
•
The PTO is switched off using the internal or external switches.
•
Operating both internal and external PTO switches simultaneously.
•
Ground drive PTO is selected.
•
The operator leaves the seat for more than 2 minutes with Auto PTO activated and the 3 point hitch in the raised position.
To re--activate Auto PTO, clear the error and re--engage the function as previously described. NOTE: The Auto PTO function will be de--activated every time the key start as switched off.
3--37
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS EXTERNAL PTO CONTROLS (where fitted) An optional, fender-mounted PTO switch (1), may be installed on both rear fenders to aid alignment of the PTO shaft splines with equipment and facilitate stationary PTO operations. With the engine running, touch the switch momentarily to cause the PTO shaft to index round to align the shaft splines. If the switch is pressed for less than 5 seconds, the shaft will stop turning when the switch is released. 49 Press and hold in the switch for more than 5 seconds and the PTO will operate continuously. Press the switch again to stop the PTO Alternatively, the PTO may be stopped by means of the in-cab controls, as previously described. NOTE: The warning light, on the PTO control panel, will illuminate when the PTO is engaged, momentarily or permanently. NOTE: The PTO may be engaged or disengaged from the fender switch, whether the in-cab control is in the on or off position. NOTE: Simultaneous operation, within two seconds, of in cab and external PTO controls will result in the PTO delay symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix Display. A 10 second delay will occur before PTO control operation will recommence. NOTE: The soft start function will operate irrespective of whether the PTO is engaged from inside the cab or from a fender switch.
3--38
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS CAUTION
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external Power Take Off switches: •
Move all transmission controls to neutral.
•
Disengage the PTO
•
Apply the parking brake.
With the engine running, move the hand throttle lever to the low idle position (fully rearwards). The operator must only activate the external Power Take Off switches (1) while standing to the side of the tractor (outboard of the rear tyres). To avoid damage to implement or tractor, operation of the in cab and external PTO switches should not be carried out simultaneously.
WARNING
Before using the external Power Take Off switches, ensure that no person or object is in the area of the implement, 3-point hitch or PTO shaft. Never operate the external switches while standing: •
Directly behind the tractor or tyres.
•
Between the lower links.
•
On or near the implement.
•
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any object into the area near the 3-point hitch, PTO shaft or implement while operating the external switch.
•
Never have an assistant working the opposite set of controls.
•
When moving to the opposite set of controls, move around the tractor or implement.
•
Do not cross between the implement and tractor.
50
3--39
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS FRONT PTO AND 3--POINT HITCH (where fitted) Tractors with four wheel drive may be equipped with an engine-driven PTO and front 3--point hitch. These features are available as a factory installed option or dealer installed accessory. FRONT PTO The front power take--off (PTO) transfers engine power directly to front-mounted equipment via a 6 spline shaft (1). The PTO shaft rotates anti-clockwise (as viewed from the front). NOTE: A 21 spline shaft is available as a dealer installed accessory. A plastic cap is provided to protect the PTO shaft when not in use. NOTE: With the engine stopped, the PTO brake is released and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid implement shaft alignment. The front PTO is electro--hydraulically operated and is activated by a selector knob on the right-hand console, similar to the rear PTO When fitted with the Auto PTO feature, drive to the implement can be programmed to disengage and re--engage as the front hitch is raised and lowered. An automatic ‘soft start’ facility is provided to permit easy start up of heavy, high inertia, PTO--driven equipment. Soft start modulates PTO clutch torque over the first 5 seconds of engagement to provide a slower, gradual take up of the drive. NOTE: Soft start only operates at engine speeds of 1800 rev/min and below. Above this speed, normal PTO engagement will occur.
3--40
51
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less, press the knob (2) and lift the collar (3) and knob up to engage the PTO The knob will remain up while the PTO is engaged and the adjacent warning light (1) will be illuminated. Open the throttle to increase engine speed to 2100 rev/min and provide a PTO shaft speed of 1000 rev/min. To disengage the PTO, press the PTO selector knob (2), down. NOTE: If overspeeding of the PTO occurs (i.e. PTO speed exceeds 1100 rev/min) the light (1) will flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. Reduce engine speed to 2100 rev/min. NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the PTO will not operate when the engine is restarted until the PTO knob is reset. Return the selector knob manually to the ‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then re-engage the PTO, as previously described.
52
DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement, disengage the PTO after each use.
PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out Engagement of the PTO control should be decisive in its application as hesitant or incorrect operation of the knob or collar may cause the PTO system to Time--Out. Do not: •
Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 10 seconds.
•
Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (2) for more than 10 seconds without engaging the PTO.
Either action above will cause the PTO to become inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds.
3--41
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Should this occur, the PTO Time--Out symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix Display and the amber warning light will flash for 10 seconds. The non--critical alarm will sound for 4 seconds. During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out period.
53 Using the Auto PTO Function (where fitted) The Auto PTO function will automatically disengage and re--engage front PTO drive when raising and lowering the front hitch. Auto PTO can be used in conjunction with the front hitch height limiter. Raising the hitch will cause PTO drive to be dis--engaged at a predetermined point and the hitch to continue lifting until it reaches the maximum height setting. The height at which the PTO is engaged or disengaged can be set using the following method. IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and the PTO switched off before attempting this procedure. •
Depress and hold the front Auto PTO switch (1) for 2 seconds. The central display will show ’Fu’ followed by two figures, for example, ’Fu38’. The figure 38 representing the current height of the hitch.
3--42
54
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS •
page 43Raise the hitch to point at which the PTO is to disengage. Depress the Auto PTO switch once, the central display will show ’Fd xx’ (where ’xx’ is the current height of the hitch).
•
Lower the hitch to the point where the PTO is to re--engage and depress the Auto PTO switch again. The central display will show ’End’ for two seconds and then return to the option selected prior to entering set--up mode.
Providing the tractor is stationary and the PTO is disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at any time. The new settings will remain in the memory until re--programmed. To activate the front function, engage the PTO as previously described and then depress and hold the Auto PTO switch for more than one second. The front Auto PTO lamp (1) on the instrument panel will illuminate to confirm activation. With the front 3 point hitch in the lowered position and the PTO engaged, the Auto lamp will remain on. Raising the implement will disconnect PTO drive and cause the Auto lamp to flash. Lowering the implement will re--engage PTO drive, the Auto lamp will cease to flash and will remain on. Depressing the front Auto PTO switch again will de--activate the function and the Auto lamp will extinguish.
55
3--43
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS NOTE: The Auto PTO function will be de--activated every time the key start is switched off. Auto PTO will be de--activated should one or more of the following occur: •
The tractor speed is above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH) with the 3 point hitch in the raised position for more than 2 minutes.
•
With the 3 point hitch raised, the tractor speed falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH), or the tractor is stationary for more than 10 seconds with the front 3--point hitch in the raised position.
•
The PTO is switched off.
•
The operator leaves the seat for more than 2 minutes with Auto PTO activated and the 3 point hitch in the raised position.
To re--activate Auto PTO, clear the error and re--engage the function as previously described.
3--44
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS FRONT 3--POINT HITCH (where fitted) The optional front hitch, consists of an adjustable top link (1) and a pair of folding lower links (2). The top link and the lower links have open claw ends that permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements. The claws are equipped with self-locking latches to ensure positive retention of the 3--point hitch to the implement.
56 The front hitch can be operated by a rear or mid--mount remote valve (where fitted). The height of the hitch (1) can be shown in the Dot Matrix Display as a percentage (%) ranging from 0 (fully lowered) to 100 (full raise).
57 Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper hitch pin. The two plain ball-bushings (3) with their detachable guides (2) should be installed on the implement lower hitch pins.
58
3--45
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Operating the Front Hitch The front hitch may be operated by mechanical rear remote valves, electronic rear remote valves or, where fitted, electronic mid-mount remote valves. A height limit control permits the operator to set a pre--determined limit on the maximum lift height of the hitch . Setting the Height of the Front Hitch Height limit control is provided by a rotary knob (1) on the right-hand console. Turn fully clockwise for maximum height. Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the height. The height setting will be shown in the Dot Matrix Display as a percentage (%) between 0 (fully lowered) and 100 (full raise). Turn the control fully anti--clockwise to disable the height limit function. NOTE: The height limit setting may be affected by the oil flow through the system. If the height limit is initially set at a low engine/hydraulic pump speed, it may change if the engine speed is increased to a higher setting.
59
With Mechanical Rear Remote Valves: With the front hitch connected to the appropriate valve, pull the lever rearwards (R) to raise the front hitch. Move the lever to (N) to halt hitch movement, the hitch will maintain its height position. Select (L) to lower the hitch. With the lever in the float position (F), the hitch can move up and down (float) allowing the implement to follow the ground contours. The front hitch may be connected to any of the rear remote valves. Where an implement requires additional hydraulic services, these may be connected to any unused valve.
3--46
60
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS With Electronic Remote Valves: Electronic rear remote valves may be used to operate the front hitch using the control lever or the joystick, (where fitted). As a factory fitted option, the default valve to operate the hitch will always be valve number one whether rear mount or mid mount valves are used. The valve is programmed to operate in conjunction with the front hitch height limiter previously described. 61 With Joystick and Electronic Rear or Mid Mount Remote Valves: The joystick can be used to control the front hitch using the electronic rear remote valves or, where fitted, the mid--mount remote valves. Where a front hitch is supplied as a factory option, electronic mid--mount remote valve number one will be used to operate the hitch. On tractors equipped with both mid and rear mounted electronic valves, the joystick can be used to control either valve pack. A selector switch on the cab ’C’ pillar allows the operator to switch joystick control between the rear (2) and mid--mount remote valve pack (1).
62
NOTE: Switching the joystick from mid--mount to rear valve operation will automatically suspend lever operation of the rear remote valves. IMPORTANT: Before switching joystick operation between mid and rear valve packs or vice versa, ensure both remote valve levers and joystick are in the neutral position.
3--47
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS At key--on, the joystick indicator lamps will start to flash but the joystick will remain disabled. To activate the joystick the operator must be in the seat and the tractor engine running for a minimum of five seconds. Once activated, the mid--mount valve indicator lamp (3) will stop flashing and remain illuminated. NOTE: Operation of the joystick will be disabled if the operator leaves the seat or the tractor engine is stopped.
63 Where it is required to operate the front hitch using the rear remote valves and joystick, depress the bottom of the selector switch (2). The mid--mount indicator lamp will go out and the rear remote valve indicator lamp will start to flash. After five seconds the rear indicator lamp will stop flashing and will remain on, confirming joystick control of the rear remote valves has been activated. Operation of the front hitch may now be controlled by the joystick through the rear remote valves. NOTE: The mid--mount indicator lamp will flash even where mid--mount valves are not fitted.
64
NOTE: When using the rear electronic remote valves with joystick control, no timed operation or programmed motor functions are available. Both rear mounted and mid--mount electronic remote valves offer the following functions when operated by the joystick. Remote valve 1: Move the joystick forwards or backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float. Remote Valve 2: Move the joystick left or right to operate Raise, Neutral and Lower.
65
3--48
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Where valves 3 and 4 are fitted, the joystick functions as follows. This applies to both rear mount or mid--mount valves. Remote valve 3: Depress and hold the button (1) and move the joystick forwards or backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float. Remote Valve 4: Depress and hold the button (1) and move the joystick left or right to operate Raise, Neutral and Lower. Move the joystick rearwards (R) to raise the implement. When the front hitch reaches the position set by the height limit control the hitch will stop.
66
Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L) will cause the implement to lower to the ground at a controlled rate of descent. Further forward movement of the joystick will select ‘float’ (F) which will allow the implement to lower under its own weight. Float can also used to let the hitch lift cylinder extend or retract freely allowing front mounted equipment to follow ground contours. NOTE: Always use the ’float’ position to lower a single--acting cylinder. The ’lower’ position is for double--acting cylinders only. IMPORTANT: Always use ‘lower’ and ’float’ positions to operate a hydraulic motor. To stop the motor, move the lever from the ‘lower’ position to the ‘float’ position. The motor will then slow to a gradual halt and not stop abruptly which may cause internal damage to the motor. NOTE: With the joystick operating the rear electronic remote valves, the float position for valves 2 and 4 (lateral movement of the joystick) is not available.
3--49
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS The joystick may also be moved laterally, (R) and (L), to provide oil flow for equipment connected to the optional front couplers. By moving the joystick diagonally, two cylinders may be operated simultaneously.
67 To switch control of the rear valves back to the levers, depress the top of the selector switch (1), to activate the mid--mount valves, the rear indicator lamp will go out and the mid--mount indicator lamp will start to flash. After two seconds the mid--mount lamp will stay on confirming joystick operation has been switched back to the mid--mount valves (where fitted). Operation of the rear remote valves is now by lever.
68 Auxiliary Front Couplers (where fitted) Two auxiliary couplers with 1/2 inch female couplings may be fitted to the front of the hitch frame. These will provide a double--acting hydraulic service for equipment mounted on the front 3--point hitch. When operated by the joystick, lateral movement of the lever (left or right) will provide pressurised oil at the couplings. See page 3--48 for details. NOTE: When the front couplers are not in use always re--insert the protective plug into the coupler to prevent dust or debris from entering the hydraulic system.
3--50
69
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Setting the Hitch Operating Mode Located on the front of the hitch assembly, the two selector levers (1) permit the front hitch to be operated in single--acting mode, double--acting mode, or to be set at a fixed height.
70 Position P1: Upper lever horizontal, lower lever vertical. Front hitch operates in single--acting mode being hydraulically raised but lowered using weight of implement. Position P2: Both levers horizontal. Hitch operates in double--acting mode being hydraulically raised and lowered. Operating in this mode will provide additional penetration for ground engaging equipment in hard soil conditions or when using a front mounted scraper blade.
71
Lock Position: Both levers vertical. With the levers in this position, both lift cylinders are hydraulically ’locked’ preventing movement of the lower link arms. It is recommended this mode should be selected when transporting front mounted equipment on the highway.
3--51
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS EXTERNAL FRONT 3--POINT HITCH CONTROLS (where fitted) External raise and lower buttons are provided on the left--hand side of the front hitch assembly. Depress and hold the appropriate button to raise or lower the hitch, release the button to halt movement of the hitch.
WARNING
Do not stand on or near the implement or between the implement and tractor when operating the controls for the external front 3--point hitch. NOTE: The external front 3--point hitch controls are disabled when the operator is in the seat. Before leaving the tractor to operate the external controls: •
Disengage the PTO
•
Apply the parking brake.
With the engine running, move the hand throttle lever to the low idle position (fully rearwards).
WARNING
Before using the external front 3--point hitch controls, ensure that no person or object is in the area of the implement or 3-point hitch. Never operate the external controls while standing: •
Between the lower links.
•
On or near the implement.
WARNING
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any object into the area near the front 3-point hitch or implement while operating the external controls.
3--52
72
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Transport Locks When travelling on the highway, both mid--mount and rear electronic remote valves can be disabled to prevent inadvertent lowering of the front hitch which may cause damage to the tractor or road surface. Electronic Remote Valves To isolate rear or mid--mount remote valve operation, depress the top of the switch on the cab ’C’ pillar. The warning lamp on the remote valve lever console will illuminate to confirm the valves are disabled. To re--enable operation of the rear remote valves, depress the bottom of the switch.
73 Joystick The electronic joystick is provided with a mechanical transport lock. To engage the lock, grip the joystick, push down and rotate clockwise. This will lock the joystick in the neutral position. Reverse the procedure to unlock the joystick.
74
3--53
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Hitch Settings and Adjustments Transport Position The top link and lower links should be placed in the transport position when not in use. Raise the top link (1) to the vertical position and secure by sliding the adjuster handle extensions (2) into the slots in the support (3).
75 Each lower link pivots about the pin (2). This pin should not be removed unless it is required to remove the lower links. To raise the lower link, extract the pin (3) from the support assembly and raise the link (1) to the vertical position, as shown. Re--insert the pin through the support when the holes in the lower link and support are correctly aligned. Before operating the tractor ensure both pins are fully secured using the lock pins.
76 To convert to the working position, remove the lock pins, pull out the pin (5) and manually lower the lower link down to the operating position, as shown. Re--install the pin in one of the holes (4) or (6), as required and secure. When installed in the rear hole (5), the lower link will be locked as a rigid unit. If the pin is installed in the front hole (6), the lower link will be allowed to move up and down freely (float) through a range of approx. 75 mm (3 in). Secure the pin using the lock pins. Repeat on the other lower link, ensuring that both lower links are set up the same, i.e., both are locked as rigid units or both are allowed to float.
3--54
77
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS NOTE: With the lower links pinned in the float position, the left and right-hand sides of the implement can move up and down independently to allow for operation on uneven surfaces. In addition, the remote control valve float function will allow the whole implement to move up or down as it passes over uneven ground. Coupling Implement to Tractor Start the engine. Move the remote valve lever or joystick (where fitted) from neutral (N) to lower (L) until the link arms are just clear of the ground. Position the tractor so that the open claw ends are beneath the implement hitch pins.
78 Slowly move the remote valve lever or joystick rearward to raise the lower links until the claw couplers engage the ball-bushings. An audible click will be heard as the self-locking latches engage the ball-bushings on the implement. The lift control should be returned to the neutral position before the lower links start to lift the implement from the ground. IMPORTANT: Before operating the tractor, ensure the release latches (1), are fully retracted into the link end.
79 Attach the top link to the implement, adjusting to the correct length by rotating the threaded centre section (1) using the handles (2) as leverage. To prevent the centre section from rotating while in work, place the locking latch (3) over one of the adjuster handles. The top link has a similar claw end to the lower links. Lower the top link claw onto the upper implement ball-bush and press down until the latch is heard to engage. The implement supports, where fitted, may now be removed or retracted and the implement supported on the front hitch. 80
3--55
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Uncoupling Implement from Tractor Using the remote lever or joystick, lower the implement to the ground, ensuring that it cannot fall when disconnected from the front hitch. Use the implement supports (where fitted). Pull back the lever on the top link to release the claw from the implement upper hitch pin. Pull the ring (1) on both lower links fully rearwards. The lever will lock in position with the latch retracted. This will allow the links to clear the ball-bushings on the implement lower hitch pins when the links are lowered fully. Fully lower the lower links using the remote lever or joystick and reverse the tractor clear of the implement.
3--56
81
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS ELECTRONIC HITCH CONTROL The system described here is known as Electronic Hitch Control. This electronically controlled hydraulic system senses changes in the draft loading via sensors in the lower link pins of the 3--point hitch and changes in the position of the hitch via a sensor on the cross shaft. The system functions in Position Control or Draft Control. Position Control provides accurate control of implements, such as sprayers, rakes, graders, etc., that operate above the ground. Once implement height has been set, the system will maintain the selected position irrespective of any external forces acting upon it. Draft Control is designed for mounted or semi-mounted implements operating in the ground. Changes in soil resistance cause the draft loading on the implement to increase or decrease. Draft Control Operational Notes Draft control sets the working depth in the soil by maintaining a constant draft load. If the Position Control knob (1), is set just below the normal Draft Control working depth, it will prevent the implement from ‘diving’ or working too deep if an area of soft or light soil is encountered. Position Control will override draft control when the Position Control lever is moved above the working depth set by the draft loading wheel (2). Therefore, the Position Control knob can be used to lift the implement out of the ground when operating in Draft Control without changing the original working depth.
82
This function can be useful when a gradual lift out is required. The thumbwheel stop can be set so that the Position Control knob can be returned quickly to a lower limit position just below the normal Draft Control working depth. The raise/lower switch would normally be used to raise or lower an implement during a work cycle.
3--57
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Control Pod The hitch position control knob (2), is used to set implement height, when operating in Position Control and maximum implement depth when operating in Draft Control. The adjustable stop (1) is used to provide a repeat height or depth setting when used in conjunction with the hitch Position Control. The draft loading wheel (3), determines the draft load and therefore implement working depth by setting a force on the draft sensitivity pins. Rotate fully anti--clockwise to provide maximum load and therefore maximum implement depth.
83
The raise/lower switch (4) Figure 3--58, is a three position, spring centered switch that enables the operator to rapidly raise the implement to the position set by the height limit control and to lower the implement back down to the working depth/height set by the Position or Draft Controls, without disturbing the settings. The switch also provides for faster ground engagement, if required. For detailed information, see text on page 3--64. EHC Panel The draft sensitivity control (1), is used to make the system more sensitive or less sensitive to changes in draft loading. Maximum sensitivity is obtained by rotating the control fully clockwise. The drop rate control (2), adjusts the speed at which the three--point hitch drops during the lowering cycle. Position 1 selects the slowest drop and is denoted by the tortoise symbol, position 7 provides the fastest rate of drop. The height limit control knob (3), limits the height to which the hitch may be raised. Adjust this knob to avoid the possibility of a large implement damaging the tractor when fully raised. The slip limit control knob (4), available only with the optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to select a wheel slip threshold, above which the implement will raise until wheel slip returns to the set level.
3--58
84
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Indicator Lights The malfunction warning light (4), serves two purposes: -- Flashing light means that there is a malfunction in the system circuits. This will be accompanied by the hitch error symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix Display. -- Steady light signifies ‘hitch disabled’. Again, the ‘hitch disabled’ warning is repeated in the Dot Matrix Display with the hitch symbol. The indicator lights (1) and (2), operate when the position control lever is used to raise or lower the implement or as lift and lower corrections occur during normal tractor operation. The lower light (2) will illuminate when the 3--point hitch lowers. The upper light (1) will illuminate when the hitch raises.
85
A slip limit ‘on’ indicator (3), illuminates when the wheel slip limit control is activated. Hitch Position Display The digital display in the instrument panel indicates the position of the lower links (1) over a scale of ‘0’ to ‘100’. A display of ‘0’ indicates that the links are fully lowered. ‘100’ indicates they are fully raised. Select the display using the standard or Enhanced keypad (where fitted).
86 Malfunction Warning Light In the unlikely event that a fault occurs in the EHC, the malfunction warning light (1) Figure 85, will start to flash. The warning light will be accompanied by the appearance of the hitch symbol (1), and error code (2), in the Dot Matrix Display.
87
3--59
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS The code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g. short circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. In this event your tractor will require the attention of your authorised dealer. A steady malfunction warning light signifies ‘hitch disabled’ which is repeated in the Dot Matrix Display by the appearance of the hitch symbol (1) and error code ’1024’ (2). The ‘hitch disabled’ warning light signifies that position control setting does not correspond to position of the lower links with the result that lower links cannot be raised or lowered using in-cab controls. The ‘hitch disabled’ warning display if: •
•
the the the the will
The Position Control lever has been moved with the engine stopped.
88
One of the external power lift switches has been operated to raise or lower the three-point hitch. See ‘External Hydraulic Power Lift Controls’ on page 3--67.
To put the Position Control lever back into phase with the lower links, place the raise/lower switch in the central position and, with the engine running, move the Position Control lever (1) slowly forward or rearward, as required, until the position of the lever matches the hitch height. The ‘hitch disabled’ warning light will go out and the hitch error symbol will disappear from the Dot Matrix Display. The 3--point hitch will now raise or lower normally.
89
3--60
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS PRE--OPERATION SETTINGS Attach the implement to the 3--point hitch. Turn the draft loading wheel (2) fully forward to position 10 -- this is the Position Control setting. Start the engine and, using the Position Control knob (1), raise the implement in stages, ensuring that there is at least 100 mm (4 in.) clearance between the implement and any part of the tractor. Note the digital display reading on the instrument panel. If the reading is less than ‘99’ it means that the implement is not fully raised.
90
Adjust the height limit control knob (2) to prevent the hitch being raised further and so avoid the possibility of the implement damaging the tractor when fully raised. When the raise/lower switch or the Position Control knob is used to raise the implement, it will only raise to the height set by the height limit control, as determined in the previous step. Adjust the rate of drop, to suit the size and weight of the attached implement, by rotating the drop rate control knob (1). Turn the knob clockwise to speed up the drop rate or anti-clockwise to slow down the drop rate.
91
IMPORTANT: When first setting the implement up for work, keep the drop rate control knob in the slow drop position (‘tortoise’ symbol). When the raise/lower switch is used to lower the implement, it will lower at a controlled rate as determined in the previous step.
3--61
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION To operate in Draft Control adjustment of several controls is necessary to suit the implement and field conditions. The draft loading wheel (1), determines implement depth by setting a required force on the draft sensing pins Set the wheel to the mid-position prior to commencing work.
92 The position of the draft sensitivity knob (1), determines the sensitivity of the system. Set the knob to the mid-position before entering the field.
93 Drive the tractor into the field and lower the implement into work by rotating the Position Control knob (2), anti--clockwise. Use the Position Control to set the maximum depth and so prevent ‘diving’ when areas of light soil are encountered. Set the required implement working depth by rotating the draft loading wheel (3). Without moving the Position Control, rotate the adjustable stop (1) until it ’clicks’ and the pointer aligns with the index mark on the Position Control knob. If the Position Control is now moved, it can be quickly returned to the original position by rotating until it is felt to ’click’ and the pointer re--aligns with the adjustable stop.
3--62
94
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Observe the implement as it pulls through the soil and adjust the draft sensitivity knob (1), until the tendency to raise or lower, due to variations in soil resistance, is satisfactory. Once set, the tractor hydraulic system will automatically adjust implement depth to maintain an even pull (draft load) on the tractor. The optimum setting will be achieved by observing the movement indicator lights (2) and (3). The upper light (2) will illuminate every time the system raises the implement as normal draft corrections occur. The lower light (3) will illuminate as the implement lowers. 95 Turn the draft sensitivity knob (1) slowly clockwise. The system will respond with smaller, quicker movements as will be seen by both the indicator lights flickering. At this point, turn the knob slightly anti-clockwise until either of the indicator lights flashes once every 2 or 3 seconds or, as required, to suit the soil conditions. Once the required working conditions have been established there is no need to move the position control knob again until the work in hand is completed. 96 Upon reaching the headland, momentarily depress the top of the raise/lower switch (3) to quickly lift the implement to the position set by the height limit control knob. When re-entering the working area, momentarily depress the lower part of the switch and the implement will descend at the rate set by the drop rate control knob and stop when it reaches the depth set by the draft loading wheel (2). During the raise cycle, momentarily depressing the top of the raise/lower switch will pause implement lift. Depress the top of the switch again to resume the cycle. Depressing the lower part of the switch during the lowering cycle will pause implement drop.
97
3--63
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Faster implement penetration may be required, for example, after turning at a narrow headland. Also, some implements are reluctant to penetrate, particularly if the ground is heavy. Press and hold the bottom of the raise/lower switch (4) and the implement will lower at the rate set by the drop rate control knob, until it contacts the ground. The drop rate and the Position Control settings will then be overridden and the implement will quickly penetrate the ground, rising to the preset working depth when the switch is released. Alternatively, the adjustable stop (1) may be used to set the implement depth. When the required implement depth has been established, rotate the adjustable stop until a ’click’ is felt and the pointer aligns with the index mark on the Position Control knob (2). Whenever the implement is raised, using the Position Control, it will always return to the same working depth when the control knob is rotated and ’clicked’ into alignment with the adjustable stop.
98
The slip limit control knob (1), available only with the optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to select a wheel slip threshold, above which the implement will raise until wheel slip returns to the preset level. The system overrides the normal Draft and Position Control sensing signals of the hydraulics so care must be taken not to select too low or too high a slip limit. Setting the slip limit to a very low level, unobtainable in wet conditions, may have a detrimental effect on the work rate/depth.
99 The slip limit ‘on’ indicator (2) will illuminate when slip control is activated and the implement is raising to restore the selected slip rate. The knob is detented at the ‘off’ position (knob fully clockwise).
100
3--64
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS POSITION CONTROL OPERATION To operate in Position Control, the draft loading wheel (3) should, ideally, be rotated fully forward to position 10. Use the Position Control knob (2) to raise and lower the 3--point hitch. The implement will raise and stop at the height set by the height limit control knob. NOTE: The rate of lift will be adjusted automatically. If a large movement of the position control knob is made then the lower links will respond by moving rapidly. As the links approach the position set by the Position Control knob, implement movement will be slower.
101
When the implement is set at the required working height, rotate the adjustable stop (1) until a ’click’ is felt and the pointer aligns with the index mark on the Position Control knob (2). Whenever the implement height is changed, using the Position Control knob, it can be quickly returned to the same setting by rotating the Position Control knob until it is felt to ’click’ into alignment with the adjustable stop. If it is required to raise the implement at the headland, momentarily depress the top of the raise/lower switch (4), to lift the implement to the position set by the height limit control knob. When re-entering the work area, momentarily depress the lower part of the switch and the implement will return to the height originally set by the Position Control knob (2).
3--65
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TRANSPORT LOCK When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch, turn the drop rate control knob (2), fully anti-clockwise to the transport lock position (padlock symbol). This will prevent the implement from accidentally lowering and damaging the road surface. RIDE CONTROL When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch, implement bounce can lead to lack of steering control at transport speeds. With Ride Control selected, when the front wheels hit a bump, causing the front of the tractor to rise, the hydraulic system will immediately react to counter the movement and minimise implement bounce to provide a smoother ride. To engage Ride Control, turn the draft sensitivity knob (1), fully anti-clockwise. Using the raise/lower switch (4) Figure 103, raise the implement to the height set by the height limit control (3).
102
Turn the drop rate control knob (2) fully anti-clockwise to the transport lock position (padlock symbol). Ride Control will only operate at speeds above 8 kph (5 MPH). When tractor speed exceeds 8 K/mh (5 MPH), the implement will drop by 4 -- 5 points (as displayed on the instrument panel) as the hydraulic system makes corrections to counteract implement bounce. When tractor speed falls below 8 K/mh (5 MPH) the implement will raise again to the height set by the height limit control and Ride Control will become inoperative. 103
3--66
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS EXTERNAL 3--POINT HITCH CONTROLS (where fitted) Two external switches (1) are provided on each rear fender assembly. Depress the upper switch to raise the 3--point hitch, depressing the lower switch will cause the hitch to drop.
WARNING
Do not stand on or near the implement or between the implement and tractor when operating the external 3--point hitch controls. Before leaving the tractor to operate the external controls: •
Move all transmission controls to neutral.
•
Disengage the PTO
•
Apply the parking brake.
104
With the engine running, move the hand throttle lever to the low idle position (fully rearwards).
WARNING
Before using the external 3--point hitch controls, ensure that no person or object is in the area of the implement or 3-point hitch. Never operate the external controls while standing: •
Directly behind the tractor or tyres.
•
Between the lower links.
•
On or near the implement.
WARNING
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any object into the area near the 3-point hitch or implement while operating the external controls. 105
3--67
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Never have an assistant working the opposite set of controls. When moving to the opposite set of controls, move around the tractor or implement. Do not cross between the implement and tractor. The operator must only activate the external switches while standing to the side of the tractor (outboard of the rear tyres). Pressing the upper switch (1) will cause the hitch to raise slowly. Pressing the lower switch will cause the hitch to lower. When the lower links align with the implement, release the switch and attach the implement to the 3-point hitch in the normal way. To transfer control of the hydraulic power lift back to the lift control lever, move the lift control lever fully rearwards and push forward again, more slowly. The ‘hitch enabled’ symbol will display in the instrument panel, indicating that the 3-point hitch is in phase with the lift control lever (see page 3--60). IMPORTANT: When control of the 3-point hitch is transferred back to the lift control, an attached implement may raise fully and damage the rear of the cab. Operator’s should be aware of this and take appropriate action to stop raising before full lift height is reached. Adjust the height limit control knob as described under Position Control Operation.
3--68
106
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS LOAD-SENSING REMOTE CONTROL VALVES (where fitted) Description The remote control valves described here are of the load-sensing type. By automatically sensing oil demand from the implement, load sensing valves continually adjust the oil flow from the tractor to suit implement requirements. Connect to the lower port for Raise (R) and the upper port for Lower (L). The valves are used to operate external hydraulic cylinders, motors etc. Up to four remote control valves may be installed and are located at the rear of the tractor. All remote valves incorporate an automatic lock valve in the lower (raise) port to prevent inadvertent leak down of the implement.
107
The valves are operated by levers which are located in the console to the right of the operator’s seat. The levers and their respective valves are numbered for identification, as follows: Lever number
Valve Position
Control lever 1
Right--hand outer
Control lever 2
Right--hand inner
Control lever 3
Left--hand inner
Control lever 4
Left--hand outer
Each remote control valve lever has four operating positions, as follows:
108
1. Raise (R) -- Pull a lever rearward to extend the cylinder to which it is connected and raise the implement. 2. Neutral (N) -- Push the lever forward from the raise position to select neutral and de-activate the connected cylinder. 3. Lower (L) -- Push the lever further forward, past neutral, to retract the cylinder and lower the implement. 4. Float (F) -- Push the lever fully forward, beyond the ‘lower’ position, to select ‘float’. This will permit the cylinder to extend or retract freely, thereby allowing equipment such as scraper blades to ‘float’ or follow the ground contour. Each position is identified by a symbol on the decal adjacent to the control lever.
3--69
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Configurable Detent Operation (where fitted) Your tractor may be fitted with load sensing remote valves having configurable detents. The rotary control (1), is used to select one of five detent settings. To select a setting, rotate the control until the number (1), on the end cap, aligns with the mark (2), on the valve body. NOTE: If the number on the rotary control is not aligned correcty with the reference mark on the valve body, the performance of the valve may be affected.
109
Before turning the selector, ensure any residual pressure in the hydraulic system is exhausted. To do this, stop the tractor engine, cycle the remote valve lever through all positions and then place the lever in neutral. Each position offers the follwing functions: I.
Raise (R), Neutral (N), Lower (L) and Float (F) positions available. Detent position in Float only. No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).
*To select position 5, place the remote valve lever in neutral, select position I or IV then move the lever to the Float position. With the lever in Float select position V.
II. Raise, Neutral and Lower positions only. No Float facility. No detent positions available. No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).
To de--select position V, put the remote valve lever into float, turn the selector control to position I or IV and then move the remote valve lever to neutral. It is now possible to select positions I, II, III and IV.
III. Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions available. Detents in Raise, Lower and Float. Lever auto return to neutral (kick out) in Raise and Lower positions.
IMPORTANT: To prevent inadvertent movement of attached equipment when starting the tractor engine, ensure the remote valve levers are in the correct position before operating the key--start switch:
IV. Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions available. Detents in Raise, Lower and Float. No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).
V. *Raise and Float positions available.
Detents in Raise and Float. No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).
3--70
With the selector in positions I to IV -- Neutral With the selector in position V -- Float
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Connecting Remote Cylinders Each remote control valve has a pair of 1/2 in. quick-disconnect, female couplers (1) and (2). The couplers are of a self--sealing/locking design but will allow remote cylinder hoses to pull free if the implement should become disconnected from the tractor. The lower coupler (2) of each pair is for the feed hose, the upper coupler (1) is for the return hose. The couplers referred to in this picture are for remote control valve No. 1.
110 Hinged, spring-loaded dust caps are provided on each coupler. To connect a remote cylinder, lift the dust cap (1) and insert the feed and/or return hose into the coupler, ensuring that it is correctly seated. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the hose(s) to allow the tractor/implement to turn in either direction. To disconnect, grip the hose a short distance from the coupler, push the hose forward, into the coupler, then quickly pull on the hose to ‘pop’ the coupler free. Operating Notes A detent will hold the lever in the selected extend or retract position until the remote cylinder reaches the end of the stroke when the control lever will automatically return to neutral. Alternatively, the lever may be returned to neutral manually. The lever will not return automatically from the float position.
111
NOTE: Do not hold the lever in the extend or retract position once the remote cylinder has reached the end of the stroke as this will cause the system to operate at maximum pressure. Over an extended period, this could overheat the oil and may lead to failure of hydraulic and driveline components.
WARNING
Operating loaders with detented valves may result in uncontrolled movement, resulting in spillage of material from the bucket or objects rolling down the loader arms onto the operator. If required, your authorised dealer can convert the control valve to operate without the detent feature.
3--71
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Each remote control valve has its own flow control valve (1) which permits individual flow control when operating two or more valves simultaneously. Turn the flow control knob anti-clockwise to increase the rate of oil flow. Turn the knob clockwise to decrease the rate of flow. For flow rates, see Section 8 -- Specifications.
112
Connecting and Operating Double-Acting Cylinders Connect the feed hose (1) from a double-acting cylinder to the lower coupler (3) on the remote control valve. Connect the return hose (2) to the upper coupler (4) on the same valve.
113
To extend a double-acting cylinder, pull the control lever rearwards, to the ‘raise’ position. To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control lever forward, past neutral to the ‘lower’ position. Further forward movement of the lever will select ‘float’ which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract freely. This feature is of material assistance when carrying out work with equipment such as scraper blades and loaders.
114
3--72
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Connecting and Operating Single-Acting Cylinders Connect the hose (1) from a single-acting cylinder to the lower coupler (2) on the remote control valve, as previously described.
115 To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control lever rearwards, to the ‘raise’ position. Manually return the lever to the neutral position to stop the cylinder before it is fully extended or allow the valve to return to the neutral automatically when the cylinder reaches the end of it’s stroke. To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever fully forward, to the ‘float’ position. IMPORTANT: Always use the ‘float’ position to lower a single-acting cylinder. The ‘lower’ position is for double-acting cylinders only.
116
Connecting and Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic Equipment Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g. hydraulic motors) should be connected to the remote control valve coupler with the feed hose (1) connected to the upper coupler (4) and the return hose (2) connected to the lower coupler (3) of the same valve.
117
3--73
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS With the remote control valve lever fully forward, in the ‘float’ position the motor will be stationary. The hydraulic motor will operate if the lever is moved to the ‘lower’ position. IMPORTANT: To stop the motor, move the lever or joystick to the ‘float’ position. The motor will then slow pressures which, unless relieved by special valves, could damage the motor seals. Observe the following to further protect the tractor and equipment: •
•
•
Do not open any by-pass valve in the equipment or motor. Use the flow control valve to control the rate of flow or speed of the motor. To assure optimum hydraulic oil cooling and prevent overheating, operate continuous flow equipment at the highest flow setting (by use of the flow control valve) and lowest engine speed that will give the required machine performance and speed. It is recommended that a temperature gauge, where available, is installed in the remote circuit when using hydraulic motors for continuous operation. If over-heating occurs, stop the hydraulic motor until the oil cools. Ensure the flow control setting is at maximum and the engine speed at a minimum, appropriate to machine performance. If operating conditions are normal and high temperatures persist, install an oil cooler in the motor return circuit. The maximum recommended operating temperature of the oil is 110°C (230°F).
Your dealer can supply a suitable oil cooler and the necessary fittings or make the installation for you.
3--74
118 Operating Several Remote Valves Simultaneously or Remote Valves and 3--Point Lift Simultaneously If operating two or more remote control valves simultaneously or remote valves and 3--point lift, all the flow control valves should be adjusted to provide a partial flow. If not so adjusted, all the available flow may be directed to the full flow circuit when the pressure in that circuit is less than that of the other circuits in use. Bleeding Remote Cylinders When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air. With the hoses connected to the remote control valve couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the remote control valve operating lever. Check the rear axle oil level before and after operating a remote cylinder.
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS ELECTRONIC REMOTE VALVES (where fitted) NOTE: Electronic remote valves are only available in conjunction with the Enhanced keypad. The electronic remote valves (EHR) provide similar functions to the mechanical valves previously described. However, the electronic remote valves have a number of additional automated features which are supported by visual displays in the Dot Matrix screen. Transport Lock The remote valves cannot be operated unless the system is energised using the transport lock switch (1). Depress the bottom of the switch to energise the remote valve electrical circuit, depress the top of the switch to disable the circuit. When the transport lock is engaged (power off), the amber warning light on the remote valve lever console will illuminate and the valve(s) will be disabled. To prevent inadvertent movement of the implement when travelling between fields or on the highway, it is recommended that EHR functions are disabled.
119
IMPORTANT:The transport switch may also be used to quickly stop operation of the rear remote valves. Depress the top of the switch to isolate remote valve operation, this has no effect on three--point hitch operation. Control Lever Operation At key--on all remote valves, levers and the joystick (where fitted) must be in the neutral position. Any control not in neutral will cause the corresponding valve to be disabled, manually shift the control to neutral to reactivate the valve. If, during operation, a remote valve becomes stuck in one position then the entire system will be disabled until the fault is rectified or the valve electronically disconnected from the system. Consult your authorised dealer. Each remote valve lever has four positions, Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float. In Raise and Lower modes, the detented positions are used for timed remote valve functions.
3--75
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Pull the lever back from the neutral position, (N), to the Raise position, (R). From neutral, push forward to the (Lower) position, (L). Push the lever fully forward to the Float position, (F). Float will permit a hydraulic cylinder to extend or retract freely, allowing equipment such as scraper blades to “float” or follow the ground contour. The “float” position is also used for retracting a single-acting cylinder and is the OFF position for operating hydraulic motors.
CAUTION
Electronic Remote Control Valves have detented lever positions. It is not recommended this type of control valve be used for front loader operation. Consult your authorised dealer.
120
IMPORTANT: In the unlikely event that a remote valve ceases to operate or respond correctly to lever movements, the system will require the attention of your authorised dealer. Each control lever is equipped with an adjustable ’gate’ which is used to select or lock--out individual remote valve functions. Detents on the lever (1) will lock the ’gate’ in one of five positions. I *. Neutral and Raise locked out (Motor Mode): Lower and Float functional. Move the lever into float before selecting this position. II. Raise detent locked out: Neutral, Lower and Float functions operative. III. All valve functions are operative. IV. Float locked out: Raise, Neutral and Lower functional. V. Lever locked in Neutral: No valve functions are available.
* Integral to each lever is a switch that is activated
when the ’gate’ is set to Motor Mode (I). Should a system error occur to disable the remote valve it will always default to the Float position (motor stops).
3--76
121
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Electronic Joystick Operation (where fitted) NOTE: At key--off, the joystick function is de--activated. To activate the joystick the operator must be in the seat with the engine running for more than five seconds. The optional electronic joystick can be used to control either mid mount or rear mounted electronic remote valves (EHR’s). A selector switch on the cab ’C’ pillar allows joystick control to be switched between mid--mount (1) and rear mounted valves (2).
122
NOTE: When using the joystick to control the rear electronic remote valves, timer mode and hydraulic motor mode are not available. NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat, joystick operation will be de--activated. When the operator is re--seated, joystick operation will be re--activated after two seconds. To transfer control of the rear remote valves from lever to joystick, depress the bottom of the selector switch on the cab ’C’ pillar. The mid--mount indicator lamp (3) will go out and the rear valve indicator lamp (2) will flash for five seconds. When the lamp stops flashing and remains on, operation of the rear remote valves can be controlled by the joystick. NOTE: Operation of the rear electronic remote valves will always default to lever control at key--off.
123
3--77
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS When the joystick has been activated, the switch (1) is then used to select operation of remote valves 3 and 4 (where fitted). When operated by the joystick each remote valve offers the following features: Remote valve 1: Move the joystick forwards or backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float. Remote Valve 2: Move the joystick left or right to operate Raise, Neutral and Lower. 124 Remote valve 3: Depress and hold the switch (1) and move the joystick forwards or backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float. Remote Valve4: Depress and hold the switch (1) and move the joystick left or right to operate Raise, Neutral and Lower. Move the joystick rearwards (R) to extend a hydraulic cylinder. Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L) will retract the cylinder. Further forward movement of the joystick will select ‘float’ (F) which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract freely. NOTE: Always use the ’float’ position to lower a single--acting cylinder. The ’lower’ position is for double--acting cylinders only.
3--78
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS The joystick may also be moved laterally, (R) and (L), to extend or retract a cylinder. By moving the joystick diagonally, two cylinders may be operated simultaneously. NOTE: With the joystick operating the rear electronic remote valves, the float (F) position for valves 2 and 4 (lateral movement of the joystick) are not available. To switch control of the rear valves back to the levers, depress the top of the selector switch, the rear indicator lamp will go out and the mid--mount indicator lamp will start to flash. After two seconds the mid--mount lamp will stay on confirming joystick operation has now been switched back to the mid--mount valves (where fitted).
125
Operation of the rear remote valves is now transferred to lever control. Visual Displays Depress the remote valve key on the keypad and the following information will be displayed in the DMD for each valve: 1. Momentary oil flow from the valve. The shaded area represents the percentage of oil flow, this will change as the flow increases or decreases. 2. Maximum flow rate (%) as set by the operator. The extend/retract directional arrows represent the maximum flow setting. 126 3. Number of the remote valve in operation. 4. Direction of cylinder movement, extend (Raise) or retract (Lower). The direction of cylinder travel is identified by the arrow.
3--79
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Setting the Maximum Flow Rate The maximum flow rate for each remote valve can be set using the menu keys on the Enhanced keypad. To adjust the remote valve flow rate, the key--start must be switched ON. Using the remote valve key (1), select the appropriate valve (1, 2, 3, or 4).
127 With the selected valve number displayed in the DMD, Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys (1 and 2), to increase or decrease the maximum flow rate of the selected valve. The flow rate will be stored in the tractor control module until re--programmed, turning the key--start off will not erase the setting. NOTE: The remote valve flow rate setting (1), Figure 129, will apply to both extend and retract movements of the cylinder. IMPORTANT: During remote valve set--up, a pause of more than two seconds in key operation will exit set--up and return to the previous setting, re--enter set--up mode again to continue.
128
129
3--80
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Additional Displays As each of the electronic remote valve functions are selected, a corresponding visual display will appear in the Dot Matrix Screen. NOTE: The following illustrations relate to remote valve number 1, see page 3--79 for details on remote valve numbering.
Number 1 remote valve lever in NEUTRAL position.
Number 1 remote valve operating at maximum flow set by the operator. Illustration shows cylinder operating in RETRACT mode.
Number 1 remote valve lever in FLOAT position.
Motor mode selected on remote valve number 1. RETRACT and FLOAT positions only available.
Electronic remote valve system switched OFF. All remote valve functions de--activated.
3--81
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Manual and Programmed Lever Operation The Enhanced keypad is used to select and programme the timed functions for each of the electronic remote valves. As each remote valve is selected using the remote valve key (1), a visual display of the valve functions will appear in the Dot Matrix screen. Depress the key once to activate the remote valve display in the DMD. Repeated operation of the key will cycle through each valve display individually. 130 Manual Operation When used in manual mode, without the timer function, the electronic remote valves will operate in a similar way to the mechanical valves previously described. IMPORTANT:Care must be taken when operating in the manual mode that the remote valve lever is not left in the detented extend or retract positions when using remote cylinders. When the cylinder has reached the end of its stroke the control lever must be returned to the neutral position manually. Failure to observe this procedure will overheat the oil and may lead to failure of hydraulic or driveline components. IMPORTANT: Never use the neutral position from the extend or retract position to stop a hydraulic motor. Sudden hydraulic lock up of the system may cause extensive damage to the motor. In manual mode, oil flow through each valve is adjusted using the flow rate setting as previously described.
3--82
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Timed Programme Operation Timed programme operation is provided primarily for operation of hydraulic cylinders. This feature allows the operator to programme a time delay between when the control levers are activated and when the oil flow to the implement is stopped. To operate the electronic remote valves in programmed mode, depress the appropriate side of timer control switch (2) as shown. When the switch is depressed, the green light (1) adjacent to the remote valve lever will start to flash. The system is now in standby mode ready to accept a programme sequence. The light will continue to flash for ten seconds allowing the operator sufficient time to begin the programming sequence. If a programme is not started within this period, the system will automatically de--activate, depress the timer control switch again to re--start the sequence.
131
Programming a Double Acting Service To programme the remote valves, first ensure the cylinder hydraulic hoses are properly connected to the appropriate rear remote valve. Start the tractor engine and set at the normal operating speed in which the cylinder is to be operated. This is important as the programming of the control levers is based on a time interval corresponding to the time it takes the cylinder rod to extend and retract. Any change in engine rpm. will have an effect on hydraulic flow and therefore the time taken for the cylinder to extend and retract. The timed period for control lever operation remains the same regardless of oil flow, therefore consistent operation is required for the system to function correctly. Using the corresponding timer switch (2) depress the switch so the light begins to flash. While the light is flashing move control lever (1) to extend the cylinder (R). At this point the light ceases to flash and will remain on. Hold the lever until the cylinder is extended to the desired position and then return the lever to the neutral position. When the lever is returned to the neutral position the programming light will begin to flash again indicating the retract phase of the cycle should now be programmed.
132
3--83
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Operate the control lever (1) to retract the cylinder (L), and the programming light will cease to flash and remain on. Hold the lever until the cylinder has completed the retract cycle and then return to the neutral position. After the second phase has been programmed the light will remain on. After the second phase has been completed and the lever has been returned to neutral, the programme will be automatically stored. Repeat the above sequence to programme the remaining control levers if required. 133 Programming of the control lever can be performed in either sequence, extend/retract, retract/extend or for one movement only, extend or retract. The maximum allowable time span for any timed operation is 30 seconds. NOTE: Turning the key--start switch OFF will erase the programme. Programming a Single Acting Service To programme a single acting service carry out the same set--up procedure as previously described for a double acting service. With the programme light flashing, move the remote valve lever from neutral to the extend position (R). When the cylinder has extended to the desired position, manually return the lever to the neutral position. To store the setting, depress the timer switch. In single acting mode the sequence will NOT be automatically stored. A single acting service can be programmed to operate in either extend or retract modes. NOTE: When using a timed sequence for a single acting service i.e. programmed in extend mode only, the retract mode will not function until the programme sequence has been deleted. If the control lever is moved to the float position no timed programme is possible and the control lever must be returned to neutral manually.
3--84
134
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Setting Remote Valve Priority A remote valve with oil flow priority will always take precedence over other remote valves for hydraulic oil flow. Irrespective of flow demand by the other valves, the priority valve will always maintain a constant output. For implements requiring multiple remote valve services, there may be a need for one of the valves to have oil flow priority, i.e. to provide oil flow for a hydraulic motor. With electronic remote valves, the operator can select one remote valve as the priority valve. •
135
With the key--start in the ON position, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key (4) Figure 135, until the central LCD display reads Ehrx (where ’x’ is the current priority valve number).
NOTE: If a dash (- ) appears in the display, the remote valves are not prioritised. •
After a few seconds the LCD display will change to read PEhr.
•
Momentarily depress the EHR remote valve key (1) Figure 136, to select the valve required for prioritisation. Depressing the key repeatedly will scroll through the valve numbers.
•
136
When the desired valve number is shown in the display, depress the Exit/Cancel key (2) Figure 135, to exit set--up and return to the previous display. The valve priority setting is now memorised.
3--85
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Replaying a Timed Programme The timed sequence begins as soon as the lever is placed in the extend or retract detent position. On reaching the end of the timed period, oil flowing through the remote valve will be halted, the remote valve lever should now be returned to the neutral position ready for the next operation. Throughout the replay sequence, the green warning light will remain illuminated. Deleting Programmes To delete a programme, depress the programme switch to de--activate timer operation. The light will extinguish and the memorised sequence will be cleared from the programme in the memory. Recalling a Stored Programme With the key--start on and all remote valve levers in neutral, hold down the timer switch for the EHR required. Keep the timer switch depressed until the light ceases to flash, the previously stored timer sequence is now re--activated. IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic programme settings made during tractor operation are transferred from the operating memory to the main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay before turning the key on again.
3--86
Relieving System Pressure
WARNING Before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hoses at the remote cylinders, relieve the pressure in the circuit by first starting the engine and then move the control levers fully forward to the “float� position. Then stop the engine. Make sure no one will be injured by moving equipment when relieving pressure in the system. Before disconnecting cylinders or equipment, make sure the equipment or implement is supported securely. Never work under equipment supported by a hydraulic device because it may drop if the control is actuated (even with the engine stopped) or in the event of hose failure, etc. always use a secure support for equipment which must be serviced while in the raised position. Make sure that oil contained within the remote cylinders is clean and is of the correct grade. Operating with Headland Management Control (where fitted) IMPORTANT: When including electro hydraulic remote valve operation in a Headland Management Control, it is important to allow sufficient time for the movement of the control lever to be recorded as it passes through each position (R,N,L,F or vice versa). Pausing the lever in each position for approximately 1/2 second will provide sufficient time for the step to be recorded accurately. Moving the lever too quickly may confuse data transfer causing the implement to respond incorrectly on playback.
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Connecting Single-Acting Cylinders Connect the hose from a single-acting cylinder to the lower coupler on the remote control valve, as previously described. To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control lever back to the extend position (R). Manually return the lever to the neutral position to stop the cylinder when it has reached the desired position. To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever fully forward to the float (F) position.
137
NOTE: In single acting timer mode the remote lever will lock in the extend position and will not automatically return to the neutral position. IMPORTANT: Always use the “float” position to lower a single-acting cylinder. The “retract” position is for double-acting cylinders only. Connecting Double-Acting Cylinders Connect the feed hose (1) from a double-acting cylinder to the lower coupler (3) on the remote control valve. Connect the return hose (2) to the upper coupler (4) on the same valve. To extend a double-acting cylinder, pull the control lever rearwards, to the ‘raise’ position. To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control lever forward, past neutral to the ‘lower’ position. Further forward movement of the lever will select ‘float’ which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract freely. This feature is of material assistance when carrying out work with equipment such as scraper blades and loaders.
138
3--87
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic Equipment Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g. hydraulic motors) should be connected to the remote control valve coupler with the feed hose (1) connected to the upper coupler (4) and the return hose (2) connected to the lower coupler (3) of the same valve. Alternatively, the return hose may connected to the low pressure return circuit (see page 3--91, ’Return Oil Line’). The oil flow should be adjusted to regulate the motor speed. If the flow is too high, the 3-point hitch and other remote valves may slow down or stop. Controlling the flow in this way will ensure that the hydraulic system will only supply the oil required by the motor.
139
With the remote control valve lever fully forward in the float (F) position, the motor will be stationary. The hydraulic motor will operate if the lever is pulled back to the retract position (Lower). To stop the motor, move the lever from the lower position to the float position. In the float position the motor will be able to stop slowly, which will not damage the motor. IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flow equipment, the remote control valve lever must not be moved rearward to the neutral (N) or raise (R) positions as damage to the equipment may result. Select position 1 on the rolling gate to lock out the neutral and extend services (see page 3--76) Observe the following to further protect the tractor and equipment. •
•
Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment or motor. Adjust the oil flow through the valve to regulate the rate of flow or speed of the motor. To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operate continuous flow equipment at the highest flow setting and lowest engine speed that will give the required machine performance and speed.
3--88
140
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Operating Several Remote Valves Simultaneously or Remote Valves and Hydraulic Lift Simultaneously If operating two or more remote control valves simultaneously or remote valves and the hydraulic lift, the flow through the valves should be adjusted using the enhanced keypad to provide a partial flow, as previously described in Setting the Maximum Flow Rate. If not so adjusted, all the available flow may be directed to the full flow circuit when the pressure in that circuit is less than that of the other circuits in use. NOTE: For equipment using more than one remote valve, the hydraulic service with the highest priority should be connected to the valve that has been set to provide oil flow priority, see page 3--85.
141
Bleeding Remote Cylinders When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air. With the hoses connected to the remote control valve couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the remote control valve operating lever. Check the rear axle oil level before and after operating a remote cylinder.
3--89
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS CONTINUOUS OIL SUPPLY FOR REMOTE SERVICES (where fitted) For implements or attachments requiring continuous or high oil flow from the tractor hydraulic system, provision is made to connect directly into the main hydraulic circuit at the rear of the tractor. To operate correctly the implement must be fitted with a closed centre hydraulic valve system that will, through a sensing line, control oil flow from the main tractor hydraulic pump. IMPORTANT: To ensure correct operation of the system, the implement control valve, when in neutral, must be capable of directing the pressure from the load sensing line back to sump through the return oil line. IMPORTANT: Before attempting to remove any blanking plugs or attach pipework, ensure the areas around the plugs and pipe connections are thoroughly clean to prevent contamination of the tractor hydraulic system. NOTE: Ensure the hoses have a suitable capacity to accommodate the required oil flow, and that both the sensing line and hoses are sufficiently long enough to allow for implement movement or articulation when in work. Power Beyond Ports P -- Pressure Line (1) To connect the implement pressure line, remove the plug (1) from the external services ’power beyond’ port on top of the remote valve manifold. Using a suitable connector, M22 x 1.5/15.5 (ISO 6149), attach the implement supply line to this port. With the implement control valve in neutral, a low standby pressure of 21 to 24 bar (305 to 348 lbf. in.) will be maintained in the pressure line connected to this port. 142
3--90
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS LS -- Load Sensing Line (2) Connect the sensing line from the M12 x 1.5/11.5 (ISO 6149) port (2), to the implement control valve. It is the sensing line which generates and controls the oil pressure and flow from the tractor hydraulic pump. When an implement control valve is operated, the low standby pressure from port ’P’, is diverted down the sensing line to ’switch on’ the tractor hydraulic pump. In operation, the load sensing line constantly monitors pressure and flow to ensure supply never exceeds demand. NOTE: Tractors with solenoid operated hydraulic top link and right hand lift rod will have a ’T’ piece in port (2). Remove the cap from the ’T’ piece and connect the sensing line in place of the cap. Use a 9/16 --18, ’O’ ring face seal fitting which complies to standards ISO 8434--3 or SAE J1453. Do not overtighten the connector.
143
R -- Return Oil Line (3) The return oil line from the implement control valves should be connected to the M27 x 2/19 (ISO 6149) port (3). This will permit the oil to return directly back into the tractor hydraulic system. ISO Power Beyond Couplings The ISO coupling consists of three ports. 1. Return oil line. Coupling size: 25 Port size: M30 x 2/19 2. Oil supply (pressure) port. Coupling size: 19 Port size: M27 x 2/19 3. Load sensing port. Coupling size: 6.3 Port size: M14 x 1.5/11.5
144
The maximum flow available through the ISO pressure port will depend on the output from the tractor hydraulic pump. Full flow will be available from a 120 litre pump assuming there are no other hydraulic demands on the system. With the high capacity pump, up to 140 litre/min is available. IMPORTANT: Always relieve hydraulic pressure in remote cylinders before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hoses.
3--91
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using Remote Hydraulic Equipment When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark on the dipstick with the tractor parked on level ground and the three--point hitch in the fully raised position. However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to the remote control valves it should be remembered that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and could seriously lower the oil level. Operating the tractor with a low oil level may result in damage to the rear axle and transmission components. NOTE: Before connecting remote cylinders, stop the engine and thoroughly clean the connections to prevent oil contamination. With the rear axle oil level up to the full mark on the dipstick, the following maximum oil volumes may be taken from the rear axle to power auxiliary equipment without the need to further top up the system: Operating stationary equipment on level ground
21 litres 22.1 U.S. qts.
Operating while driving in normal conditions (flat fields) for short periods only
15 litres 15.8 U.S. qts.
Operating in other conditions, including longer periods of use
9 litres 9.5 U.S. qts.
Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may be added to the rear axle above the normal FULL level is 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts.). With this quantity added to the rear axle, the quantities stated above may be increased by the same amount, 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts.), but no more.
3--92
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid or diesel oil escaping under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. •
Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
•
Stop the engine and relieve pressure before connecting or disconnecting lines by moving the remote control valve lever(s) fully forward to the ‘float’ position then back to neutral.
•
Tighten all connections before starting the engine or pressurising lines.
If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical attention immediately or gangrene may result.
WARNING
Never work under or allow anyone near raised equipment as it will drop when relieving pressure in the system or in the event of hose failure, etc. Before disconnecting cylinders or equipment ensure the equipment or implement is supported securely. Always use a secure support for equipment which must be serviced while in the raised position.
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS THREE-POINT HITCH NOTE: Before attaching equipment read the following text, carefully. Description The 3-point hitch enables semi-mounted and fully mounted implements to be connected to the tractor, operated and controlled by the tractor hydraulic system. Flexible or Quick Hitch link ends (3) are available to aid implement connection. The lower links are raised and lowered by means of the lift rods (2) connected to the lift arms. The lift rods may be readily adjusted to aid proper alignment of the implement to the tractor.
145
The top link (1) is connected to a bracket on the rear axle centre housing. The rear of the top link should be connected to the upper hitch pin of a mounted implement. The top link is also adjustable to aid implement alignment.
ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENT NOTE: Before attaching equipment, adjust lift rods and select the correct top link hole for the implement and work to be carried out. Ensure that the telescopic stabilisers or sway blocks are installed and correctly adjusted. Remove the swinging drawbar, if close-mounted equipment is being attached. IMPORTANT: Always select Position Control or set the draft loading wheel to position 10 when attaching equipment, transporting equipment, when no equipment is attached or at any time when not operating in Draft Control. NOTE: See also ‘External Power Lift Control’ on page 3--67 for more details.
3--93
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Most equipment can be attached to your tractor as follows: 1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitch points are level with and slightly ahead of the implement hitch pins. 2. Attach the implement to the lower links, as described in ‘Flexible Link Ends’ on page 3--98 or ’Quick Hitch’ on page 3--99.
CAUTION
Engage the parking brake before leaving the tractor to make the connections. It is essential to have the engine running to operate the external fender-mounted switches when making lower link connections. If your tractor does not have these switches or when making other connections, stop the engine.
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance between the implement and the tractor. Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust steering stops (four wheel drive only), sway blocks or stabilisers. IMPLEMENT TO CAB CLEARANCE
CAUTION
Some mounted and semi-mounted equipment may interfere with or damage the cab. You may be injured by broken glass or the cab ROPS may be damaged if equipment interferes with the cab. To prevent cab damage, proceed as follows:
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating equipment, ensure that the flexible link ends (where fitted) are locked in the operating position. 3. With the engine stopped and parking brake engaged, adjust the top link until the implement mast pin can be inserted through the mast and top link. Ensure sufficient thread remains in the adjuster tube to prevent the threaded ends from pulling out under load. 4. Connect remote equipment, where applicable. 5. After attaching implement and before actual operation check that: •
No interference components.
occurs
with
•
The top link does not contact the PTO guard with the implement at its lowest position.
Attach the equipment as outlined previously.
•
Check for adequate clearance by slowly raising the equipment with the hitch lift control. If any part of the equipment comes closer than 100 mm (4 in.) to the cab, adjust the 3-point hitch height limit control knob (page 3--61) to limit upward movement.
When removing equipment, the procedure is the reverse of attaching. The following information will make disconnection easier and safer. •
Always park the equipment on a firm, level surface.
•
Support equipment so that it will not tip or fall when detached from the tractor.
•
Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remote cylinders by selecting the float position before disconnecting.
tractor
IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven equipment, check to make sure that the PTO driveline will not over-extend so as to become disengaged, bottom out or be at an excessive angle. Ensure that the driveline shield does not contact the PTO guard or drawbar. See ‘Attaching PTO--Driven Equipment’ on page 3--28.
3--94
•
When attaching mounted equipment to the three-point hitch, the following adjustments may be made to ensure satisfactory operation:
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS LIFT RODS, LOWER LINKS AND TOP LINK (mechanical adjust)
CAUTION
Before attempting to disconnect or adjust the lift rods or top link, lower attached equipment to the ground and stop the engine. Before removing any securing pins, ensure that attached equipment is correctly supported and that no residual pressure remains in the hydraulic system. Electronic Hitch Control Before stopping the engine, move the position control lever fully down to relieve any residual pressure. When adjusting lift rods, ensure that at least 40 mm (1.6 in.) of thread remains engaged in the lower end of the lift rod assembly.
Top Link Adjustment The top link has a threaded centre section (1) , which, when rotated, will shorten or lengthen the top link, as required. Lift up the spring retainer (2) to allow the centre section to rotate. To ease adjustment, lift the handle (3) and use it as a lever. Alternatively, rotating the link end (4) will permit limited adjustment of top link length. To lock the sleeve after adjustment, push the spring retainer down so that it holds the handle (3) flush against the sleeve. 146 When not in use, the top link can be removed and stored in the tractor or left in an upright position and retained by hooking the ball end of the handle (2) into the bracket (1) on the rear axle housing.
147
3--95
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Lift Rod Adjustment The lift rods are adjusted by rotating the upper part of the lift rod by means of the handle (1) on the turnbuckle. Before the turnbuckle can be rotated, it is necessary to lift the handle to disengage it from the lock (2) Figure 149, on the lower section of the lift rod. Rotate the turnbuckle to lengthen or shorten the lift rod assembly.
148 When adjustment is satisfactory, allow the turnbuckle to lower into position. Ensure that the turnbuckle is fully down and engaged with the lock to prevent unintentional rotation. Each lower link has two holes for attaching the lift rods. Attach the lift rods to the front hole (nearest the tractor) for maximum lift height. Use the rear hole for maximum lift capacity.
149 Hitch Float Remove the lower link retaining clip and lock plate (1). Withdraw the pin (2) Figure 150, from the lift rod to permit the outer lock plate to be rotated into the vertical position. Replace the pin, inner lock plate and retaining clip as shown. The hitch is now in the float position.
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or semi--mounted equipment to the 3--point hitch or when coupling trailed equipment to the drawbar or automatic pick--up hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance between the implement and the cab or rear window in any open position.
3--96
150
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TOP LINK AND RIGHT-HAND LIFT ROD (hydraulic adjust) The hydraulic adjust top link (1) is available for your tractor. This may be fitted in conjunction with a hydraulic adjust right-hand lift rod (2). Both the top link and the lift rod incorporate a double--acting ram cylinder connected into the tractor hydraulic system.
151 With Electro--Mechanical Operation To lengthen the right-hand lift rod and move the lower link downwards, pull No. 4 remote control valve lever (2) towards you. Push the lever away from you, past the neutral position to retract the cylinder and shorten the right-hand lift rod. To lengthen the top link, depress and hold in the button (1) on No. 4 remote control valve lever (2) and pull the lever towards you. Push the lever away from you, past the neutral position to retract the cylinder and shorten the top link assembly. 152 With Electronic Operation Two switches located on the cab ’C’ pillar operate the hydraulic top link and right--hand lift rod. Both switches are spring centered and will return to the neutral position when released. Depress and hold the top of the left--hand switch (1) to retract the top link, depress the bottom of the switch to extend the link. Depressing the top of the right--hand switch (2) will retract the hydraulic cylinder and raise the link arm, depress the bottom of the switch to extend the cylinder and lower the link arm.
153
Automatic check valves on the top link and lift rod cylinders will prevent them from ’creeping’.
3--97
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TOP LINK BRACKET (all models) Two holes are provided in the bracket for attachment of the top link. Insert the pin (2) through the upper hole, as shown, for maximum lift capacity and the greatest implement to cab clearance. Use the lower hole (3) for the best ground penetration and greatest implement to ground clearance (when the implement is raised). To relocate the top link, pull out the ‘R’ clip (1) and extract the securing pin. Relocate the top link and pin, as required, ensuring that the tang on the end of the securing pin handle locates in the other hole.
154
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with an automatic pick--up hitch, the pin may foul the hitch lift rods during removal. If necessary, use hydraulic power to move the hitch lift rods to permit removal of the top link securing pin. FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS (where fitted) A release ring (1) is provided on the upper surface of each link end. Pull up the ring to release the latch and slide the link end rearwards. With the link ends released, connection to the implement will be easier. The link end (4) is shown in the extended position. The link end (2) is shown in the closed (operating) position. With both link ends extended, as at (4), connect the link ends to the equipment and secure with lynch pins. Start the engine and carefully inch the tractor rearwards until the latches lock in the detent (3) on each link arm. Stop the engine and engage the parking brake. Attach the top link and adjust accordingly. IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating the equipment, make sure the flexible link ends are locked in the operating position. Remove the drawbar if it interferes with close-mounted equipment.
3--98
155
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS QUICK HITCH The Quick Hitch consists of an alternative pair of lower links (2) and an adjustable top link (1). The lower links and the top link have open claw ends that permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements without leaving the cab. The claws are equipped with self-locking latches to ensure positive retention of the tractor hitch to the implement. Cables are provided for attachment to the latches.
156 Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper hitch pin. The two plain ball-bushings (3) with their detachable guides (2) should be installed on the implement lower hitch pins.
157 Coupling Implement to Tractor Adjust the stabilisers to maintain the tractor lower links at the correct distance apart so they align with the ball-bushings installed on the implement lower hitch pins. Fully raise the top link. With the lower links fully lowered, the self-locking latches in the operating position (1), reverse the tractor until the lower link claw couplers are beneath the implement hitch pins. The combination of large claw openings and the guides on the implement ball-bushes make accurate alignment of tractor to implement unnecessary.
158
3--99
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Raise the lower links until the claw couplers engage the ball-bushes. An audible click will be heard as the self-locking latches engage the implement ball-bushes. Lower the top link claw onto the upper implement ball-bush and press down until the latch is heard to engage. Increase or decrease top link length, as necessary. The implement supports, where fitted, may now be removed or retracted and the implement supported on the 3-point hitch. Uncoupling Implement from Tractor Using the hydraulic lift control lever, fully lower the implement to the ground ensuring that it cannot fall when disconnected from the tractor. Use the implement supports (where fitted). Pull the release cable on the top link to release the claw from the implement hitch. Pull the release cable (2) on both lower links. The lever will lock in position with the latch retracted (1). This will allow the links to clear the ball-bushings on the implement lower hitch pins when the links are lowered fully. Fully lower the lower links and drive the tractor forward, clear of the implement. NOTE: Ensure the release cables do not foul wheels, or moving parts of the 3--point hitch or implement. When not in use, secure the cables to the rubber strap on the rear right-hand side of the cab frame.
3--100
159
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS LINKAGE STABILISERS
CAUTION
Never operate steerable equipment unless the telescopic stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to prevent excessive lateral movement. ROUND SECTION SCREW TYPE Telescopic stabilisers control the side to side movement (sway) of the lower links and attached equipment when in work or when being transported. This is especially important when operating on slopes or near fences, walls or ditches and with certain implements. Check your implement Operator’s Manual. Each stabiliser consists of a fabricated tube (2) with a coupling at each end. The end with the pin (4) is attached to the 3--point hitch. The screw thread (3) screws into the rear end of the tube to provide adjustment. The ball end (6) is attached to a mounting bracket (1) bolted to the outer end of the rear axle housing. This ball end is a loose, sliding fit within the tube. The pin (5) may be passed through drillings in the tube and rod, as shown, to lock the assembly as a unit. In practice, the locating pin (5) should be removed from both stabilisers and the implement attached to the 3--point hitch. To remove the pin, pull back the securing clip. When the implement is satisfactorily aligned, the tube should be rotated until the holes in the front end of the tube and the sliding ball end are aligned. The locating pin should then be passed through the holes and the securing clip replaced.
160
With the pins inserted in this manner, both stabilisers will be locked as a rigid unit and the implement will be prevented from swaying both in work or in the transport position.
3--101
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Under certain conditions or when using equipment such as ploughs etc., it may be desirable to allow the 3--point hitch (and implement) to sway from side to side. If the pin is removed from the front hole, a limited degree of sway will be permitted. The pin should be re-inserted through the rear hole, as shown at (1). The pin will act as a stop to limit the degree of sway. IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length, particularly if using the sway facility, ensure that there is no possibility of the rear tyres fouling the stabilisers or lower links. NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick--Up Hitch, ensure the stabilisers are adjusted to provide adequate clearance between the lower links and the hitch.
3--102
161
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS AUTOMATIC STABILISERS Automatic telescopic stabilisers may be fitted in place of the standard telescopic stabilisers, described previously.
WARNING
Never operate steerable equipment unless the stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to prevent excessive lateral movement. Each stabiliser consists of a telescopic tube assembly internally threaded at the rear end. The tube assembly is attached to a mounting bracket bolted to the outer ends of the rear axle housing. An externally threaded rod (3) is attached to the lower links. The threaded rod engages with the screwed thread in the tube assembly and the overall length of the assembly is determined by screwing the rod in or out, as required. An adjustable chain (4) is attached, at one end, to the rear cab support and at the other end, via a spring, to a hinged cover (1) on the telescopic part of the stabiliser. A lug (2) on the telescopic part of the stabiliser engages a notch in the cover.
162
When the chain is correctly adjusted it will be slack when the lower links are raised from the operating position, so allowing the cover to drop down over the lug on the stabiliser. When the cover is down, as shown, the stabiliser is locked at the preset length. The lower links are, therefore, retained at a set distance apart, preventing them (and attached equipment) from moving from side to side (swaying). However, when the 3--point hitch is lowered into the work position, the chain becomes taut and lifts the cover from the stabiliser allowing it to telescope freely. The stabilisers (and implement) will then sway when engaged in the ground. This feature is useful as it provides greater implement control when turning on the headlands of a field.
3--103
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Adjusting the Stabilisers In practice, the implement should be attached to the 3--point hitch with the cover (4) on both stabilisers raised, so as to allow the stabilisers to telescope freely. Lift the locking/adjusting lever (2) up over the peg (1) so that the lever is at right-angles to the stabiliser. Turn the telescopic section, by means of the lever, so that the threaded section (3) screws into or out of the stabiliser. When the length is satisfactory, i.e., the notch in the cover aligns with the lug on the stabiliser, lower the lever back down over the peg and close the cover. 163
The chain should then be adjusted, by placing the appropriate link over the attaching hook, so that the cover on the stabiliser is lifted when the implement is lowered into work. IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length to provide sideways movement, ensure that there is no possibility of the rear tyres fouling the stabilisers or lower links. NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick--Up Hitch, ensure the stabilisers are adjusted to provide adequate clearance between the lower links and the hitch. SWAY BLOCK STABILISERS Sway block stabilisers may be installed as an alternative to telescopic stabilisers and will control the side to side movement (sway) of the lower links and attached equipment when in work or when being transported. This is especially important when operating on slopes or near fences, walls or ditches and with certain implements. Check your Implement Operator’s Manual.
1
1
WARNING
Never operate steerable equipment unless the stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to prevent excessive lateral movement. Sway blocks consist of reversible blocks (1) bolted to either side of the drawbar hanger. A steel wear pad (2) bolted to the inner surface of each lower link, contacts the sway block to prevent excessive sway (lateral movement) of the lower links. The thickness of the pad (and therefore the degree of sway) is controlled by two spacer shims of 8 mm and 10 mm thickness, respectively.
3--104
164
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS The positioning of the shims relative to the pad depends upon the required width setting of the lower links (to suit the attached implement) or the degree of sway required. Shim/Wear Pad Position The left-hand side of Figure 165 shows both spacer shims (3) and (4) installed between the wear pad (2) and the lower link (1). This will increase the distance between the lower links to suit a wider implement.
1
1
The right-hand side of Figure 165 shows the 8 mm shim (4) on the outer surface of the lower link with the 10 mm shim (3) installed between the pad and the lower link. Alternatively, the shims may be omitted altogether to reduce the distance between the lower links when operating with a narrower implement. 165 Sway Block Position To allow lateral movement of the lower links (and attached equipment) in both the operating and transport positions, attach both sway blocks (1) so that the flat surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown in the right-hand side of Figure 166. When it is desirable to have sideways movement of the equipment in the operating position, but remain rigid in the transport position, remove the bolts securing the sway blocks to the drawbar hanger and relocate the sway blocks (1) so that the curved surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown in the left-hand side of Figure 166.
166
This will allow the implement to sway when the lower links are lowered into the working position but become rigid when raised. IMPORTANT: When setting the sway blocks to provide lateral movement, ensure that there is no possibility of the lower links or implement contacting the rear tyres. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance between the wear pads and the sway blocks to allow the 3-point hitch to raise and lower without the possibility of the lower links binding or becoming bent. NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick--Up Hitch, ensure the stabilisers are adjusted to provide adequate clearance between the lower links and the hitch.
3--105
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS NOTE: Before attaching trailed equipment to the tractor, read the following text carefully.
•
Do not tow equipment weighing more than twice the tractor weight.
ATTACHING/DETACHING TRAILED EQUIPMENT
•
Do not exceed 10 MPH (16 km/h) if towed equipment weighs more than the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas require brakes on towed equipment when operating on the public highway. Before travelling on public roads, make sure you comply with legal requirements.
•
Do not exceed 20 MPH (32 km/h) while towing equipment that weighs less than the tractor.
To attach the tractor to trailed equipment and implements: 1. Ensure that the implement is at draw bar height. 2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar and implement hitch to align. 3. Apply the parking brake and stop the engine. 4. Insert the hitch pin and ensure that the retainer is in the latched position. IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance between the implement and the tractor. Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust steering stops (four wheel drive only), sway blocks or stabilisers. NOTE: For implements that require hitch extensions or interfere with the tractor clevis, remove and store the clevis and hitch pin. Always use a safety chain installed between the tractor and implement hitch when transporting equipment on the highway. See page 3--110. Observe the following precautions for towing equipment not equipped with brakes:
3--106
All Drawbars
WARNING
Do not pull from the lower links with the links above the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar, pick-up hitch or lower links in the lowered position for pull-type work, otherwise the tractor may overturn rearwards. NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum static downward load or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower (see Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3). IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the highway it is recommended that a safety chain having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight of the implement be installed between the tractor and implement hitch. See Safety Chain on page 3--110. SWINGING DRAWBARS Two types of swinging drawbar are available. The sliding type is illustrated in Figure 167. This drawbar may be installed as part of a tow hitch or as an independent unit. The roller type, shown in Figure 170, is recommended when heavy draft, trailed equipment is used for extended periods. This drawbar is mounted on rollers and offers additional turning ease when compared with the sliding type.
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar The drawbar (2) pivots about a single pin at the front end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar to swing the full width of the hanger. By inserting the swing limiter pins (1) in the appropriate holes, restricted movement of the drawbar is permitted. Alternatively, the drawbar can be pinned in any one of three positions by insertion of the pins in the appropriate holes. In Figure 167, the drawbar is shown pinned in the central position to prevent swinging. Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling equipment which requires accurate positioning and when transporting equipment.
167
Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground engaging equipment which does not require accurate positioning. This will make steering and turning easier.
WARNING
When transporting equipment or when operating ground engaging equipment, always secure the drawbar to prevent swinging. The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection relative to the end of the PTO shaft. To vary the height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove the drawbar and invert it. All Countries Except North America The front securing pin may be inserted in one of three holes in the drawbar to vary the PTO shaft to hitch point distance. See Figure 168 and the following table: Hole (see Fig. 168)
PTO Shaft to Drawbar Hitch Point
Maximum Static Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost 1
406 mm (16 in.)
1440 kg (3175 lb.)
2
356 mm (14 in.)
1680 kg (3700 lb.)
3
243 mm (9.6 in.)
2575 kg (5675 lb.)
168
Drawbar clevis underneath 1
406 mm (16 in.)
1045 kg (2300 lb.)
2
356 mm (14 in.)
1225 kg (2700 lb.)
3
243 mm (9.6 in.)
1305 kg (2875 lb.)
3--107
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min PTO operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min PTO operations. When towing equipment exerting high static downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc., use the close-coupled position -- hole 3, with the clevis in the uppermost position.. North America only The front securing pin may be inserted in one of four holes in the drawbar to vary the PTO shaft to hitch point distance. See Figure 169 and the following table: Hole (see Fig. 169 )
P.T.O Shaft to Drawbar Hitch Point
Maximum Static Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost 1
600 mm (23.6 in.)
1000 kg (2204 lb.)
2
500 mm (19.6 in.)
1215 kg (2678 lb.)
3
400 mm (15.7 in.)
1620 kg (3571 lb.)
4
350 mm (13.7 in.)
1900 kg (4188 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath 1
600 mm (23.6 in.)
780 kg (1719 lb.)
2
500 mm (19.6 in.)
885 kg (1951 lb.)
3
400 mm (15.7 in.)
1045 kg (2303 lb.)
4
350 mm (13.7 in.)
1225 kg (2700 lb.)
When towing equipment exerting high static downward forces, such as two--wheeled trailers, etc., use the close-coupled positions -- holes 3 or 4 with the clevis in the uppermost position.
3--108
169
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Roller Type Swinging Drawbar The drawbar (2) Figure 170, pivots about a single pin at the front end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar to swing the full width of the hanger. By inserting the swing limiter pin (1) in the appropriate hole and through the drawbar, the drawbar can be pinned in any one of seven positions. Alternatively, the drawbar may be allowed to swing the full width of the hanger (3). Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling equipment which requires accurate positioning and when transporting equipment. Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground engaging equipment which does not require accurate positioning. This will make steering and turning easier.
170
WARNING
When transporting equipment or when operating ground engaging equipment, always secure the drawbar to prevent swinging. The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection relative to the end of the PTO shaft. To vary the height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove the drawbar and invert it. The front securing pin may be inserted in one of two holes in the drawbar to vary the PTO shaft to hitch point distance. See Figure 171 and the following table: Hole (see Fig. 171)
PTO Shaft to Drawbar Hitch Point
Maximum Static Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost 1
406 mm (16 in.)
1360 kg (2995 lb.)
2
356 mm (14 in.)
1630 kg (3590 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath 1
406 mm (16 in.)
1045 kg (2303 lb.)
2
356 mm (14 in.)
1225 kg (2700 lb.)
171
Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min PTO operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min PTO operations.
3--109
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS When towing equipment exerting high static downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc., use hole 2 with the clevis in the uppermost position.
WARNING
Do not pull from the lower links with the links above the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar, pick--up hitch or lower links in the lowered position for pull--type work, otherwise the tractor may overturn rearwards. NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum static downward load or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower (see Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3). IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the highway it is recommended that a safety chain having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight of the implement be installed between the tractor and implement hitch. See following text and Figure 172. SAFETY CHAIN When towing implements on public roads, use a safety chain (2) with a tensile strength equal to or greater than the gross weight of the implement to be towed. This will control the implement (1) in case the drawbar (3) and implement become disconnected. After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run by driving the tractor to the right and to the left for a short distance to check the safety chain adjustment. If necessary, re-adjust to eliminate a tight or loose chain. Check the implement operator’s manual for implement weight and attaching hardware specifications. Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guide are available from your authorised dealer.
3--110
172
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS REAR TOW HITCH Description Various rear tow hitch options are available. All versions consist of a fabricated steel frame bolted to the rear axle centre housing. A tow pin or ball is provided, adjustable for height. The slider type frame is is equipped with rotating pins that engage in notches in the frame to secure the hitch at the required height. With this type of frame, a second, fixed tow pin (piton) is available as an option. The piton is installed at the bottom of the assembly. Four types of hitch assembly are available :-•
Heavy duty non-swivelling tow pin. See Figure 173.
•
Swivelling tow pin -- manual operation. See Figure 175.
•
Swivelling tow pin -- auto operation. See Figure 177.
•
K 80 ball. See Figure 181.
A swinging drawbar may also be provided as part of the assembly. See ‘Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar’ on page 3--107 for details of drawbar operation. NOTE: The tow hitch is designed primarily for use with four wheel trailers which do not place a heavy downward load on the tow pin. Observe the maximum static downward loads quoted in the text.
3--111
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Slider Frame with non-swivelling Tow Pins (where fitted) The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height adjustable, non-swivelling, tow pin assembly. Remove the securing clip (1) and lift the handle (5) to the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the pins and disengage them from the notches in the frame. Using both hands on the handle (5) lift or lower the tow pin assembly (4), as required. When at the required height, support the tow pin with one hand and lower the handle to the horizontal position. The pins will rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower the PTO guard (6). To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the ‘R’ clip (3) from the tow pin and lift out using the handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it passes through the eye of the trailer drawbar. Replace the ‘R’ clip. NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must not exceed the rear tyre load capacity or the following values, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3). Category D3 tow pin
2500 kg (5500 lb.)
NOTE: A Category D3 tow pin is standard equipment on your tractor. A Category D2 pin and housing is available as a dealer installed accessory.
3--112
173
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Slider Frame with Swivelling Tow Pins (where fitted) The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height adjustable, swivelling tow pin assembly with manual or auto operation. With reference to Figure 174, adjust the height of the tow pin assembly, as follows: Grasp the handle (2) with the right hand. Press and hold in the button (1) to release the locking mechanism. Pull the handle (3) down to the horizontal position with the left hand and release the push button to lock the handle (3) in the horizontal position. Lowering the handle will rotate the pins and disengage them from the frame. Using both handles, lift or lower the complete tow pin assembly. When at the required height, hold in the push button and lift the left-hand handle up to the vertical position, as shown in Figure 174. The pins will rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower the PTO guard (4).
174
WARNING
Before attaching a trailer, ensure that the pins are fully engaged in the notches, i.e. the handle (3) Figure 174, is in the vertical position. The tow pin assembly must not rest on the PTO guard or on the bolt heads at the end of the slider guides.
175
3--113
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Attaching a Trailer Swivelling Tow Pin -- Manual Engagement To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the ‘R’ clip (1) Figure 175, from the tow pin and lift out using the handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it passes through the eye of the trailer drawbar. Replace the ‘R’ clip. The tow pin may be allowed to swivel after loosening the socket-headed screw (1) Figure 176 on the underside of the tow pin assembly. This feature will permit a trailer with a non-swivelling drawbar to articulate relative to the towing tractor.
176
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the tractor tow pin to swivel if the trailed equipment is equipped with a swivelling tow pin connector. NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must not exceed 2000 kg (4400 lb.) or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3). Swivelling Tow Pin -- Auto Engagement The tow pin (2) Figure 177, is spring-loaded in the engaged (down) position, as shown. To attach a trailer to the tow pin, lift the release lever (1) to the vertical position to retract the tow pin up into it’s housing. The release lever is connected by the cable (4) to a handle in the cab. This will permit trailer attachment without leaving the cab. Pull up the handle (1) Figure 178 to actuate the cable release and retract the tow pin up into it’s housing. 177 The pin will stay in the raised position until the trailer drawbar is located beneath it. The eye of the drawbar will contact the trip lever (3) Figure 177 and cause the pin to drop down into the engaged position. Alternatively, the tow pin will drop down into the engaged position if the lever (1) is pulled down.
WARNING
Do not attempt to trip the lever by hand as the fingers may be trapped by the action of the spring-loaded tow pin.
178
3--114
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Fixed Tow Pin (Piton) An optional fixed tow pin (piton) may be provided at the bottom of the assembly. To attach a trailer to the piton, remove the lynch pin (2) and withdraw the retaining pin (4). Lift the security latch (1) and lower the eye of the trailer drawbar over the piton (3). Drop the security latch down, re-insert the retaining pin and secure with the lynch pin. The security latch will ensure that the trailer cannot become accidentally detached from the piton NOTE: The static downward load on the piton must not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
179
180
3--115
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Slider Frame with K 80 Ball The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height adjustable, 80 mm ball assembly. Remove the securing clip (2) and lift the handle (1) to the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the pins and disengage them from the notches in the frame. Using both hands on the handle, lift or lower the tow ball assembly (3) as required. When at the required height, support the tow ball with one hand and lower the handle to the horizontal position. The pins will rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower the PTO guard. NOTE: When setting the height of the tow ball, it should be adjusted to the lowest position relative to the correct operating height of the implement drawbar. To attach a trailer, remove the ’R’ clip (5) and pull out the locking pin (4). This will allow the security latch to pivot forwards toward the tractor. When the implement drawbar has been securely attached, replace the locking pin so it passes through the security latch and re--insert the ’R’ clip. NOTE: The static downward load on the tow ball must not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
3--116
181
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS EXTENDIBLE PICK--UP HITCH AND DRAWBAR (where fitted) The extendible pick--up hitch is raised and lowered by means of the tractor hydraulic system and can be extended to aid visibility when attaching towed equipment. Operated through one of the rear remote valves, the hitch is extended or retracted using the remote valve lever. The hoses should be connected in such a way that moving the remote valve lever to E (Extend) will extend the hitch, moving the lever to R (Retract) will retract the hitch. NOTE: The illustration shows hitch operation through remote valve number I, however, it may be operated using an alternative valve where required.
182 To connect an implement to the pick--up hitch, move both position and draft control levers fully rearwards until the 3-point lift is supporting the weight of the hitch. To free the hitch, pull up the release handle (1). Lower the hitch until it is clear of the locking latches and then extend the hook or clevis rearwards by moving the remote valve lever to (E). With the drawbar extended continue to lower the hitch until it is just above the ground. 183
3--117
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Position the tractor so that the hitch hook (2) is beneath the eye of the implement drawbar eye and, using the position control lever, raise the hitch until the implement drawbar is just clear of the ground. Fully retract the pick--up hitch by moving the remote valve lever to (R). To assist in retracting the hitch release the tractor brakes to allow movement of the tractor towards the trailer. Re--apply the handbrake before leaving the tractor seat. With the hitch in the fully retracted position raise it slowly until an audible click indicates the locking latches (1) have engaged the cross tubes (3).
184
NOTE: The maximum static downward load on the hitch hook must not exceed 3000 kg (6610 lb.) To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the pick--up hitch, extract the two securing pins (1) and withdraw the hook assembly. Install the clevis drawbar assembly and secure with the two pins. Maximum Permissible Clevis Load P.T.O Shaft to Drawbar Hitch Point
Maximum Static Downward Load
406 mm (16 in.)
1500 kg (3300 lb.)
185 When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar may be stored in the bracket (1), attached to the rear axle. Ensure the clamp screw (2), is fully tightened to retain the drawbar in the bracket. IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on the drawbar or pick-up hitch ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum static downward load or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower (See Rear Tyre Pressures and Loads at the end of Section 3).
186
3--118
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEMS (where fitted) HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES (except Italy) Hydraulic trailer brakes may be connected into the hydraulic system via a quick--release coupling (1) at the rear of the tractor. NOTE: The position of the trailer brake coupling may vary slightly from that shown, dependent upon the type of remote control valves installed.
187
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor. IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).
WARNING
With the tractor engine off, hydraulic pressure cannot be applied to the trailer braking system. When parking the tractor/trailer combination apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes while the engine is still running. With the footbrakes locked together apply the parking brake, stop the engine and immediately block the wheels. Always lock the brake pedals together when a hydraulically braked trailer is attached to the tractor. NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap in place when the trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may only be connected to the tractor coupling by means of a compatible female coupling.
3--119
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES (Italy only) The hydraulic trailer braking system on tractors for the Italian market function in a slightly different way to the universal system previously described. If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor or when the tractor parking brake is applied when the engine is running. When the engine is switched off, the trailer brakes will remain applied. IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).
188
To release hydraulic pressure and free the trailer brakes, start the engine, depress both brake pedals and release the tractor parking brake.
NOTE: The light (1), on the instrument panel will flash, accompanied by critical alarm, to indicate that hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit is low. Stop the engine and investigate the cause. ATTENTION: Should the trailer brake warning light commence to flash, the trailer brakes will apply automatically. NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap in place when the trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may only be connected to the tractor coupling by means of a compatible female coupling.
3--120
189
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKES (except Italy)
WARNING
Single line pneumatic trailer braking systems are designed for use up to a maximum speed of 25 km/h (15 MPH). Tractor/trailer combinations with dual line braking systems may be used at a higher speed but must at all times comply with local legal requirements. Gross train weight, i.e., tractor plus trailer(s) and/or individual trailer weight must not exceed that laid down in local regulations governing the use of trailers. The following text covers operation of the airoperated trailer braking systems that may be installed as an alternative, or in addition to, hydraulically-actuated trailer brakes. The system consists of an engine-driven air compressor, one or two air reservoirs, dependent upon type of system installed, a pressure gauge, control valves, two or three couplers and related pipework. The couplers installed at the back of the tractor may be connected to single or dual line trailer braking systems. Either or both types may be installed. The air lines connected to the couplers are colour-coded black, red and yellow. The black line is used for a single line system, the red and yellow lines are used for dual line systems. IMPORTANT: The trailer brakes will only operate when both tractor brake pedals are applied. Therefore, always lock the brake pedals together when a trailer is attached to the tractor. NOTE: The tractor parking brake is connected to the main control valve. Whenever the parking brake is applied, the trailer brakes are activated.
3--121
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Operation When starting the engine with a trailer connected into the tractor air brake system, chock the wheels and release the parking brake and footbrakes. The warning light (1) Figure 190, will illuminate until air pressure builds up to 4.5 -- 5.5 bar. The pressure will continue to rise, as indicated by the air pressure bargraph in the Dot Matrix Display, Figure 191. To select the air pressure bargraph, use the standard keypad or, where fitted, the Enhanced keypad.
190
The air tank(s) should reach operating pressure within 3 minutes of start--up but may take longer, dependent upon the size of the trailer brake reservoir(s). Once required pressure has been reached a loud ‘pop’ will be heard, signifying that the unload valve has opened to allow excess pressure to escape to atmosphere. IMPORTANT: Apply the footbrakes several times, ensuring that the pressure, as indicated by the gauge, drops as the brakes are applied and rises again when they are released. Never drive the tractor with the trailer brake warning light on.
191
IMPORTANT: When the footbrakes are applied ,with the parking brake off, ensure that the front wheel drive indicator light (1) Figure 192 illuminates and that all stop lights are functional. IMPORTANT: Various types of trailer braking systems are available. Check the trailer manufacturers’ instruction manual before making connections to the tractor air brake system. Clean the trailer and tractor connectors before coupling up the hose(s). Ensure that connections are secure. Check the trailer brakes regularly to ensure that they are functioning correctly.
CAUTION
Do not over use the brakes on steep down hill gradients. Use the same gear going down hill as you would use for going up the same hill.
3--122
192
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Dual Line System For a trailer with a dual line braking system, connect the supply line hose to the red coupler (1) and the control line hose to the yellow coupler (2). IMPORTANT: The dual line system will only operate if both the red and yellow lines are connected. Red line (brake supply line) -- (1): Air is supplied to the red coupler at full system pressure. This is the brake supply line and charges the reservoir(s) on the trailer. If the trailer braking system is disconnected from the tractor for any reason, the air pressure will fall to zero and the trailer brakes will be applied.
193
Yellow line (control line) -- (2): As the tractor brakes are applied, increasing air pressure is supplied, via the yellow coupler, to the control valve on the trailer until full system pressure is generated. Application of the trailer brakes is proportional to the pressure applied to the tractor brake pedals.
194
Single Line System If the trailer has a single line system an additional coupler is supplied. Connect the hose to the black coupler (1) Figure 195. A pressure of 5.5 bar is available at the coupler at all times when the tractor brake pedals and parking brake are released. Application of the tractor brakes causes the pressure to drop to zero allowing the trailer brakes to be applied.
195
3--123
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM (Italy only) This system operates in a similar manner to the dual line system, previously described, except that a combined dual coupler is utilised. Please read all the previous text relating to pneumatic trailer brakes plus the following: The coupler is protected by a metal cover. To remove the cover, press the handle (2) down. The handle is held in position by a stiff spring and some pressure is required to move it down to release the cover (1). 196
Connections The lines to the couplers are colour-coded for ease of use. The supply line to the left-hand coupler (1) is red and the control line to the right-hand coupler (2) is yellow. The trailer hoses will have a male dual coupler. Press down the handle (3) and insert the trailer coupler. When the handle is released, it will lock the trailer and tractor couplers together.
197
3--124
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TRACTOR/TRAILER BRAKE BIAS CONTROL When the tractor leaves the factory, this control is set to allow maximum available braking effort to the trailer. Under most conditions, the control will remain in this position and will give well balanced braking. Occasionally, with some trailers this setting may provide a greater braking bias to the trailer than is ideal. In this case the braking force to the trailer may be reduced slightly by turning the adjuster (1) in an anti--clockwise direction. To turn the valve, it is first necessary to pull the knob out. After adjustment, push the knob in to lock the setting. The adjuster must be reset to the fully clockwise position when a different trailer is used.
198
WARNING
The trailer brake bias adjustment is extremely sensitive and should not be rotated more than one half turn before testing with the attached trailer fully loaded. If further adjustments are required, they should be carried out following the same procedure. Failure to do this may result in an imbalance between tractor and trailer braking forces if the valve is rotated too far in the anti--clockwise direction.
Auxiliary Air Supply Connector (where fitted) An auxiliary air supply is available for the purpose of inflating tyres, etc. The air supply operates at full system pressure -- 7 or 8 bar (100 or 115 lbf. in2) -dependent upon system installed. When not in use, ensure protective dust cap is fitted. Always use a proprietary inflating gun, with gauge, when inflating tyres. Connect the air hose to the air outlet (1), located on the left-hand side of the rear axle. 199
3--125
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TRACK ADJUSTMENT (two wheel drive)
CAUTION
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting regulations when operating or travelling on the public highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond the initial factory position then you may be required to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall tractor width does not exceed the maximum permitted in your country.
Track Width Adjustment To alter the track setting, apply the handbrake and block the rear wheels. Jack up the front axle and place on axle stands. Remove the nuts, bolts and washers securing the right-hand telescopic section (1) to the centre beam (2). Repeat on the left-hand side of the axle.
200 The two adjustable track control rods consist of a hollow tube that is attached to the central steering pivot, and a solid, extendible rod that attaches to the steering arm on the kingpin. Each control rod has a number of adjustment holes at 50 mm (2 in.) intervals. The two locating bolts (1), pass through the hollow tube and the holes in the extendible rod, locking the track rod assembly at the desired length. Additionally, the inner ends of each track rod have a threaded section (2), and locknut (3), to provide fine adjustment. Remove the locating bolts (1) from the both track rods. This will permit the track rods to extend or retract freely.
3--126
201
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Reset the left and right-hand axle telescopic sections, passing the securing bolts through the centre beam and telescopic sections, as indicated in Figure 202 and table below: Tighten the nuts on the axle extension securing bolts to 530 -- 950 Nm (391 -- 701 lbf.ft.). NOTE: If the outer locating bolt on the axle is in the fourth hole from the kingpin, then the outer bolt on the track control rod must also be in the fourth hole from the outer end of the control rod. Track Settings (11.0 x 16 tyres) Track Setting mm. (in.) 1549 (61.0) 1651 (65.0) 1752 (69.0) 1854 (73.0) 1955 (77.0) 2057 (81.0)
202
Securing Bolt Locations Refer to Figure 202
A B C D E F
C D E F G H
Track Settings (14L x 16.1 tyres) Track Setting mm. (in.) 1574 (62.0) 1676 (66.0) 1778 (70.0) 1879 (74.0) 1981 (78.0) 2082 (82.0)
Securing Bolt Locations Refer to Figure 202
A B C D E F
C D E F G H
With both front wheels parallel, reinstall the locating bolts (1) in the nearest aligning holes in the track control rod. Tighten the nuts on the locating bolts to 54 -- 68 Nm (40 -- 50 lbf. ft.). Tighten the wheel hub bolts to: 190 to 217 Nm (140 to 160 lbf. ft.) IMPORTANT: The front wheel discs are offset relative to the centre line of the rim. The track settings in the table above are with the deeply dished side of the wheel nearest the axle hub. If the front wheels are reversed on the hubs each track setting will be increased by approximately 203 mm (8.0 in.).
203
3--127
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Front Wheel Alignment After resetting the track width, adjust the front wheel alignment. For correct operation, the front wheels should toe--in slightly. With the tractor parked on a level surface, measure the distance (1) between the wheel rims at hub height at the front of the wheels. Move the tractor forward to rotate both front wheels 180° and check the measurements again, this time at the rear of the wheels (2). This will eliminate wheel rim run--out errors. The measurement taken at the front of the rims should be smaller by up to 9.0 mm (0.35 in.).
204
6.0 +/ -- 3 mm (0.23 +/ -- 0.11 in.)
Toe--in Setting
To adjust the toe--in setting first loosen the locknut (3) on the inner end of the track rod. Remove the two clamp bolts (1) to allow the track rod tube to be rotated. To increase toe--in the track rod must be lengthened. After adjusting, replace the two bolts (1) and tighten to 54--68 Nm (40--50 lbf.ft.). Re--tighten the lock nut (3) and check the toe--in setting again. If the toe--in setting requires considerable adjustment, both track control rods should be moved by the same amount to ensure the steering action remains centralised.
CAUTION
Operators should ensure that all steering components are maintained in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure safe operation and comply with legal requirements.
3--128
205
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS FRONT WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT (four wheel drive)
1
CAUTION
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting regulations when operating or travelling on the public highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond the initial factory position then you may be required to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall tractor width does not exceed the maximum permitted in your country. 206 Front wheel track adjustment is effected by changing the wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim and/or the disc relative to the axle hub or by inter--changing the wheels.
2
CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and cause injury. There are three different designs of centre disc dependent upon tyre size and tractor model. The centre discs shown are as follows:
207 3
Square centre disc -- variable track (Type 1) Round centre disc -- variable track (Type 2) Round centre disc -- fixed track (Type 3) The type of centre disc installed will affect the track setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and Figure 219 to see the wheel rim and disc positions necessary to achieve the required track setting. 208 NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1 and 2), are not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
3--129
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS WARNING
With a front wheel on a four wheel drive tractor supported on a stand, never attempt to rotate the wheel or start the engine. This may cause the rear wheels to move resulting in the tractor falling from the stand. Wheels should always be supported such that the tyres are only just clear of the ground.
A
NOTE: When interchanging left and right--hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V� at the top of the tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of forward travel.
B
Front wheel drive tractors have fixed axle assemblies. However the track width is fully adjustable by changing the wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim and/or disc relative to the axle hub or by inter-changing both front wheels. (The track width is the distance between the centre of each tyre at ground level). The sectioned drawings shown illustrate the wheel rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various track settings. The track widths available are as follows:
C
D
Track Settings Adjustable Rim (Types 1 and 2) Setting
Track Width
A
1552 mm (61.1 in.)
B
1664 mm (65.5 in.)
C
1758 mm (69.2 in.)
D
1869 mm (73.6 in.)
E
1952 mm (76.9 in.)
F
2064 mm (81.3 in.)
G
2158 mm (85.0 in.)
H
2269 mm (89.3 in.)
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 209, are nominal and may vary by up to 25 mm (1 in.) dependent upon tyre size.
E
F
G
WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and at the recommended intervals. Owners should ensure that all steering components are maintained in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure safe operation and comply with legal requirements.
H
209 3--130
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Track Setting -- 50 Km/h Models Tractors equipped with a 50 Km/h (31 MPH) transmission will have fixed front wheels offering a choice of two track settings. To alter the track width, interchange both front wheels to provide a narrow (A) or wide (B) track setting as required.
A
NOTE: When interchanging left and right--hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V� of the tread at the top of the tyre remains pointing in the direction of forward travel. B
210 Track Settings Position
All Models
Standard -- min/max. setting
A/B
1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
Suspended -- min/max. setting
A/B
1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
4WD Front axle type --
Refitting the Front Wheels When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts to the following torques then re-check after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 8 hours operation and, thereafter, at the 50 hour service intervals: Disc to hub nuts Disc to rim nuts
210 Nm (155 lbf.ft.) 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with front fenders, ensure there is adequate clearance under all operating conditions. Adjust the steering stops and or fender position, as necessary. IMPORTANT: At the narrower track settings a foul condition may occur between the tyre or fender and the tractor when the wheels are turned to the full lock position particularly when the axle is fully articulated. To avoid this condition, adjust the fenders and/or steering stops.
3--131
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS STEERING STOPS Two steering stops are incorporated in the axle, one at each end. The stops are adjustable and should be set to provide a minimum clearance of 20 mm (0.75 in.) between the tyres and any part of the tractor on full left and right lock with the axle fully articulated. To adjust, slacken the locknut (1) and turn the stop bolt (2) anti-clockwise to reduce the steering angle of the wheels or clockwise to increase the steering angle. Tighten the locknut to 150 Nm (110 lbf. ft.). NOTE: After adjusting both steering stops, ensure that there is adequate clearance between the tyres and any part of the tractor with the axle fully articulated.
211
FRONT AXLE OSCILLATION STOPS Axle oscillation stops are installed, one each side of the axle. Each stop consists of a plate (1), secured to the underside of the front axle support by two flush fitting, socket head screws. Oscillation of the axle causes the stop plate to contact the projection (2) on the axle casing, so preventing further movement. With the stop plates in position, as shown, axle oscillation is 8°. Extract the screws and remove the stop plates to increase axle oscillation to 12°. NOTE: If the oscillation stops are removed, ensure that there is adequate clearance between the front tyres and any part of the tractor with the axle fully articulated.
3--132
212
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT After resetting the track width, the front wheel alignment may require adjustment. For correct operation, the front wheels should be parallel. Measure the distance (1) between the wheel rims at hub height at the front of the wheels. Rotate both front wheels 180° and check the measurements again, this time at the rear of the wheels (2). This will eliminate wheel rim run--out errors. The correct setting is 0 +/ -- 3.0 mm (0+/ -- 0.12 in.), i.e. the measurement taken at the front of the rims should be the same as the rear or not differ by more than 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) Should it be necessary to adjust the front wheel alignment, proceed as follows: 213 Remove and discard the self-locking nut (2) on the left--hand end of the track control rod and extract the track rod end (1). Loosen the lock nut (3) and screw the track rod end into or out of the track rod to shorten or lengthen the assembly, as required. Re-insert the track rod end and, when the alignment is correct, secure with a new self-locking nut. Tighten the nuts to the following torques: Model
All
Self--locking nut (2)
Locknut (3)
118Nm (87 lbf. ft.)
196Nm (145 lbf. ft.)
214
3--133
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT
1
Your tractor may be fitted with a fixed flange type or bar type rear axle. With a fixed flange type axle rear wheel track adjustment is effected by changing the wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim and/or the disc relative to the axle hub or by inter--changing the rear wheels. With bar axles, the same method of adjustment applies but with the added advantage of being able to move the wheel hub on the axle shaft. This provides an infinite range of adjustment between the narrowest and widest settings.
CAUTION
215 2
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting regulations when operating or travelling on the public highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond the initial factory position then you may be required to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall tractor width does not exceed the maximum permitted in your country.
CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and cause injury.
216 3
NOTE: There are four different designs of centre disc dependent upon tyre size and tractor model. The centre discs shown are as follows: Square centre disc -- variable track (Type 1) Round centre disc -- variable track (Type 2) Cast centre disc -- variable track (Type 3) Round centre disc -- fixed track (Type 4) NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1, 2 and 3), are not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
217 4
The type of centre disc installed will affect the track setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and Figure 219 to see the wheel rim and disc positions necessary to achieve the required track setting.
WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and at the recommended intervals.
3--134
218
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS The sectioned drawings shown, illustrate the wheel rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various track settings. IMPORTANT: When interchanging left and right--hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V� of the tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of forward travel. When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts to the following torques then re--check after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and again after 8 hours operation and thereafter at the 50 hour service intervals:
A
B
FLANGE AXLE Disc to hub fixings 8 Stud/nuts x M18 Disc to rim fixings Rim nuts x M16
250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.) C 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Track Settings Adjustable Rim (Types 1, 2 and 3) Track setting Figure 219
Disc types 1, 2 and 3 Figures 215, 216 and 217
A
1530 mm (60.2 in.)
B
1632 mm (64.2 in.)
C
1712 mm (67.4 in.)
D
1834 mm (72.2 in.)
E
1930 mm (75.9 in.)
F
2032 mm (80.0 in.)
G
2130 mm (83.8 in.)
H
2232 mm (87.8 in.)
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 219 are nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel and tyre size. NOTE: With the larger tyre sizes, the narrower track settings may not be attainable due to minimal clearance between tyres and fenders or equipment. The dimensions shown in the chart relating to Figure 219 are nominal and should be used as a guide only. Track settings may vary dependent upon wheel type and tyre size.
D
E
F
G
Fixed Rim (Type 4) A minimal track adjustment of approximately 102mm (4.0in.) each side, may be achieved by interchanging wheel assemblies.
H
219 3--135
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS BAR AXLE (where fitted)
CAUTION
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting regulations when operating or travelling on the public highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond the initial factory position then you may be required to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall tractor width does not exceed the maximum permitted in your country.
INTRODUCTION Tractors equipped with a bar axle may have a steel or cast centre disc (2) Figure 220 mounted on a cast iron hub (3). The hub is clamped to the bar axle (1). With a cast centre disc, the hub is an integral part of the disc. NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1, 2 or 3), are not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission. Three bar axle lengths are available -- 2490 mm (98 in.), 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.). The wheel may be moved along the bar to provide a range of track widths. Depending on tyre size, a range of 190 mm (7.5 in.) per wheel or 380 mm (15 in.) overall is available with the 98 inch axle. If the 112 inch axle is installed, the range is increased to 735 mm (29 in.) and with the 119 inch axle, 914 mm (36 in.) overall. Track width adjustment is effected by moving the complete wheel/hub assemblies in or out on the axle shaft. Additionally, repositioning the wheel rim on the centre disc and/or the rim on the axle hub or by inter-changing the rear wheels provides a greater range of adjustment. Tractor wheels are very heavy so it is recommended that you do not remove them to reposition the rims on the disc unless the track setting required is outside the slide range of the bar axle.
3--136
220
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS MOVING A WHEEL ON THE AXLE SHAFT Block the front wheels and jack up and support the rear axle. Adjustment of the track setting is achieved by sliding the complete wheel/hub assembly on the axle shaft. Loosen the two centre wedge bolts (1)Figure 221, approximately 12 mm (0.5 in.). Remove the four outer wedge bolts (2). Clean the threads on the four bolts and the threaded holes in the wedges before lubricating and installing the removed bolts at (1) Figure 222. These bolts are used to push against the wheel or hub to withdraw or ’jack’ the wedges from the hub. Tighten these bolts evenly until the wedges loosen in the hub and the wheel assembly can be moved on the axle shaft.
WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and at the recommended intervals.
221
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 407Nm (300 lbf.ft)) on the jack bolts. The use of penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced, place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft and strike with a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety glasses, against the possibility of flying metal particles. Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft. Remove the jack bolts and replace them in the original holes (2) Figure 221.
222
3--137
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Tighten all six wedge retaining bolts in increments of 68 Nm (50 ft.-lbs.) until the final torque setting is achieved. 6 x M20 Bolts (Cast centre) 6 x M22 Bolts Steel centre)
300Nm (221 ft.lbs.) 500Nm (369 ft.lbs)
IMPORTANT: The wedge bolts must be tightened evenly. Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making sure that both rear wheels are the same distance from the ends of the axle shafts. NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining bolts on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.
3--138
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS WHEEL ADJUSTMENT The sectioned drawings shown in Figures 223, 224 and 225 illustrate the wheel rim and disc positions at various track settings. In each table, two track width settings are quoted for each axle type. These are the minimum and maximum achievable with both wheel assemblies moved fully in (toward the tractor) and fully out (away from the tractor). Track Adjustment
Rim and Disc Position
2490 mm axle (98 in.) 1524 -- 1828 mm (60 -- 72 in.) 2845 mm axle (112 in.) 1524 -- 2184 mm (60 -- 86 in.) 3022 mm axle (119 in.) 1524 -- 2388 mm (60 -- 94 in.) 2490 mm axle (98 in.) 1727 -- 2032 mm (68 -- 80 in.) 2845 mm axle (112 in.) 1727 -- 2388 mm (68 -- 94 in.) 3022 mm axle (119 in.) 1727 -- 2590 mm (68 -- 102 in.) 2490 mm axle (98 in.) 1930 -- 2235 mm (76 -- 88 in.) 2845 mm axle (112 in.) 1930 -- 2540 mm (76 -- 100 in.) 3022 mm axle (119 in.) 1930 -- 2744 mm (76 -- 108 in.) 2490 mm axle (98 in.) 2133 -- 2438 mm (84 -- 96 in.) 2845 mm axle (112 in.) 2133 -- 2794 mm (84 -- 110 in.) 3022 mm axle (119 in.) 2133 -- 2998 mm (84 -- 118 in.)
223
Wheels with steel centre disc bolted to flange on the rim NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender.
NOTE: The track widths shown in Figure 223 are nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel and tyre size.
3--139
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS
Track Adjustment
Rim and Disc Position
2490 mm axle (98 in.) 1524 -- 1880 mm (60 -- 74 in.) 2845 mm axle (112 in.) 1524 -- 2235 mm (60 -- 88 in.) 3022 mm axle (119 in.) 1524 -- 2438mm (60 -- 96 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.) 1930 -- 2286 mm (76 -- 90 in.) 2845 mm axle (112 in.) 1930 -- 2641 mm (76 -- 104 in.) 3022 mm axle (119 in.) 1930 -- 2844 mm (76 -- 112 in.) 224
Wheels with steel centre disc welded to flange on the rim NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. NOTE: The track widths shown in Figure 223 are nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel and tyre size. Rear Wheel Hardware Torque Values (with Steel Centre disc) Disc to Hub Fixings 10 x M22 Bolt
500Nm ( 369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to Rim Nuts All wheels (M16)
250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts 6 x M22 Bolt
3--140
500 Nm (369 lbf.ft)
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS
Track Adjustment
Rim and Disc Position
2490 mm axle (98 in.) 1524 -- 1880 mm (60 -- 74 in.) 2845 mm axle (112 in.) 1524 -- 2235 mm (60 -- 88 in.) 3022 mm axle (119 in.) 1524 -- 2438 mm (60 -- 96 in.) 2490 mm axle (98 in.) 1930 -- 2286 mm (76 -- 90 in.) 2845 mm axle (112 in.) 1930 -- 2641 mm (76 -- 104 in.) 3022 mm axle (119 in.) 1930 -- 2844 mm (76 -- 112 in.) 225
Wheels with cast centre disc NOTE: The track widths in Figure 225 are nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel and tyre size. NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. IMPORTANT: When interchanging left and right--hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V� at the top of the tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of forward travel.
CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and cause injury.
WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and at the recommended intervals. When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts to the following torques then re--check after driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 8 hours operation and thereafter at the 50 hour service intervals. Wheel Hardware Torque Values (with Cast Centre disc) Disc to Rim Nuts All wheels (M16 nuts)
250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts 6 x M20 Bolt
300 Nm (221 lbf.ft)
3--141
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS
226 DUAL REAR WHEELS (where fitted) Dual rear wheels are available as a factory installed option or dealer installed accessory, in conjunction with the 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.) bar axles equipped with cast iron or steel wheels. The dual wheel kit consists of an additional pair of steel wheels, hubs and wheel-to-hub attaching hardware.
Figure 226 shows a typical wheel installation. The inner (cast) wheel (4) is clamped onto the bar axle (5). The outer (steel) wheel (1) is attached to the hub by eight bolts (3). The hub is clamped to the bar axle by the four bolts (2) in a similar manner to the cast, inner wheel.
Customers may wish to mount their existing wheels to make a dual wheel installation. In this instance, provided that the existing wheels have the same mounting dimensions, they will only need to obtain the hub assembly.
When mounting wheels, the clearance between the tyres on the inner wheels and the closest part of the tractor must be no less than 100 mm (4 in.).
IMPORTANT: Dual wheels are intended for flotation. Use of dual wheels under heavy traction conditions could cause severe transmission overload and is not approved. Before the outer wheels can be installed, the inner wheels must be adjusted to the minimum attainable track width, as described in the previous text.
3--142
Additionally, a minimum clearance of 100 mm (4 in.) must be maintained between the closest points of the tyre walls. The clearance should be checked with the tractor correctly ballasted and the attached implement in the raised position.
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Moving the Outer Wheel on the Axle Shaft Each wedge is retained in the hub by two M22 bolts which pass through the hub and screw into the wedge on the inside of the wheel. To loosen the wedges, remove the bolts from their clamp position (1) and replace in the threaded holes (2). Tighten the bolts evenly until the wedges are loosened enough to allow the wheel to be moved on the axle shaft. After moving the wheel, replace the bolts in their original positions (1) and re--tighten to clamp the wheel to the axle shaft. Tighten all wedge retaining bolts in increments of 68Nm (50 ft.-lbs.) until a final torque of 500Nm (369 lbf.ft.) is achieved.
227
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making sure that both wheels are the same distance from the outer ends of the axle shaft. NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining bolts on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for 200m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals. (112 and 119 in. Axle) Disc to Hub Fixings 10 x M22 Bolt
500Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts 4 x M22 Bolt
500Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to Rim Bolts All wheels (M16 nuts)
250Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 407 Nm (300 ft.-lbs.) on the jack bolts. The use of penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced, place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft and strike with a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety glasses, against the possibility of flying metal particles.
3--143
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS BALLASTING AND TYRES GENERAL
Factors Affecting Tyre Performance
Maximum tractor performance is dependent upon proper ballasting and tyre selection. Maximum efficiency will be achieved when tractor weight is correct for the application.
•
Correct air pressure for the load
•
Correct wheel slip
•
Correct tyre size for expected load
•
Correct fill of liquid ballast
•
Maintaining equal tyre pressure in both tyres on a given axle.
The tyres selected for your tractor must be able to support the weight of the tractor and equipment and must also be able to provide adequate traction to utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into useful drawbar horsepower. Always maintain the correct air pressure in the tyre to carry the load. Do not over inflate tyres. NOTE: Radial tyres will work with lower air pressures and will show up to 20% sidewall deflection or bulge when correctly inflated. FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION IMPORTANT: On tractors fitted with front axle suspension, correct ballasting is essential to optimise suspension operation, particularly when using heavy rear mounted equipment. For this application, sufficient front ballast must be added by the use of wafer weights in preference to liquid ballast in the tyres In certain conditions, with insufficient front weight added, suspension operation may become disabled and error code L7 displayed. Stop the tractor, switch off the engine and restart again to clear the error code and re--enable the suspension. If the error code re--occurs, then further front weight should be added ensuring maximum axle and vehicle weights are not exceeded.
Selecting Ballast When tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimum weight of the tractor will change. This means that ballast may have to be added or removed to maintain the best tractor performance. Proper ballast will greatly improve tractor operation and ride. The amount of ballast required is affected by: •
Weight of tractor
•
Soil and traction conditions
•
Type of implement: mounted or trailed
•
Working speed
•
Tractor horsepower load
•
Type and size of tyres
•
Tyre pressures
fully-mounted,
semi-
Do not use more ballast than needed. Excess ballast should be removed when it is not required.
3--144
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Too little ballast: •
Rough ride
•
Excessive wheel slip
•
Power loss
•
Tyre wear
•
Excessive fuel consumption
•
Lower productivity
Too much ballast:
For optimum performance and efficiency, two wheel drive tractors should be ballasted so that approximately one third of the total tractor weight (less implement) is on the front wheels. Four wheel drive tractors should be ballasted so the weight on the front wheels is approximately 40 -- 45% of the total tractor weight. Add additional front end ballast, as required, for stability during operation and transport. Ballasting of the front end may not always provide adequate stability if the tractor is operated at high speed on rough terrain. Reduce tractor speed and exercise caution under these conditions.
•
Higher maintenance costs
•
Increased driveline wear
When using front mounted implements it may be necessary to add weight to the rear wheels to maintain traction and stability.
•
Power loss
Ballast Limitations
•
Increased soil compaction
•
Excessive fuel consumption
•
Lower productivity
Ballast should be limited by the tyre capacity or tractor capacity. Each tyre has a recommended carrying capacity which should not be exceeded, (see page 3--152).
For maximum performance in heavy draft conditions weight should be added to the tractor in the form of liquid ballast, cast iron weights or a combination of both. Front end ballast may be required for stability and steering control when weight is transferred from the front to the rear wheels as rear mounted implement is raised by the tractor 3--point hitch. When a rear mounted implement is raised to the transport position, the weight on the front wheels should be at least 20% of total tractor weight.
CAUTION
Additional front ballast may be needed when transporting large 3-point mounted equipment. Always drive slowly over rough terrain, no matter how much front ballast is used.
If a greater amount of weight is needed for traction, larger tyres should be used. Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron weights or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the tyres. Bolt-on cast iron weights are recommended because they can easily be removed when not needed. IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross vehicle weight shown on the following page. This can cause an overload condition that may invalidate the warranty and may exceed the load rating of the tyres. The maximum recommended gross vehicle weight is the weight of the tractor plus ballast plus any mounted equipment such as sprayers, tanks etc. in the raised position. See the following tables:
3--145
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Maximum Vehicle Weights and Axle Loads Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight All Models
kg
lb
12000
26455
IMPORTANT: Braking regulations in some countries may impose lower gross vehicle weight limits for road transport than the figures quoted in the above table.
IMPORTANT: For four wheel drive vehicles, the figures shown in the foregoing table are for continuous operation. For intermittent operation, the front axle loading (including loaded loader bucket) may be increased to the following levels, provided that ground speed does not exceed 8 km/h (5 MPH) and the track width settings are maintained within the limits shown:
Individual axles (front and rear) are also subject to weight limitations, as follows:
Maximum Front Axle Loading -- 4WD (Restricted Operation)* Track Setting
Maximum Front Axle Loading -2WD# All Models
kg
lb
4170
9193
All Models
kg
lb
mm
in
8000
17636
1727 -- 2032
68 -- 80
*Maximum track width 1829 mm (72.0in.). Maximum Rear Axle Loading Maximum Front Axle Loading -4WD# (Continuous Operation) All Models
kg
lb
5200
11463
# Includes a front end loader in the raised position but with no load in the bucket.
3--146
All Models
kg
lb
9500
20943
NOTE: Total rear axle weight is measured with only the rear wheels on the scales inclusive of liquid and cast iron ballast and with mounted equipment in the raised position.
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS CAST IRON WEIGHTS (where fitted) Rear Wheel Weights Up to three cast iron weights (1) may be added to each rear wheel, as follows:
All Models
Max. Weight per Wheel
Total Weight per Axle
1 x 227 kg (500 lb)
454 kg (1000 lb)
IMPORTANT: It is not recommended to fit rear wheel weights on tractors operating at speeds in excess of 40 k/mh (25 MPH).
228
Front Weights 45 kg (99 lb.) wafer weights are available as a set of 6 or 8, mounted on a substantial cast iron carrier. The maximum recommended front ballast weight is as follows: Weight Pack
Hook
Carrier
Total Weight
6 x 45 kg
114 kg
200 kg
584 kg
6 x 99 lb
251 lb
441 lb
1287 lb
8 x 45 kg
--
200 kg
560 kg
8 x 99 lb
--
441 lb
1234 lb
1 x 500 kg
integral
200 kg
700 kg
1 x 1102 lb
integral
441 lb
1543 lb
*2 x 250 kg
1 x 500 kg
200 kg
1200 kg
2 x 551 lb
1 x 1102 kg
441 lb
2645 lb
229
*Not available for 2WD models. In addition to the wafer weights, a 450 kg (992 lb.) chassis weight may be fitted below the front of the tractor behind the wafer weights. The chassis weight is not compatible with 2WD models. IMPORTANT: Before adding front weight see reference to front axle suspension on page 3--144.
230
3--147
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Installing Wafer Weights To install the weights, hook the upper part of the weight over the lip on the carrier and then slide to the centre of the carrier. A recess in the lower part of the weight will interlock with a locating pad beneath the carrier. Add more weights as necessary and clamp together using the long bolts and retaining plates supplied. Use the correct length of bolt to clamp the weights together and tighten the retaining nut to a torque of 169 Nm (125 lbf.ft.).
CAUTION
The tractor must not be operated unless all bolts and clamps are in position with the bolts tightened to 169 Nm (125 lbf.ft.) Recheck the bolt torques after 50 hours of operation if the bolts have been disturbed for any reason.
231
To remove the weights, reverse the above procedure. When the front towhook is installed, the weight pack is secured by a pin passing through the rear of the towhook segment into the weight carrier. Do not operate the tractor without this pin installed and the retaining ’R’ clip (1), inserted to prevent the pin from becoming dislodged.
232 If the front weights and weight carrier are not installed, a tow pin is available for bolting directly to the front axle support.
233
3--148
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS LIQUID BALLAST Filling the front and rear tyres with liquid ballast is a convenient method of adding weight. A solution of calcium chloride and water is recommended. This gives a low freezing point and provides a higher density than plain water. IMPORTANT: In some countries it is illegal to use calcium chloride as a ballast solution for tyres. Ensure that you comply with the legal requirements of your country. Use cast iron weights as an alternative to liquid ballast. NOTE: When filling a tyre with calcium chloride/water solution the valve should be at the highest point on the wheel. The valve should be at the lowest point when checking or adjusting air pressure if the tyre contains liquid ballast. Special equipment is required to water ballast tyres. See your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for details. The following tables show the quantity of calcium chloride and water required for each tyre size option and is based on 0.6 kg of calcium chloride per litre of water. The figures in the table will give a 75% fill of the tyre. This calcium chloride/water solution will give protection from freezing down to an ambient temperature of --50°C (--58°F).
WARNING
When mixing the ballast solution it is imperative the calcium chloride flakes are added to the water and the solution stirred until the calcium chloride is dissolved. Never add water to calcium chloride as considerable heat is generated. If the flakes should contact the eyes, wash the eyes immediately with clean, cold water for at least 5 minutes. Consult a doctor as soon as possible. NOTE: Liquid ballasting of front tyres on a 2WD installation is not recommended.
3--149
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Front Tyre Ballast Tyre Size
16.9R -480/70R -540/65R -600/65R -14.9R -16.9R -480/70R -540/65R -600/60R -14.9 -320/85R -380/85R -420/85R -320/85R --
28 28 28 28 30 30 30 30 30 34 34 34 34 38
Water
Calcium Chloride kg.
Total Weight of solution per tyre kg.
Litres
Water US gallons
219 222 257 344 174 230 234 273 309 193 136 188 270 116
131 133 154 206 104 138 140 163 185 115 81 112 162 69
350 355 411 550 278 368 374 436 494 308 217 300 432 185
Water
Calcium Chloride
Litres
kg.
Total Weight of solution per tyre kg.
US gallons
429 467 510 591 648 352 453 420 496 526 577 245 244 359 439 395 153 162
257 280 306 354 388 211 271 252 297 315 346 147 146 215 263 237 91 97
686 747 816 945 1036 563 724 672 793 841 923 392 390 574 702 632 244 259
113 124 135 156 171 93 120 111 131 139 153 65 65 95 116 104 40 43
Calcium Chloride lb.
Total Weight of solution per tyre lb.
58 59 68 91 46 61 62 72 82 51 36 50 71 31
290 294 340 454 231 304 309 361 409 255 180 248 357 154
774 785 907 1213 616 812 825 965 1092 680 481 663 952 411
Water
Calcium Chloride lb.
Total Weight of solution per tyre lb.
567 617 674 781 856 465 599 555 655 694 763 324 323 474 580 522 202 214
1513 1648 1800 2285 2174 1241 1599 1481 1749 1853 2036 865 862 1265 1548 1393 539 571
Rear Tyre Ballast Tyre Size
20.8R 580/70R 650/65R 650/75R 710/70R 18.4R 20.8R 580/70R 620/70R 650/65R 710/60R 14.9R 420/80R 480/80R 520/85R 18.4R 320/90R 320/90R
3--150
-------------------
38 38 38 38 38 42 42 42 42 42 42 46 46 46 46 46 50 54
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TYRE INFLATION Upon receiving your tractor, check the air pressure in the tyres and re--check every 50 hours or weekly. The tyres fitted to your tractor may be of the tubed or tubeless type.
•
Do not re-inflate a tyre that has been run flat or seriously under-inflated until it has been inspected for damage by a qualified person.
•
When checking tyre pressures, inspect the tyres for damaged tread and side walls. Neglected damage will lead to early tyre failure.
Torque wheel to axle nuts to specification after re--installing the wheel. Check nut tightness daily until torque stabilises.
•
Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that a tyre may carry.
Refer to tractor weighting section before adding ballast to the tyres.
•
Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, level surface.
•
Ensure the jack has adequate capacity to lift your tractor.
•
Use jack stands or other suitable blocking to support the tractor while repairing tyres.
•
Do not put any part of your body under the tractor or start the engine while the tractor is on the jack.
•
Never hit a tyre or rim with a hammer.
•
Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repair or use a damaged rim.
•
Do not inflate a tyre unless the rim is mounted on the tractor or is secured so that it will not move if the tyre or rim should suddenly fail.
•
When fitting a new or repaired tyre, use a clip--on valve adaptor with a remote gauge that allows the operator to stand clear of the tyre while inflating it. Use a safety cage, if available.
Do not exceed the recommended load for the tyre pressures in use, see the following page for details. Do not over or under inflate the tyres.
DANGER
Inflating or servicing tyres can be dangerous. Whenever possible, trained personnel should be called in to service or install tyres. In any event, to avoid the possibility of serious or fatal injury, follow the safety precautions below:
•
Never attempt tyre repairs on a public road or highway.
•
Do not inflate steering tyres above the manufacturer’s maximum pressure shown on the tyre or beyond the maximum shown in the Tyre Pressure and Load tables if the tyre is not marked with the maximum pressure.
3--151
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS (Radial tyres)
1
Radial tyre performance is denoted by a Load Index and Speed Symbol replacing the Ply Rating commonly found on cross ply tyres. Figure 234 shows typical markings to be found on the side wall of radial ply tyres.
138 B
141 A8 2
NOTE: Radial tyres will have a speed symbol of ‘A8’ and/or ’B’ which identifies the maximum speed rating for that tyre. Tyres marked with the A8 symbol are suitable for speeds up to 40km/h (25 MPH), those marked with a ’B’ symbol may be operated at speeds of 50k/mh (31 MPH).
4
3
MAX LOAD AT 40 KM/H 2575 KGS AT 1.6 BAR REPLACES 10 P.R.
5 234
The maximum load that may be carried by the tyre is dependent upon the Load Index shown on the side wall. In the following charts the loads given are for individual tyres operated at speeds up to 40 or 50 km/h (25 or 31 MPH). The two right--hand columns indicate the maximum permissible load per tyre at speeds of 40 or 50 km/h (25 or 31 MPH).
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Load Index Speed Symbol for 40 km/h (25 MPH) Speed Symbol for 50 km/h (31 MPH) Maximum load/inflation pressure at 40 km/h (25MPH) Old ply rating mark
WARNING
When operating at high road speeds, tyre pressures and maximum load capacities advised by the tyre manufacturer should be strictly adhered to. Consult your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for the correct pressures and loads for the tyres fitted to your tractor. Inflation Pressure -- bar Tyre y Si Size
Load Index Inde
1.0
1.2
20 8R x 38 20.8R
153A8 (150B)
-
-
580/70R38
155A8 (155B)
3095
3355
3095
3355
650/75R38
169A8 (169B)
3800
710/70R38
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
40 k/mh
50 k/mh
3350
-
Load Capacity per TYRE (kg) -- 30k/mh -
-
-
2210
2410
2460
2865
3140
3350
-
-
2430
2650
2900
3150
3450
3650
3615
3875
-
-
-
-
-
-
3615
3875
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4250
-
4800
5200
5800
6200
-
-
3800
-
4250
-
4800
5200
5800
6200
-
-
171A8 (171B)
4190
4560
4930
5300
5515
5725
5940
6150
-
-
4190
4560
4930
5300
5515
5725
5940
6150
-
-
20 8R x 42 20.8R
155A8 (152B)
-
-
-
-
2275
2550
2800
3050
3320
3550
-
-
-
-
2500
2800
3075
3350
3650
3875
18 4R x 46 18.4R
158A8 (158B)
2750
-
3470
-
4000
4120
4400
4500
-
-
2750
-
3470
-
4000
4120
4400
4500
-
-
3650 3875
-
3875 6200
-
6200 6150
-
6150 3550
-
3875 4250
-
4250
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
3--152
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS Inflation Pressure -- lbf/in2 Tyre y Si Size
Load IIndex d
15
17
20
23
26
29
31
20 8R x 38 20.8R
153A8 (150B)
-
-
-
-
4872
5313
5423
-
-
-
-
5357
5842
580/70R38
155A8 (155B)
6823
7396
7969
8542
-
6823
7396
7969
8542
650/75R38
169A8 (169B)
8377
-
9369
8377
-
710/70R38
171A8 (171B)
9237
10251
9237
10251
20 8R x 42 20.8R
155A8 (152B)
-
18 4R x 46 18.4R
158A8 (158B)
35
37
40
25 MPH
31 MPH
6316
6922
7385
7385
-
6393
6944
7605
8046
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10582
11463
12786
13668
-
-
9369
-
10582
11463
12786
13668
-
-
10868
11684
12158
12621
13095
13558
-
-
10868
11684
12158
12621
13095
13558
-
-
-
-
-
5015
5621
6172
6723
7319
7826
-
-
-
-
5511
6172
6779
7385
8046
8542
6062
-
7649
-
8818
9082
9700
9920
-
-
6062
-
7649
-
8818
9082
9700
9920
-
-
Load Capacity per TYRE (lbs.) -- 18.6 MPH
8046 8542
-
8542 13668
-
13668 13558
-
13558 7826
-
8542 9369
-
9369
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
SYMBOL MARKED RADIAL TYRES (North America Only) Conventional sized radial agricultural tractor drive tyres are marked with *, **,or *** symbols. The maximum load rating for tyres marked with a * is calculated at 18 psi inflation pressure. Tyres marked with ** or *** have maximum load carrying capacities at pressures of 24 psi and 30 psi respectively. For information regarding specific inflation pressures and load carrying capacities for the tyres fitted to your tractor, consult your authorised dealer.
235 1. 2. 3. 4.
Load symbol Maximum recommended load at marked pressure Maximum load at 20 MPH Previous ply ratings
3--153
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS NOTES
3--154
SECTION 4 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION
WARNING SYMBOLS
This section gives full details of the service procedures necessary to maintain your tractor at peak efficiency. The lubrication and maintenance chart on page 4--10 provides a ready reference to these requirements, each operation being numbered for easy reference.
A number of maintenance items are represented by symbols that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. For more information see page 2--73.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CONTENTS The subjects covered in this section are as listed below. A full index is provided at the back of this book.
Read and observe all safety precautions listed in ‘Servicing the Tractor’ in the Introduction section at the front of this Manual.
Page
NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly.
Guard removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
CAUTION
Do not check, lubricate, service or make adjustments to the tractor with the engine running.
Subject
Fuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2 Lubrication and maintenance chart . . . . . . . . . 4--10 Lubricants and coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--9 When the warning symbol appears . . . . . . . . 4--11 10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--15
DURING THE FIRST 50 HOURS OPERATION
50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--17 100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--28
In addition to the regular maintenance operations listed, check the following items every 10 hours or daily during the first 50 hours of operation: •
Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level
•
Wheel nuts for tightness
•
Front axle hub oil levels
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and, where applicable, extend all cylinders before checking oil levels. With some wheel equipment fitted, it may be necessary to raise the front or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before checking the oil.
300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--29 600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--33 1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--40 1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--46 Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--54 General maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . 4--55 Cleaning the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--71 Protecting Electronic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--72 Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--73
4--1
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE THE FIRST 50-HOUR SERVICE
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
At the first 50-hour service, ensure that the service operations are carried out by your authorised dealer. The items are listed in the ‘First 50-Hour Service’ checklist in Section 8.
The chart on page 4--10 lists the intervals when routine checks, lubrication, service and/or adjustments should be performed. Use the chart as a quick reference guide when servicing the tractor. The operations follow the chart.
Both 50 Hour Service sheets should be signed by yourself and your dealer and one copy retained by the dealer for their records (Dealer’s copy). IMPORTANT: Items listed in the first 50-hour check are important. If not performed, early component failure and reduced tractor life may result. PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION To prevent contamination when changing oils, filters, etc., always clean the area around filler caps, level and drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior to removal. Before connecting remote cylinders, ensure that oil contained within them is clean, has not degenerated due to long storage and is of the correct grade. To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess grease from the fitting after greasing. FLEXIBILITY OF MAINTENANCE INTERVALS The intervals listed in the lubrication and maintenance chart are guidelines to be used when operating in normal working conditions. Adjust the intervals for environmental and working conditions. Intervals should be shortened under adverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty) working conditions. ENGINE FUEL INJECTOR MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT: The fuel injectors on your tractor are electronically controlled and do not require periodic servicing or adjustment.
4--2
FUELLING THE TRACTOR
CAUTION
When handling diesel fuel, observe the following: Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under no circumstances should gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or dieselhol (a mixture of diesel fuel and alcohol) be added to diesel fuel because of increased fire or explosion risks. In a closed container such as a fuel tank they are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do not use these blends. Additionally, dieselhol is not approved due to possible inadequate lubrication of the fuel injection system. •
Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of debris.
•
Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduce overnight condensation.
•
Never take the cap off or refuel with the engine running.
•
Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling the fuel tank.
•
Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room for expansion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with a genuine original equipment cap and tighten securely.
•
Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE FUEL REQUIREMENTS The quality of fuel used is an important factor for dependable performance and satisfactory engine life. Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and non-corrosive to fuel system parts. Be sure to use fuel of a known quality from a reputable supplier. Use Number 2-D in temperatures above --7° C (20° F). Use Number 1-D in temperatures below --7° C (20° F). To obtain optimum combustion and minimum engine wear, the fuel selected for use should conform to the application and property requirements outlined in the following ‘Diesel Fuel Selection Chart’.
For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D fuel whenever temperatures allow. Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below --7° C (20° F). The cold temperatures will cause the fuel to thicken, which may prevent the engine from running. (If this happens, contact your dealer.) To be sure that a fuel meets the required properties, enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. The responsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplier as well as the fuel user. FUEL STORAGE Take the following precautions to ensure that stored fuel is kept free of dirt, water and other contaminants.
DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART General Fuel Classification
Final Boiling Point (max)
Cetane Rating (min)
Sulphur Content (max)
No. 1-D
288° C (550° F)
40*
0.3%
No. 2-D
357° C (675° F)
40
0.5%
•
Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel and form compounds that will contaminate the injection pump and injectors.
•
Install bulk storage tanks away from direct sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.
•
To facilitate moisture and sediment removal, provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end opposite the outlet pipe.
*When continually operating at low temperatures or high altitude, a minimum cetane rating of 45 is required.
•
If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank filler neck when refuelling.
Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.5% requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the maintenance schedule.
•
Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels are not held over and used in winter.
NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather conditions below 0°C (32°F) are encountered or when continuously operating at an altitude above 5,000 ft. (1500 m) use Number 1-D fuel.
The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above 1.3% is not recommended.
4--3
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE FILLING THE FUEL TANK 1. Clean the area around the fuel cap (1) to prevent dirt from entering tank and contaminating the fuel. 2. Remove the cap and place in a clean area during refuelling. The cap is attached to the fuel tank by a chain to prevent loss. 3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuel cap. NOTE: The right-hand tank is filled via the filler on the left-hand tank. Fuel filler cap The fuel filler cap on your tractor is of the vented type, should it become lost or damaged always replace it with one of the same type. Consult your authorised dealer. Fuel Capacity Left tank Right tank
4--4
330 litres (87.1 U.S. galls) 110 litres (29.0 U.S. galls)
1
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE PROTECTIVE GUARDS
CAUTION
Guards are fitted for your protection, if they are removed for access to service items, they must be replaced before operating the tractor.
ENGINE HOOD For safety the hood must be closed and correctly latched before operating the tractor. The hood is hinged at the rear to provide easy access to the engine area for routine maintenance. Two gas struts (located under the hood) assist in raising the hood to either of two positions. A safety stay holds the hood in the selected position. To open the hood, depress the release button (2), and raise the hood using the grab handle (1). The gas struts will take over and raise the hood to the first position secured by the nylon retaining strap located at the front of the hood. All routine maintenance operations may be performed with the hood raised to this position.
2
Additional guards are provided to prevent the fingers being trapped by the fan/air conditioner drive belt when the hood is lowered to the operating position. Should it become necessary to raise the hood to its full extent, unclip the retaining strap (1) from its anchor bracket and, holding firmly onto the strap, allow the hood to raise fully on the gas struts. NOTE: Raising the hood to full height is only necessary for service requirements that are best left to your dealer. To close the hood, pull it fully down ensuring the retaining strap has been re--fitted to the anchor bracket. An audible click will signal engagement of the locking catch. Check that the hood is properly closed.
3
4--5
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Engine Side Panels The engine side panels are secured by two turn lock screws (1). Using a screwdriver with a broad blade, turn the screws 1/4 turn anti--clockwise to release. Hold the panel at the centre, pull outwards and slide towards the front of the tractor until it clears the front and rear support pins. To refit the side panels, reverse the above procedure ensuring both screws are locked before operating the tractor. 4 RIGHT--HAND FOOTSTEPS The right--hand footsteps on your tractor are mounted on a hinged support bracket. For improved access to the hydraulic oil filter(s), battery, etc., the footsteps can be quickly lowered by releasing the two locking catches (1). To release the catches, lift and rotate to the horizontal position. Pull the steps outward from the top and allow to drop downwards until fully lowered. When raising the steps to the working position, ensure both catches are securely locked.
4--6
5
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE RELAY AND FUSE PANEL COVER The moulded panel on the right hand side of the cab may be easily removed for service. Remove the four screws (1) and remove the panel to gain access to the relays and connectors.
6 Fuse Box Cover To gain access to the fuses , undo the two retaining screws (1) from the panel on the right--hand side of the cab.
7 Maxi Fuse Box The maxi fuses are mounted on the battery support frame. To access the fuses, lower the right--hand footsteps and release the battery cover by turning the locking catch (1) anti--clockwise. Lift the cover from the two guide pins which retain and support the rear of the cover. When replacing the battery cover ensure the two slots at the rear engage with the support lugs on the carrier frame. 8
4--7
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
LUBRICANTS AND COOLANTS
--30 °C --25 °C
--15 °C
+20 °C
+40 °C
Lubricants The correct engine oil viscosity grade is dependent upon ambient temperature. Refer to the chart on the right when selecting oil for your tractor engine.
SAE 5W--30
SAE 10W--30
NOTE: In areas where prolonged periods of extreme temperatures are encountered, local lubricant practices are acceptable; such as the use of SAE 5W30 in extreme low temperatures or SAE 50 in extreme high temperatures. --22 °F
Sulphur in Fuel The engine oil and filter change period are shown in section 4. However, locally available fuel may have a high sulphur content, in which case the engine oil and filter change period should be adjusted as follows:-Sulphur Content % Oil Change Period Below 0.5 Normal From 0.5 -- 1.0 Half the normal Above 1.0 One quarter normal. NOTE:Theuseof fuelwithasulphurcontent above 1.3% is not recommended. Coolants To reduce the amount of deposits and corrosion, the water used in the cooling system must comply with the following values. Total Hardness: 300 ppm
Chloride: 100 ppm
Sulphate: 100 ppm
IMPORTANT: See Operation 30, page 4--46, regarding use of coolant inhibitor where the above mentioned antifreeze is not available. In those hot countries where antifreeze is not available, use clean water only. NOTE: See Operation 30, page 4--46, for further details before topping up or changing the engine coolant.
4--8
SAE 15W--40
--13 °F
+5 °F
+68 °F
+104 °F
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE LUBRICANT AND COOLANT SPECIFICATION RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND APPLICATIONS
Akcela Specification
International Specification
Engine Oil SAE 15W--40 SAE 10W--30
No. 1 Engine Oil MS 1121
ACEA E7/E5 API CI--4/CH--4 CUMMINS CES 20078/77/76/72
Transmission, Rear Axle and Hydraulic System Oil SAE 10W30 -- Full Powershift (All models)
Nexplore
MAT 3525
Front Wheel Drive Oil SAE 10W30 -- Axle (All models) -- Hubs (less brakes, per hub) -- Hubs (with brakes, per hub)
Nexplore
MAT 3525
14 Litres (14.8 U.S. qts.) 2.15 Litres (2.3 U.S. qts.)
Nexplore
MAT 3525
As Required
Front PTO Gearbox Oil SAE 10W30 Engine Radiator Coolant System Capacity *Water *Coolant
Air Conditioning Compressor Oil Low Viscosity Oil SP10 Brake Oil Grease Fittings and Bearings
Approximate Quantities 15 Litres (3.96 U.S. gals.)
100 Litres (26.4 U.S. gal)
Premium Antifreeze MS 1710
Ethylene glycol
n/a
PAG--E13, ISO100 Viscosity
LHM Fluid
ISO 7308
Multi--Purpose Grease 251 HEP
NLG1 2--251 EP--M
26 Litres (6.9 U.S. gal.) 50% 50%
As Required
As Required As Required
*NOTE Use antifreeze (50%) plus clean, soft water (50%). In order to reduce deposits and corrosion, water used in the cooling system should not exceed the following limits:
4--9
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
Service Interval
When a warning symbol b l appears Every 10 hours or d il daily
Everyy 50 hours
Every 100 hours
Everyy 300 hours
Every 600 hours
Every 1200 hours or annually ll
Every 1200 hours or two years
Every 3 years
General maintenance
Operation No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 *18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 -
Maintenance Requirement
Engine air cleaner outer element Fuel filter/water separator Engine coolant level Engine oil level Windscreen washer reservoir fluid level (where fitted) Air reservoir(s) (air operated trailer brakes) Radiator, intercooler, oil cooler and air conditioner condenser Cab air filters All grease fittings Front and rear wheel nut torque Tyre pressures and condition Air brake compressor drive belts (where fitted) Battery electrolyte level (tropical climates) Poly V--belt Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level Parking brake Front gearbox oil level Engine oil and filter Hydraulic and transmission oil filters Engine air cleaner outer element Engine air intake connections Pre--fuel and secondary fuel filter elements Four wheel drive front axle and hubs oil level Cab air filters Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic oil and filter FWD axle differential oil FWD axle hub oil Front gearbox oil Battery electrolyte level (temperate climates) Engine coolant Engine air cleaner inner element Engine valve tappet clearances Engine breather filter Air brake dryer reservoir Air conditioning system Bleeding the fuel system Transmission calibration Footbrakes Automatic pick-up hitch Remote control valve drain bottle(s) Cab suspension adjustment Headlight and worklamp adjustment Bulb replacement Fuse replacement Cleaning the tractor Storing the tractor
C h e c k
C l e a n
X X X X X
X
X
X X
L u b e
C h a n g e
A d j u s t
D r a i n
X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X
X X X X X X X
X X X
X X X X X X
X
X
X X X
X
X X X X X X
X
X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X x x
x x
x
Page No.
4--11 4--13 4--14 4--15 4--16 4--16 4--17 4--18 4--20 4--26 4--27 4--28 4--29 4--30 4--31 4--32 4--32 4--33 4--35 4--36 4--37 4--38 4--39 4--40 4--41 4--42 4--43 4--43 4--44 4--46 4--50 4--51 4--52 4--53 4--54 4--55 4--56 4--58 4--59 4--59 4--60 4--61 4--62 4--65 4--71 4--73
* Oil change interval will be reduced if fuel has a high sulphur content or if the tractor is operated in extremely cold temperatures.
4--10
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE WHEN THE WARNING SYMBOL APPEARS OPERATION 1 SERVICE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER ELEMENT Service the outer element when the restriction indicator symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display or every 600 hours, whichever comes first. If the symbol appears, perform the service within one hour of operation. IMPORTANT: Service the outer element only when the restriction indicator symbol appears or at the recommended service intervals. Cleaning the filter too frequently will decrease the service life of the filter.
9 The dry air cleaner, which is located under the left-hand side of the hood, consists of an inner and outer paper element contained within an easily accessible housing. See Figure 9. 1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 9, and lift off the air cleaner assembly cover. 2. Remove the outer element (1) Fig. 10 from the air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then pull the filter straight out of the housing ,not at an angle, ensuring the inner element remains in place.
10
IMPORTANT: Do not disturb or remove the inner element. 3. Examine the inside of the outer element. If dust is present, the outer element is defective and must be replaced. The inner element (1) should also be replaced at this time. 4. Clean the outer element using either method A or B, depending on the element’s condition.
11
4--11
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Method A Lightly tap the ends of the element against the palm of the hand. See Figure 12. IMPORTANT: Do not tap the element against a hard surface as this will damage the element.
12
Method B Use compressed air, not exceeding 2 bar (30 lbf/in2). Insert the air line nozzle inside the element. Hold the nozzle 150 mm (6 in.) from the element and blow the dust from the inside through the element to the outside. See Figure 13.
WARNING
Wear eye protection and a face mask when carrying out this operation. 13 5. Examine the element for damage by placing a light inside the element. See Figure 14. Discard the element if pin pricks of light can be seen or if there are areas where the paper appears thin. 6. Check the element material for bunching; the metal casing for distortion and the rubber gasket for damage. Discard the filter element if it is damaged. 7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not damage the inner filter element. Ensure that the inner end of the housing is clean and smooth, to ensure a good seating for the rubber seal on the element.
4--12
14
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 8. Ensure the inner element (1) is located correctly in the air cleaner assembly before installing the outer element. Refit the end cover and securely latch the three retaining clips. If the restriction indicator light continues to illuminate after cleaning the element, the outer or inner element may need replacing. See operations 20 and 31.
15 OPERATION 2 DRAIN FUEL SYSTEM WATER SEPARATOR IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean the area to be worked on to prevent contamination. If the symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display, this signals the presence of water in the fuel sedimenter, drain the fuel filter and sedimenter assembly, as follows: 1. Open the drain tap on the sedimenter/filter assembly by rotating the collar (1) approximately 180° on the water sensor switch. Contaminated fuel will drain from the tube (2). NOTE: To loosen the drain tap (1) it may be necessary to remove the sensor wire from the terminal to allow the knob to rotate.
16
2. Allow contaminated fuel to drain until only clean fuel runs out. Catch the fuel in a suitable container and dispose of properly. Close the drain tap. The fuel system is self bleeding and should not require priming after draining the sedimenter. If priming is required, turn to page 4--55 for details on priming the fuel system.
4--13
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY (whichever occurs first) OPERATION 3 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the recovery tank (2) when the engine is cold. The coolant level should be above the bottom line (3) on the recovery tank. If coolant is required, remove the cap (1) and add a 50/50 water and antifreeze mixture as specified on page 4--9 of this Manual.
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which is controlled by the pressure cap on the coolant expansion tank. It is dangerous to remove the cap while the system is hot. When the system has cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the pressure cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to escape before fully removing the cap. Never remove the cap from the top of the radiator unless the expansion tank pressure cap has first been removed.
CAUTION
Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions outlined on the coolant filter and antifreeze container. NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank, the coolant level must be checked in the radiator. Check the system for leaks and repair as required. Remove the radiator filler cap when the system is cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level to just below the top of the filler neck. Install the cap and add coolant to the recovery tank, as described above.
4--14
17
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 4 CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on a level surface and after the engine has been stopped for a minimum of five minutes. 1. Remove the dipstick from the left-hand side of the engine, wipe clean and re-insert fully. 2. Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level. The oil level should fall between the high and low level notches on the dipstick. 3. If more oil is required, remove the filler cap and add fresh oil until the level is between the two notches on the dipstick. The quantity of oil represented by theupperandlowernotchesisapproximately4.0 litres (4.2 U.S.qts).
18
NOTE: Do not fill above the upper notch on the dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not operate the engine with the oil level below the lower notch. 4. Re-install the filler cap. See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification and viscosity.
4--15
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 5 CHECK WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR (where fitted) The reservoir for the windscreen washers is located beneath the rear of the cab on the left-hand side. The same reservoir is utilised for both front and rear windscreen washers. Lift off the cap (1) and fill with washer solvent solution up to the bend in the filler neck. In cold weather, use a solvent with anti-freeze properties.
19 OPERATION 6 DRAIN THE AIR RESERVOIR(S) (Air operated trailer brakes -- where fitted) Every 10 hours or daily, whichever occurs first, drain both air reservoirs. The reservoirs are mounted each side of the tractor in front of the rear axle. (Rear wheel has been removed for clarity) Firmly apply the tractor parking brake, block all wheels and switch off the engine. There is a plunger on the base of each reservoir. To drain a reservoir, move the plunger (1) laterally, in any direction, and allow air pressure and any accumulated water to escape. The reservoirs will recharge with air when the engine is restarted. 20
4--16
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE EVERY 50 HOURS Complete the preceding operations plus the following: OPERATION 7 CLEAN THE RADIATOR, INTERCOOLER, OIL COOLERS AND AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER CORES Check all cores for chaff accumulation or blockage. If any is noted , clean as follows:
CAUTION Wear eye protection and protective clothing during the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders so they are not struck by flying particles. NOTE: Tractors with front PTO will have a small additional oil cooler fitted. 1. For cleaning, use compressed air or a pressure washer not exceeding 7 bar (100 lbf/in2). 2. The air conditioner condenser (1) Figure 21, is located in front of the engine intercooler and transmission oil cooler. To gain access to the rear of the condenser first release the fasteners (2) by pulling forwards as shown, then swing the condenser outwards.
21
3. Access to the rear of the intercooler and oil cooler is gained by releasing the spring clip (3) and, using the grab handle (4), pulling both coolers upwards and outwards. The coolers will ’lock’ in the raised position. 4. Direct the air or water through each core from the back to the front. Clean the radiator first, then the air conditioner condenser and, finally, the driveline oil cooler. Carefully straighten any bent fins. 5. To lower the intercooler and oil cooler grasp the handle (3) and pull upwards, simultaneously pushing in the top of the intercooler. As the coolers begin to lower allow the grab handle to drop. Re--attach the spring clip to the hook and clamp securely.
22
NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily substances, apply a detergent solution and remove it with a pressure washer.
4--17
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 8 CLEAN THE CAB AIR FILTERS Air drawn into the cab by the blower fan passes through three filters, two externally mounted, and one recirculation filter located inside the cab. Before servicing the filters, switch off the blower and close the roof hatch, all windows and one door. Forcibly close the other door. The resulting back pressure will dislodge most of the loose dirt from the underside of the external filters. NOTE: In humid conditions, do not switch on the blower prior to servicing the filter. Damp particles drawn into the filter may be difficult to remove without washing.
23
External Filters To remove the external filter, unscrew the securing clip (1) Figure 23, from the front end of the filter cover (2). Remove the cover (2) Figure 24, and the filter element (3). NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper surface. Take care not to damage the element during removal. Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from the upper surface through the element to the underside. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm) from the element to prevent damage to the filter media Clean all filter chambers with a damp, lint-free cloth. Re--install the filter elements with the clean side uppermost and re-install the covers.
4--18
24
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Internal Filter To remove an internal filter, loosen the retaining screws (1) anti clockwise and remove the filter cover.
25 Remove the cover (1) and extract the filter from the housing. NOTE: The filter (2) is made of specially treated media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper surface. Take care not to damage the element during removal. Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from the clean surface through the element to the dirty side. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm) from the element to prevent damage to the filter media. 26
4--19
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 9 ALL GREASE FITTINGS Oil all pivots and apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown in Figures 27 to 44 inclusive. See page 4--9 for the correct grease specification. Right and Left-hand Lift Arm Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown.
27 Right and Left-hand Lift Rod Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as shown. NOTE: Tractors equipped with a hydraulically adjusted lift rod on the right--hand side will not have this lubrication fitting.
28 Top Link Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as shown.
29
4--20
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 2WD Axle, Outer Steering Components and Front Hubs Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown. (Wheel removed for clarity). NOTE: The illustration identifies the right side lubrication fitting, this is repeated on the right side of the axle.
30 2WD Axle, Centre Steering Components Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown.
31 Front Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as shown.
32 Rear Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as shown.
33 4--21
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Front Trunnion Pin, Suspension Upper and Lower Damper Pivot (suspended 4WD axle) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown.
34 Panhard Rod Pivot (suspended 4WD axle) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as shown.
35 Suspension Arm (suspended 4WD axle) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting at the rear of the suspension arm, located beneath the tractor, in front of the transmission.
36 Drive Shaft Universal Joint (suspended axles only) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as shown. NOTE: The grease fittings shown is at the rear of the drive shaft. On some models, the shield completely covers the drive shaft and a hole is provided for access.
37 4--22
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 4WD Steering Cylinders and Track Rods Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown. NOTE: The left-hand end of the axle is shown. There are similar grease fittings on the right-hand steering cylinder and fender mount.
38 4WD Hub Steering and Swivel Bearings Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown. NOTE: The right-hand end of the axle is shown. There are similar grease fittings on the left-hand steering cylinder and track control rod. IMPORTANT: Tractors with steering angle sensor have a sealed bearing on the right--hand upper swivel and therefore do not have a grease fitting. 39 Rear Tow Hitch (auto engagement type) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as shown.
40 Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown.
41 4--23
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and swivel coupling) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown.
42 Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and K 80mm ball) Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown.
43 Heavy Duty Roller Drawbar Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown.
44
4--24
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Front Hitch Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown. NOTE: The lubrication fittings shown are viewed from the right side of the tractor, three more fittings can be seen from the left side of the tractor.
45 Dynamic Fender Pivot Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as shown.
46
4--25
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 10 CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL NUTS Check the front and rear wheel nuts for tightness using a torque wrench (with a torque multiplier, where necessary). The specified torque figures are shown in the accompanying table: Two wheel drive -Front disc to hub bolts
210Nm (155 lbf. ft.)
Four wheel drive -- Adjustable front wheels
Front disc to hub nuts
210 Nm (155 lbf. ft.)
Front disc to rim nuts
250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
47 Manual adjust rear wheels -- Flanged axle Disc to hub nuts
260 Nm (190 lbf. ft.)
Disc to rim nuts
250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Bar axle Split wedge bolts with cast wheel centre with 10 bolt hub
300 Nm (220 lbf. ft.) 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to hub nuts with 10 bolt hub
500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to rim nuts (all)
250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
4--26
48
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 11 CHECK TYRE PRESSURES AND TYRE CONDITION Check and adjust the front and rear tyre pressures. Inspect the tread and sidewalls for damage. Adjust the tyre pressures to suit the load being carried. See ‘Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads’ in Section 3. NOTE: If the tyres are ballasted with a calcium chloride/water solution, use a special tyre gauge as the solution will corrode a standard-type gauge. Check pressure with the valve stem at the bottom.
49
4--27
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE EVERY 100 HOURS carry out the following checks : OPERATION 12 COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT TENSION (Air operated trailer brakes -- where fitted) Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt, install a new belt.
50
4--28
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE EVERY 300 HOURS carry out the preceding checks plus the following: OPERATION 13 BATTERY ELECTROLITE CHECK IMPORTANT: This operation applies to the battery on tractors operating in tropical climates. Tractors operating in temperate climates should have the battery electrolyte level checked every 1200 hours or 12 months. To gain access to the battery, release the step frame locking catches (1), pull outwards on the frame and allow the steps to lower fully. Release the battery cover by turning the locking catch (2) anti--clockwise. Lift the cover from the two guide pins which retain and support the rear of the cover.
51
Unscrew and remove the six vent plugs from the top of the top of the battery. Check that the electrolyte level is above the top of the separator plates in each cell. If necessary, top up with distilled or de-mineralised water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other source. IMPORTANT: In the event of the battery being severely discharged, such that the terminal voltage is below 7 volts, recovery will require a special charging procedure. See your authorised dealer.
52
4--29
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 14 INSPECT POLY V--BELT Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt, install a new belt. Ensure that the belt is correctly located on the pulleys and check that the belt tensioner is operating correctly.
53
4--30
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 15 CHECK TRANSMISSION/REAR HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL
AXLE
AND
Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine shut off for at least five minutes. Check the oil level in the sight glass on the left hand side of the rear axle housing. Ensure that the the oil level is between the high and low marks (1), in the sight glass.
54 If necessary , remove the filler cap (1) and add oil, as required. See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification. IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and, where applicable, extend all cylinders before checking oil levels. With some front/rear wheel combinations, it may be necessary to raise the front or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before checking the oil.
55
4--31
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 16 ADJUST PARKING BRAKE Block the front wheels, jack up the rear of the tractor and support the rear wheels just clear of the ground. Unlatch the brake pedals. Apply the parking brake so that the 4th. notch of the ratchet is engaged. Remove or ease back the rubber boot, loosen the locknuts and turn the adjuster nuts on the operating cables until both wheels start to lock. Release the parking brake and ensure that both wheels are free to rotate. Re--apply the parking brake to ensure that the system operates freely. Tighten the locknuts. Road test, using the parking brake to stop the tractor. The tractor should stop in a straight line if the cables have been correctly adjusted.
56
OPERATION 17 CHECK FRONT PTO GEARBOX OIL LEVEL Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and ensure that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil and replace the plug. See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification.
57
4--32
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE EVERY 600 HOURS carry out the preceding checks plus the following: ENGINE OIL CHANGE IMPORTANT: Operation 22 depicts the normal 600 hour engine oil and filter change period. However, the oil change period may be affected by other factors: Cold Temperature Operation Engines operating in temperatures below -- 12 ° C (10 ° F) or in arduous conditions should have the oil changed every 300 hours of operation. (The oil filter need only be changed at the normal 600 hour service interval). Diesel Fuel Sulphur Content In some countries, locally available diesel may have a high sulphur content, in which case the oil and filter change period should be adjusted, as follows: •
Sulphur content between 0.5 and 1.0% -- change engine oil every 300 hours.
•
Sulphur content between 1.0 and 1.3% -- change engine oil every 150 hours.
OPERATION 18 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Warm the engine to operating temperature. Stop the engine, remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 58 and catch the oil in a suitable container. Unscrew and discard the oil filter (1).
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot engine oil. If the engine oil is extremely hot, allow it to cool to a moderately warm temperature before proceeding. To change the oil and filter: 1. Remove the engine oil drain plugs which are located at the rear of the sump on either side of the engine. Catch the oil in a suitable container and dispose properly.
58
2. Replace the drain plugs after the oil has drained.
4--33
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 3. Clean the oil filter area. Unscrew the oil filter (1) and discard. Catch any residual oil and dispose of properly. 4. Clean the new filter mounting surface. 5. Apply a thin coat of oil on the new filter sealing ring and install the filter. Turn until the sealing ring contacts the mounting surface, then tighten an additional 3/4 to 1 full turn. Do not overtighten.
59 6. Remove Dipstick/Filler cap and fill with the correct amount of fresh oil as indicated below. Ensure the oil is of the correct grade and viscosity. 7. Start the engine and run for 3 minutes at idle speed then stop the engine. 8. Check the drain plugs and oil filter areas for leaks. 9. Wait 5 minutes to allow the oil to drain into the crankcase, then check the oil level on the dipstick. The oil level should fall between the ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ on the dipstick. Add more oil as required. NOTE: Do not fill above the ‘MAX’ indicator on the dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not operate the engine with the oil level below the lower notch. 10. Re--install the dipstick/filler cap. See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification. Oil Capacity (including filter): All models
4--34
15.0 litres (3.96 U.S gals.)
60
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 19 CHANGE HYDRAULIC AND TRANSMISSION OIL FILTERS The type of hydraulic filters is dependent upon tractor specification. All the filters are installed under the right-hand side of the cab floor. There are two filters, the main filter (3) which has a replaceable cartridge, and the charge filter (1) which is a disposable type. Before changing a disposable filter, clean the area around the mounting plate and filter, then unscrew and discard safely. Clean the inlet channel and the face of the filter mounting. Smear clean oil around the rubber seal of the new filter and install on the tractor. Screw up until the faces just meet, then tighten a further 3/4 of a turn. Do not overtighten. Both types of main filter (3) have a replaceable cartridge. In Figure 61, access to the cartridge is gained by removing the three retaining nuts (2) on the filter head. Ensure filter cover is clean before installing the new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring before re--assembling to the tractor. Do not overtighten the retaining nuts.
61
Before changing the main filter cartridge in Figure 62, first release the air bleed valve (2) by unscrewing fully. This will allow air into the filter so that most of the oil can drain back into the hydraulic system. Wait a few moments and then remove the 19mm plug (5) from the filter casing and allow the oil to drain out. Using a 41mm socket or ring spanner, remove the filter support plate by turning approximately 45° to the left. Both plate and filter can now be removed from the tractor. Ensure the support plate is clean before installing the new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring and refit the assembly to the tractor. Ensure the plate locks into place and the lug (4) aligns correctly with the arrow on the filter casing.
62
4--35
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 20 CHANGE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER ELEMENT Remove the outer element (1) as described in Operation 1 and discard it. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a damp lint--free cloth on a probe, taking care not to damage the inner element. Install a new outer element.
63
4--36
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 21 CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS Working from both sides of the engine, check all intake system connection clamps for tightness. From the left--hand side of the engine, check the air cleaner intake connections at points (1) and (2) and the turbocharger to intercooler connections at points (2) and (4). Do not overtighten.
64 From the right--hand side of the engine, check the intercooler to inlet manifold connections at points (1) and (2). Do not overtighten. It is essential that the clean air side of the filtration system is sealing correctly at the connections (1) and (3).
65 From the right--hand side of the engine, check the exhaust aspirator connections at points (1) and (2) for proper sealing and the clamps for tightness.
66
4--37
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 22 CHANGE FUEL PRE--FILTER AND FUEL FILTER ELEMENTS FUEL PRE--FILTER IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean the area to be worked on to prevent contamination. The primary and secondary fuel filters are both of the disposable type. The primary filter incorporates a water drain on the base of the filter. 1. Unscrew and remove the drain tap (1) at the base of the primary filter/sedimenter. Allow the fuel to drain out. Catch the fuel in a suitable container and dispose of properly NOTE: To allow removal of the drain tap it may be necessary to remove the sensor wire. 2. Unscrew and remove the filter from the filter head and dispose of properly. 3. Install a new filter to the head assembly. 4. Before installing the new filter lightly coat the filter gasket with oil. 5. Rotate the filter until the filter gasket is touching the filter head. Then give the filter a further 3/4 turn to tighten to correct torque (15Nm). Do not overtighten. 6. Remove and replace the secondary fuel filter in the same manner. After replacing the fuel filters it will be necessary to prime the fuel system before starting the engine. See Operation 36, page 4--55.
4--38
67
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 23 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LUBRICATION Front Axle Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) Figure 68 and ensure that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil and replace the plug.
68 Front Hub Position a front wheel with the combined level/filler plug (1) at the 3 o’clock position, as shown. Remove the level/filler plug and ensure that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil until oil just overflows from the opening. Re-install the plug. Repeat on the other front wheel. See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification.
69
4--39
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (whichever occurs first) carry out the preceding checks plus the following: OPERATION 24 CHANGE CAB AIR FILTERS External Filters To remove an external filter, turn the quick release fastener 1/2 a turn anti--clockwise to free the front of the filter cover. Remove the cover and the filter element. Dispose of the filter elements properly. Clean both filter chambers with a damp, lint--free cloth. Install new filter elements. A flow direction arrow is moulded into the side of the filter. Install the filters with the arrow pointing upwards. Re--install the covers.
70
NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated media with a rubber sealing strip bonded around the sides. Take care not to damage the element during installation. Internal Filter To remove the internal filter turn captive screws (1) until the cover is loose.
71 Remove the filter cover and the filter element. Dispose of the filter element properly. Clean the filter chamber with a damp lint--free cloth. Install the new filter element making sure that the arrow on the filter points to the rear of the tractor. Re--install the filter cover.
72 4--40
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 25 CHANGE TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/HYDRAULIC OIL AND FILTERS Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and operate the hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park the tractor on level ground, lower the 3-point hitch and stop the engine. Apply the parking brake and block wheels on both sides.
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot oil. If oil is extremely hot, allow it to cool to a moderately warm temperature before proceeding. There are two drain plugs for the oil reservoir, one below the transmission and one below the rear axle. Both drain plugs must be removed using a hexagon key.
73
To change the oil: 1. Remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 73 and completely drain all oil into a suitable container. Dispose of the oil properly. 2. Re-install both drain plugs after the oil has drained. IMPORTANT: Perform Operation 19 (change hydraulic and transmission filters) before refilling with oil. 3. Remove the filler plug cap (1) Figure 74 and refill with new oil.
74
4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulic system. Fully raise the 3-point hitch. 5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes while checking the system for leaks. 6. Check the oil level by means of the sight glass (1). Add oil as required until the oil level is between the ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ marks. NOTE: Do not fill above the full mark. Oil Capacity: All models with Power Command transmission: 100 litres (26.4 U.S. gal.)
75
See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification.
4--41
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 26 CHANGE 4WD DIFFERENTIAL OIL Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park brake. To change the oil: 1. Remove the drain plug (1) Figure 76 and completely drain all oil into a suitable container. Dispose of the oil properly. 2. Re-install the drain plug. Remove the level/filler plug (1) Figure 77. 3. Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the level/filler plug hole. Re-install level/filler plug.
76
See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification. Oil Capacity: All models
14 litres (14.8 U.S. qts.)
77
4--42
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 27 CHANGE 4WD PLANETARY HUB OIL Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park brake. To change the oil: 1. Position the wheel so the filler/drain/level plug (1) is at the lowest point. Remove the plug and completely drain all oil into a suitable container. Dispose of the oil properly. 2. Rotate the wheel so that the combined level/filler plug (1) is at the 3 o’clock position, as shown. 3. Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the level/filler plug hole (3). Install the plug.
78
4. Repeat the process on the other hub. See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification. Oil Capacity (each hub): All models
2.15 litres (2.3 U.S. qts.)
OPERATION 28 CHANGE FRONT PTO GEARBOX OIL Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park brake. 1. Place a suitable container below the gearbox and remove the level plug (1) and drain plugs (2). Allow the oil to completely drain into the container and replace the drain plugs. Dispose of oil properly. 2. Refill the gearbox through the combined level/filler plug until the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. See page 4--9 for the correct oil specification.
79
4--43
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 29 BATTERY ELECTROLITE REMOVAL PROCEDURE
CHECK
AND
Checking the Electrolite IMPORTANT: This operation applies only to batteries on tractors operating in temperate climates. Tractors operating in tropical climates should have the battery electrolyte level checked every 300 hours. See operation 13. To gain access to the battery, release the locking catches (1), and pull the step frame outwards, allow to lower fully. 1. Release the battery cover by turning the catch (2) anti--clockwise. Lift the cover from the battery ensuring it clears the support pins at the rear of the battery carrier.
80
2. Unscrew and remove the six vent plugs (1) from the top of the top of the battery. Check the electrolyte level is above the top of the separator plates in each cell. If necessary top up with distilled or de-mineralised water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other source. To prevent the formation of corrosion the terminals should be cleaned and lightly coated with petroleum jelly (Vaseline or similar). IMPORTANT: In the event of the battery being severely discharged, such that the terminal voltage is below 7 volts, recovery will require a special charging procedure. See your authorised dealer.
4--44
81
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Battery Removal NOTE: If the battery is being removed, disconnect the battery leads before proceeding further. Always disconnect the lead from the negative terminal (1) first, place in a safe position and then disconnect the positive (+) lead. 1. Loosen the nuts (2) on the battery strap until the strap can be unhooked from the carrier base. 2. Remove the set screws (4) from the side plate (3) and lift off, taking care not to trap or damage the wiring on the Maxi Fuse block.
82
3. Slide the battery out of the carrier.
CAUTION
Tractor batteries are very heavy, ensure the battery is safely supported during the removal process. To refit the battery, reverse the above procedure. Ensure battery leads and cables are positioned so they do not become trapped or chafe on a sharp edges. Refit the battery cover.
4--45
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 2 YEARS (whichever occurs first) carry out the preceding checks plus the following: OPERATION 30 COOLING SYSTEM During manufacture, the engine cooling system is filled with a high quality antifreeze and water solution. The antifreeze contains a chemical inhibitor. This inhibitor increases and extends the protection offered by conventional antifreezes. The inhibitor will: •
Increase rust prevention.
•
Reduce scale formation.
•
Minimise cylinder wall erosion (pitting).
•
Reduce foaming of the coolant.
The chemical inhibitor must be replenished, at intervals, to maintain the optimum protection level. This protection is provided by draining and flushing the system and refilling with a 50% solution of Akcela Premium Antifreeze or, where this antifreeze is not available, with a measured dosage of chemical inhibitor. See the following text. Draining and Refilling the Cooling System
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which is controlled by the radiator pressure cap (1). It is dangerous to remove the pressure cap while the system is hot. When cool, use a thick cloth and turn the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to escape before fully removing the cap. Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions outlined on the antifreeze and inhibitor containers, where used. IMPORTANT: It is essential that an approved pressure cap is used. If the cap is mislaid or damaged, obtain a replacement from your dealer.
4--46
83
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 1. Turn the heater control knob to the maximum heat position (fully clockwise).
84 2. Disconnect the radiator lower hose and drain all the coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the coolant properly. NOTE: A special hose clamp is used on the engine coolant hoses, to loosen the clamp it will be necessary to remove the alloy cap from the head of the screw tensioner. Using a pair of pliers, carefully pull off the alloy cover, this will expose a conventional screw head. Turn anti--clockwise to loosen.
85 3. Remove the coolant drain plug (1) from the left hand rear of the engine block. Drain all the coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the coolant properly. 4. To increase the drainage rate, remove the radiator cap and recovery tank cap. 5. Flush the system with a commercial cooling system cleaner. Follow the instructions supplied with the cleaner. Drain the cleaner and let the engine cool. IMPORTANT: Never put cold coolant in a hot engine. The difference in temperature could cause the the block or head to crack.
86
4--47
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 6. Re--install the radiator lower hose.
Using Plain water
7. Fill the system with clean water and run the engine for 10 minutes, then drain all the water. Allow the engine to cool.
If you reside in a country where antifreeze is not available, use clean water premixed with 5% chemical inhibitor. The inhibitor is available from your authorised dealer.
8. Fill the system with a blend of antifreeze and clean soft water. Add coolant slowly through the radiator filler neck until the coolant reaches the bottom of the filler neck. NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill the radiator as slowly as possible thereby allowing any air pockets to disperse. The coolant to be used is dependent upon local availability. See the following text: Using Akcela Premium Antifreeze (MS1710) Use a solution of 50% clean water and 50% antifreeze. The inhibitor already in this antifreeze is sufficient to protect your engine for a further 1200 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
4--48
Following the instructions on the container, mix the recommended quantity of inhibitor with 28.5 litres (7.5 U.S. gal.) of clean water. This will provide more coolant mixture than is actually required. The excess coolant should be kept in a specially marked container and used for top up purposes.
WARNING
Inhibitor solution is irritating to eyes and skin . It contains buffered potassium hydroxide. •
Avoid contact with eyes repeated skin contact.
or prolonged or
•
Wear protective eyewear when using .
•
In case of contact with eyes, flush with water for 15 minutes and obtain medical attention.
•
Wash skin with soap and water after use.
•
Keep out of reach of children.
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE After Refilling the System -- All Coolant Solutions 1. Inspect cooling system hoses and connections for leaks. 2. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold fill mark (1). 3. Start the engine and run it until normal operating temperature is reached. NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is pumped around the system.
87
4. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool. 5. Remove the radiator cap (1) Figure 88 and add coolant to the radiator to bring the coolant level to the bottom of the filler neck. Install the radiator cap. Add coolant to the recovery tank as required to bring the level up to the cold mark (2). NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated immediately following this coolant change, run the engine for one hour to ensure that the antifreeze and/or chemical inhibitor is dispersed throughout the cooling system. Allow the engine to cool and make a final check to ensure that the coolant level is satisfactory. Coolant Capacity All models
Antifreeze: 26.0 litres (6.9 U.S. gal.)
Clean Water Specification: Total Hardness Chlorides Sulphates
88
Akcela Premium Anti--Freeze (MS1710) is available from your authorised dealer in the following quantities. Part No.
300 parts per million 100 parts per million 100 parts per million
1748 1502 1748 1900 1748 1100
(4x5 litre) (20 litre) (200 litre)
4--49
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 31 CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER INNER ELEMENT The air cleaner is accessible from the right--hand side of the engine 1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 89, and lift off the air cleaner assembly cover.
89 2. Remove the outer element (1) Fig. 90 from the air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then pull the filter straight out of the housing ,not at an angle, ensuring the inner element remains in place. NOTE: Examine the inside of the outer element. If dust is present, the outer element is defective and must be replaced.
90 3. Pull the inner element straight out of the housing and dispose of properly. 4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a damp lint--free cloth. 5. Install a new inner element and a new outer element (if required). Ensure both elements are correctly seated before replacing the housing cover. IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filter element properly could result in engine damage. Therefore it is recommended that the element be installed by an authorised dealer.
4--50
91
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 32 CHECK VALVE TAPPET CLEARANCE With the engine cold, ease the ventilation tube from the valve rocker cover after loosening the retaining clamp. Undo the retaining nuts and remove the valve cover. and check the valve clearance. The correct valve clearance for all models, Figure 92 , is: Inlet 0.25 +/ -- 0.05mm(0.009+/ -- 0.002in.) Exhaust 0.51 +/ -- 0.05mm(0.02+/ -- 0.002in.) Check the valve clearance for all engines as follows: Cylinder No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intake
--
--
*
--
*
*
Exhaust
--
*
--
*
--
*
92
Rotate the crankshaft and balance No. 1 cylinder valves. Adjust the valves marked by the asterisk (*) as shown in the table above: Cylinder No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intake
*
*
--
*
--
--
Exhaust
*
--
*
--
*
--
Rotate the crankshaft and balance No.6 cylinder valves. Adjust the valves marked by the asterisk (*) as shown in the table above:
4--51
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 33 CHANGE ENGINE BREATHER FILTER With the engine cold, ease the ventilation tube from the valve rocker cover after loosening the retaining clamp. Undo the retaining nuts and remove the valve cover. Remove the breather pipe elbow by turning 1/4 turn anti--clockwise and withdrawing from the valve cover. Loosen and remove the thumb screw (1) to release the filter assembly from inside the valve cover. NOTE: Should severe oil staining appear around the pressure regulator (2), it would indicate the breather filter requires replacing.
93
Remove the 3 screws (2) holding the pressure regulator (1) and extract both regulator and filter (3) from the valve cover. Thoroughly clean the valve cover before fitting the new regulator, filter and breather pipe. Tighten the regulator retaining screws to 5 Nm (3.6 lbf. ft.). Replace the valve cover on the engine using a new gasket and tighten the retaining nuts to 25 Nm (18.4 lbf. ft.).
94
4--52
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 34 CHANGE AIR BRAKE DRIER RESERVOIR Removing the Drier Reservoir Before attempting to change the drier reservoir (1), thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir to prevent debris from entering the air braking system. 1. Exhaust all air pressure in the system by opening the drain tap on the main air tank/s. 2. Using a filter release tool, unscrew and remove the drier reservoir. Dispose of properly according to local regulations.
95
Installing a New Drier Reservoir 1. Clean the seal flange on the drier body and the threaded pin, check for damage to the pin and the seal contact surface of the flange. 2. Lightly grease the sealing ring on the reservoir and the threaded pin on the drier body. 3. Screw the reservoir onto the drier body until the seal touches the contact surface of the flange. Tighten a further half--turn by hand. Tighten to a maximum of 15 Nm (11 lbf. ft.) DO NOT overtighten. 4. Pressurise the reservoir and check for leaks. If further tightening is necessary, depressurise the system before tightening. 5. Re--pressurise the air braking system and check again for leaks.
4--53
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE EVERY 3 YEARS carry out the following: OPERATION 35 SERVICE THE AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM After 3 seasons, the performance of the air conditioner (1) may to be reduced. At this time it is recommended to have the receiver/drier changed and the complete system checked by your authorised dealer using specialised equipment.
WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system has a boiling point of --12 ° C (10 ° F). •
Never expose any part of the air conditioner system to a direct flame or excessive heat because of the risk of fire or explosion.
•
Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the air conditioner system. escaping refrigerant will cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
•
If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38 ° C (90 --100 ° F). Cover the area loosely with a bandage to protect the affected area and to prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
•
If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5 minutes. consult a doctor immediately.
4--54
96
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE (to be performed as and when required) OPERATION 36 BLEEDING THE FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM To Bleed the Fuel System It may be necessary after carrying out maintenance work on the fuel injection system or, after running out of fuel, to purge the system of air to allow the engine to start. If the engine fails to start after several turns, after one of the above situations has occurred, bleed the system using the following procedure: 1. Ensure the tractor has adequate fuel and the battery is fully charged. 2. Unscrew the primer pump knob and proceed to pump until a high resistance is felt when pushing the pump downwards. 3. Slowly push the plunger down against the resistance until the pump knob can be screwed fully home into the filter head. The fuel injectors and fuel injection pump are of the self bleed type and therefore any air remaining in the system will be purged as the engine is cranked to start.
97
4--55
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 37 TRANSMISSION CLUTCH CALIBRATION Full Powershift Transmission The Full Powershift transmission has a number of clutch packs requiring periodic calibration to compensate for wear. Calibration of the clutches should be performed at the 50 Hour Service and thereafter only if a deterioration in gear shift quality is noted. NOTE: During the calibration procedure the electronic management system detects precisely the point at which the clutches start to engage . The engagement is detected by a reduction in engine speed. During calibration it is essential that no action is taken to to cause the engine speed to vary. Be sure that the air conditioner and all electrical equipment is switched off. Do not operate the steering wheel, footbrakes, PTO or any hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot throttle.
Preparing the Tractor for Calibration NOTE: The clutches should be adjusted when the transmission oil temperature is above 80°C (176°F). Park the tractor on level ground, away from obstacles (in case of unexpected tractor movement). Place the transmission shuttle lever in neutral and apply the parking brake. Switch off all electrical equipment and air conditioning if fitted. Lower hydraulic equipment to the ground, place all remote levers in neutral and stop the engine. With the operator in the seat, depress and hold down the clutch pedal. With key start in the off position depress and hold both transmission upshift control (1), Figure 98. Start the engine and within two seconds depress and release the downshift control (2) to enter the calibration mode. Release the clutch pedal. NOTE: In ’automatic calibration sequence’ the seat switch is constantly monitored, if the operator leaves the seat the sequence will be stopped.
4--56
98
Error Codes for Full Powershift Transmission Code Meaning U19
Oil too cold.
U21
Engine RPM too low.
U22
Engine RPM too high.
U23
Shuttle lever not in forward drive position.
U26
Clutch pedal not fully released.
U31
Tractor wheel movement detected.
U33
Hand brake not applied
U34
Operator seat switch not depressed.
U36
Calibration high error.
U37
Calibration low error.
Ud1
Flywheel torque calibration too low
Ud2
Flywheel torque calibration too high
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Momentarily depress the upshift control to display the transmission oil temperature. The temperature will initially appear as a centigrade reading, this will be replaced by one of the following codes. If the temperature is between 10°C and 60°C, ‘‘CL” will be displayed. If the temperature is too high, above 105°C, ‘‘CH” will be displayed. If ‘U19’ is displayed calibration will not be possible and the oil will have to be warmed before proceeding.
99 With the oil at the correct temperature, depress the upshift control again, ’A’ will appear in the display. Depress the clutch pedal and move the shuttle lever into forward drive. Release the clutch pedal slowly. Increase the engine speed to 1200 rpm and depress the auto switch. Both FIELD and TRANSPORT auto symbols will start to flash in the display. The clutches will now calibrate one by one automatically. If an error occurs while in auto mode the sequence is stopped and the relevant code displayed. Press the auto function push button or the upshift/downshift control to clear the error.
100
After the reverse clutch has been calibrated, ’A’ will appear in the display to confirm the calibration sequence has been completed. Key off the engine and wait for 10 seconds to allow the calibration to be stored in the memory. The tractor is now ready for normal operation.
CAUTION
The tractor is drivable even if calibration has not been completed. Pay attention in this condition as the tractor could be jerky or sluggish. Always pull away using the clutch pedal very carefully. 101
4--57
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 38 CHECK BRAKE PEDAL LATCHING/UNLATCHING
CAUTION
Owners should be aware of local regulations concerning the braking system. Regularly maintain the brakes to ensure compliance with the law and ensure your safety. If in doubt, contact your dealer. The hydraulically actuated brakes require no adjustment. However, if any part of the brake pedal linkage or the master cylinder assembly is replaced or if the pedal latch will not readily engage the hole in the right--hand pedal shank, adjust the pedal as follows: 102 Adjust the clevis by loosening the locknut . The distance from the bulkhead to the centre of the clevis hole should be 137mm (5.4 in.). Adjust both pedals and ensure pedal latch engages properly.
103
4--58
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 39 AUTOMATIC PICK--UP HITCH Place a load on the pick--up hitch hook. a trailer or implement is suggested. Ensure that the hitch will latch and unlatch satisfactorily. If adjustment is necessary, remove the load from the hitch hook. Loosen the locknuts (1) and turn the adjuster (2) on each lift rod equally. Ensure that both hitch lift arms are supporting the hitch equally at the start of raise. Check that the hitch will latch and unlatch. When fully raised ensure that the hydraulic system relief valve does not blow or that the hitch lift rods are not under tension. Both these symptoms indicate that the hitch lift rods are too short.
104
Tighten the locknuts to 100 Nm (72 lbf. ft.). With the hitch latched in the raised position, adjust the operating cable by means of the adjuster nuts (3) to remove all slack from the inner cable. OPERATION 40 CHECK REMOTE CONTROL VALVE DRAIN BOTTLES Every time a hydraulic hose is connected or disconnected, a small amount of oil is discharged from the remote control valve coupler. Drain bottles are located below each remote control valve to catch the discharged oil. Visually check the oil level in the bottles. If necessary, unclip the bottle (2) by releasing the spring catch (1), remove the cap and empty the oil into a suitable container. Re-install the bottle, ensuring it is correctly seated below the valve.
105
4--59
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 41 CAB SUSPENSION ADJUSTMENT (where fitted) On tractors with a suspended cab the pre--load on the suspension unit (1) Figure 106, may be adjusted to suit heavier or lighter weights carried in the cab. NOTE: Depending on track setting, the tractor rear wheel may need to be removed for easy access to the cab suspension adjuster. Suspension Setting The pre--load adjuster is used to set the cab suspension so it operates in the optimum comfort zone for normal driving conditions. Position II provides the ideal setting for a 68kg (150 lbs.) operator plus additional equipment weighing 22kg (48 lbs.) carried in the cab.
106
NOTE: To provide optimum suspension performance, the weight of any heavy items carried in the cab (tow chains, linkages, toolboxes etc.) must always be taken into consideration when adjusting the suspension. The cab suspension adjustment has five pre--load settings which can be ’clicked’ into position by rotating the upper pre--load adjuster. Each setting is identified by vertical markings (2) on the lower collar. When adjusted correctly, the arrow on the upper collar (1) will align with the vertical markings on the lower collar. Select position I for operators having a lighter body weight than 68kg (150 lbs.), positions III and IIII are used for operators with a heavier body weight. With two people in the cab, positions IIII and IIIII should be used. IMPORTANT: For correct suspension operation it is vital that both suspension units are adjusted to the same setting. An imbalance in adjustment will cause unnecessary wear on the suspension units. A ’C’ spanner is included in the tractor tool kit for adjusting the cab suspension. Engage the ’C’ spanner in the slot of the pre--load adjuster and rotate to the desired position. NOTE: Use only the special tool provided to carry out any pre--load adjustment, using alternative equipment may damage the adjuster components.
4--60
107
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 42 HEADLIGHT AND WORKLAMP ADJUSTMENT Headlights To avoid blinding on coming drivers, adjust the angle of the headlight beams. Each headlight is adjusted by rotating the two adjusters (1) clockwise or anti--clockwise according to the amount of correction required. NOTE: The hood non--adjustable.
mounted
worklamps
are
108 Worklamps Dependant upon model and specification, adjustable worklamps may be installed on the front and rear of of the cab roof, low down at the front of the cab or on the rear fenders. Non--adjustable worklamps are mounted on the front of the hood , adjacent to the headlights. Cab roof mounted worklamps are adjusted by moving the protruding lever (1), backwards or forwards. 109
4--61
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 43 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights and Hood--mounted Worklamps IMPORTANT: All headlights and worklamps have halogen bulbs. Never touch a halogen bulb with the fingers. Natural moisture in the skin may cause the bulb to fail prematurely when switched on. Always use a clean cloth or tissue when handling halogen bulbs. The headlights and two non--adjustable worklamps are mounted in a moulded unit attached to the front hood assembly. All bulbs are accessible from the rear of the lamp unit inside the hood area. To remove the bulb from the integral worklamp simply rotate the bulb holder assembly (1) anti--clockwise approximately 20 degrees. The bulb can then be removed by pressing in the bulb and then releasing it.
110
To remove bulb from front headlight assembly push the retaining clip (2) upwards and remove the protective cap (3) from the rear of the light unit. Withdraw the wiring connector (5) from the rear of the bulb and detach the retaining spring (4) by pulling rearwards and moving to the side of the light aperture. Carefully remove the bulb.
111 Adjustable Worklamps Grabrail mounted worklamps To replace the bulbs on the grabrail mounted worklamps, remove the two retaining screws. Pull out the lens housing from the main lamp housing. Squeeze together the ends of the wire retaining clip (1) and pull the bulb holder from the assembly. Remove the bulb making sure to use a clean cloth or tissue.
112
4--62
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Cab roof mounted worklamps Remove the two retaining screws (1) and lower the lamp assembly from the roof. Rotate the bulb holder counter--clockwise and pull from the lamp housing. Rotate the bulb counter--clockwise and remove from the bulb holder making sure to use a clean cloth or a tissue.
113 Turn/Position Lights To gain access to the lower rear turn/position bulbs remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens. To remove the bulbs (1) rotate counter clockwise.
114 The front turn/position lamps are located on the grabrails. Remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens. To remove the turn indicator bulb (1) or the position bulb (3) rotate counter clockwise. When re--fitting the lens ensure the sealing rubber (2) is fully seated in the lamp housing.
115 The turn position lamps (Front and Rear) are located in the cab roof. Remove the two retaining bolts (1) and pull the lamp assembly from the housing. Rotate the harness connector counter--clockwise to remove the lamp housing from the bulb holder. To remove the bulb rotate the bulb counter--clockwise and pull from the bulb holder.
116 4--63
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE To remove the bulb rotate the bulb counter--clockwise and pull from the bulb holder.
117 Puddle Lights Remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens housing assembly (1) from the cab roof. Disconnect the harness connector and remove the light assembly. To remove the bulb housing (3) rotate the harness connector counter clockwise. To remove the bulb (2) rotate counter clockwise.
118 Rocker Switch Bulbs
1
Certain of the rocker switches are internally illuminated, the bulb being removeable from the rear of the switch assembly. The switch assembly is retained by a sprung tag (3) at either end. Use a small screwdriver to pry one end of the rocker switch from the sheet metal and withdraw the switch assembly. To change a bulb, press in the tag (2) using a small screwdriver and pull the bulb retainer (1) from the back of the assembly. The bulbs are of the capless type, rated at 1.2w and are a push fit in the retainer. After changing the bulb, push the retainer into the back of the switch assembly until the tag locates in the aperture. Re-install the switch assembly.
4--64
2
3 119
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATION 44 FUSES AND RELAYS The fuse box is located behind a panel on the top of the right --hand control console. To check or change fuses, remove the two screws securing the panel to the console. The fuses and relays are shown diagrammatically in FiguresNO TAG andNO TAG. In addition to the main fuses there are additional ‘maxi’ fuses which are provided to protect the main fuses and electrical circuit. There is provision for 60 fuses although they may not all be fitted to your tractor. In addition, certain items of equipment may not be installed on your tractor. However, the fuses for these features are still fitted and may be used as spares.
120
IMPORTANT: Do not replace a blown fuse with another of a different rating. The fuses are numbered and colour--coded. Their position and rating are shown in the chart on the next page. More relays are located behind the front of the right--hand control console, Figure 121.
121 In addition to the fuses in the internal fuse box , there are also extra fuses located on the battery tray. A 250 amp ‘MEGA‘ fuse (1) which protects the main electrical system and three 30 amp fuses (2) which protect the front lift electrical system, electronics supply and implement ISO BUS circuit (where fitted).
122
4--65
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Relay Descriptions 1--13 Relay
Function
R1
Front Windscreen Wiper Module and Rear Window Wiper Module
R2
Ignition Relay
R3
Side/Tail Lights and Illumination
R4
Starter
R5
Blower Motor
R6
Dipped Beam Headlamps
R7
Stoplamps
R8
Main Beam Headlamps
R9
Pneumatic Trailer Brake Supply
R10
Hydraulic Trailer Brake Supply
R11
Stoplamps Switch Feed and Pneumatic Brakes
R12
Engine Cold Start Advance (Mechanical Engines Only)
R13
Reverse Alarm and engine ECU power
123
4--66
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Relay Descriptions 14--19
Maxi Fuses 1--6
Relay
Function
No.
R14
Front Lower Worklamps (Hood)
MF1 80
Engine, Ignition Relay
R15
Rear Lower Worklamps
MF2 30
R16
Electrical Supply
R17
Electronic Battery Isolator
Lighting, Ignition Switch, Main Lighting Switch, Radio, Worklamp ECU, Fender Worklamps, Front Worklamps, Roof Worklamps
R18
Air Conditioner Clutch
MF3 80
R19
Electronic Remote Valve Power
B + KAM ADIC, Engine ECU, Transmission ECU, Fender Worklamps, Roof Worklamps, Front Worklamps
MF4 80
Implement Socket Rear, Hood Worklamps, Grab Rail Worklamps
MF5 80
Lighting
MF6 80
Accessories Cab
Amps Protected Components
124
4--67
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Mini Fuses 1--30 No.
Amps Circuit
16
15
Trailer Brake
1
10
Interior and Puddle Lights + Parking Brake Lamp
17
25
Accessory Sockets
2
25
Cigar Lighter + Power Studs
18
15
Blower Motor + Seat
3
10
A/C Clutch
19
15
Heated Mirrors
4
10
Accessory Sockets
20
10
Radar Socket + ADIC KeyPad + Radar
5
30
Blower Motor
21
15
6
10
Radio KAM + Worklamp ECU
Grid Heater + Water In Fuel Sensor + Brake Fluid Level Switch
7
20
Main Lights + Hazard Switch
22
15
Sidelamps RH
8
20
Starter Switch
23
15
Sidelamps LH
9
25
Loader
24
10
Illumination
10
30
Rear Implement Socket
25
15
Dip Beam Headlamps
11
10
Front and Rear Windscreen Wiper
26
15
Main Beam Headlamps
12
10
Wiper Switch and Rear Wiper Park
27
15
Front Worklamps (Hood)
13
15
Stoplamps
28
15
Worklamp ECU
14
15
Main Light Switch + Flasher Unit
29
30
Worklamp ECU
15
20
Stoplamp Switch + Pedal Latch
30
15
Rear Lower Worklamps
125
4--68
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Mini Fuses 31--60 31
15
Beacon ECU
44
25
Front Implement Power Socket
32
30
Flasher Unit
45
25
Front Ignition + 8 Amp Socket
33
25
Diagnostic Connector + Engine ECU
46
15
Electronic Engine ECU
34
10
Instrument Cluster B+
47
10
Electronic Engine ECU
35
10
DC Mem + SCM + ACM
36
10
Instrument Cluster Ignition
37
15
Transmission Ignition
38
10
Rear PTO Switch + Rear PTO Lamp + HPL + SCM + Ground Speed PTO + Display Of Gears Connector
48 49
Not Used 15
Electronic Engine ECU
50
Not Used
51
Not Used
52
Not Used
53
Not Used
54
Not Used
55
Not Used
39
10
HPL + Seat + Armrest + EDC + EHR Levers (16 x 16 Only)
40
10
Radio
56
Not Used
41
15
Front Suspension and PTO + EHR Levers (16 x !6 Only)
57
Not Used
58
Not Used
42
10
Front Suspension
59
Not Used
43
10
Starter Switch (Run position)
60
10
Battery Isolator Control
126
4--69
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Power Fuses (All Models) Fuse No.
Amps Protected Supply
PF1
250
Power B + Main Supply
PF2
30
Power E Electronic Supply
PF3
30
Power B + Front Implement Socket
127 ISO BUS Power Fuses (where fitted) Fuse No.
Amps Protected Supply
PF4
30
Implement ISO BUS circuit
PF5
30
Implement ISO BUS circuit
128
4--70
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CLEANING THE TRACTOR Cab Interior When the soft trim material inside the cab becomes dirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm water/detergent solution and squeeze out as much of the water as possible. The rubber floor covering is designed to allow water to flow out through the open doors. Wash the covering carefully and allow to dry naturally. Avoid getting water under the mat. NOTE: When operating with chemical sprayers, clean the interior of the cab on a more frequent basis to prevent a build up of chemical residue. Cleaning the Seat and Seat Belt The belt may be sponged with clean, soapy water. Do not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as these chemicals will weaken the webbing. Replace the belt when it shows signs of fraying, damage or general wear. Do not use solvents to clean the seat. Use only warm water with a little detergent added or a proprietary brand of automotive upholstery cleaner. Avoid wetting the seat more than is absolutely necessary. Cleaning the Exterior of the Tractor In the event of abrasions or deep scratches that expose the metal under the paintwork, the area concerned will need to be retouched and treated immediately with specified original products as follows: --
Rub down the immediate area surrounding the damage with fine abrasive paper.
--
Apply a coat of primer.
--
Leave to dry and then rub down with fine abrasive paper to ’key’ the surface.
--
Apply the paint. For best results apply several light applications of paint rather than one heavy coat. Paint and primer are available from your authorised dealer.
129
--
When fully dry, apply a good quality polish and buff to a shine.
Maintenance of the paintwork is normally carried out by washing, at intervals that depend on the conditions of use and the environment. In areas prone to atmospheric pollution and coastal zones, washing should be carried out more frequently, whereas if organic or chemical substances are present, wash immediately after the tractor is used. Use a low pressure water spray, sponge down with a solution of automotive shampoo and water, rinsing the sponge frequently. Rinse the tractor thoroughly and dry off. Avoid washing the tractor if it is hot or has been standing in the sun. This will help to protect the shine on the paintwork. Protect the paintwork by means of periodical polishing with special products (silicone waxes) which are available from your authorised dealer. Use wax polish should the paintwork start to dull as this has a slightly abrasive action. NOTE: When carrying out operations involving materials or crops which may become airborne, frequently check the tractor for build up of debris around the radiator, engine and exhaust system to prevent overheating or the possibility of catching fire.
4--71
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DURING BATTERY CHARGING OR WELDING Precautions To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical systems, always observe the following: 1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit connections, including the battery connections, when the engine is running. 2. Never short any of the charging components to earth. 3. Do not use a slave battery of higher than 12 volts nominal voltage.
7. If welding is to be carried out in close proximity to a computer module, then the module should be removed from the tractor. It is recommended that this procedure be carried out by an authorised dealer. 8. Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or across any electrical wiring or electronic component while welding is in progress. 9. Always disconnect the negative cable from the batteries when charging the batteries in the tractor with a battery charger.
WARNING
4. Always observe correct polarity when installing the batteries or using a slave battery to jump start the engine. Follow the instructions in the operator’s manual when jump starting the tractor. Connect positive to positive and negative to negative.
Batteries contain sulphuric acid. In case of contact with skin, flush the affected area with water for five minutes. Seek medical attention immediately. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear eye protection when working near batteries.
5. Always disconnect the earth cable from the batteries before carrying out arc welding on the tractor or on any implement attached to the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two earth cable connections at the battery prior to charging the batteries or welding on the tractor or attached implement will result in damage to the electronic and electrical systems.
6. Position the welder earth cable clamp as close to the welding area as possible.
4--72
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE STORING THE TRACTOR
PREPARATION FOR USE AFTER STORAGE
The following text is given for your information and guidance. For further information concerning long term storage of your tractor, please consult your authorised dealer.
After extended storage, prepare the tractor for further use, as follows: •
Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure and lower the tractor to the ground.
•
Refill the fuel tank(s).
•
Check the radiator coolant level.
TRACTOR STORAGE Before storing the tractor for an extended period, the following precautions should be taken: •
Clean the tractor.
•
Check all oil levels.
•
Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle and refill with clean oil.
•
Install fully charged batteries.
•
Drain the fuel tank(s) and pour approximately two gallons of special calibrating fuel into the tank. Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to ensure complete distribution of the calibrating fuel throughout the injection system. See the next item before running the engine.
•
Remove the exhaust pipe covering.
•
Start the engine and check that all instruments and controls are functioning correctly. Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position Control, fully raise the 3--point hitch and remove the supports.
•
Check operation of heating and air conditioning systems (where fitted).
•
Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that it is operating satisfactorily.
•
Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant is within 200 hours of the next change, drain, flush and refill the system. See Operation 30 in Section 4. Run the engine for one hour to disperse the coolant throughout the system.
•
Lubricate all grease fittings.
•
Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position Control, raise the 3--point hitch and support the lift arms in the raised position.
•
Lightly coat all exposed hydraulic piston rods with petroleum jelly, e.g., power steering cylinder rams, lift assist rams, spool valves, etc.
•
Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dry atmosphere. Recharge periodically.
•
Raise the tractor and place supports under the axles to take the weight off the tyres.
•
Cover the exhaust pipe opening.
4--73
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE NOTES
4--74
SECTION 5 FAULT FINDING INTRODUCTION The following information is intended as a guide to assist in identifying and correcting possible tractor malfunctions and fault conditions. The information provided is as follows: •
ERROR CODES
•
SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODES Your tractor makes extensive use of electronics to control and monitor major components within the driveline, electrical and hydraulic systems. In the unlikely event of a fault occurring in one of these areas, the malfunction will be identified with a symbol and a four or five digit error code in the Dot Matrix Display on the instrument panel. The first digit(s) of each number provide the general location of the fault and the subsequent numbers confirm the exact nature of the fault. The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. Each error code will be supported by the relevant symbol displayed above the number. Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become disabled, an error code will be displayed in the instrument panel. If this should happen and you are unable to rectify the fault yourself, contact your authorised dealer and report the error code displayed.
1 SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING The following information lists possible problems, their cause and corrective action. The systems are listed as follows: Subject
Page
Fault codes and symbols
5--2
Engine
5--4
Transmission
5--7
Hydraulics
5--8
3-point hitch
5--9
Brakes
5--10
Cab
5--10
Electrical
5--11
5--1
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING FAULT CODES and SYMBOLS DMD
F
LAMP
FAULT CODE
AREA of FAULT
--
1------
Electronic hitch control.
--
2------
Transmission.
--
3------
Engine.
--
4------
Rear electronic remote valves.
--
45------
Front electronic remote valves.
--
5------
Rear PTO system.
--
6------
Front wheel drive.
--
7------
Rear differential lock.
ACTION
The system fault symbols relate to an operational fault in one or more of the tractors main components either electrical, components, electrical mechanical or hydraulic. The appearance of a fault pp symbol may be accompanied by a four or five digit fault code. Consult your authorised dealer. dealer
5--2
--
8------
Front PTO system.
--
9------
Front 3--point hitch.
--
10------
Front suspension.
--
15------
Turn Assist system.
--
16------
Cab auto temperature control
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING FAULT CODES and SYMBOLS DMD
LAMP
FAULT CODE
AREA of FAULT
--
14------
Instrument cluster.
--
14------
Electronic system malfunction.
--
14------
Data network system.
--
14------
Steering sensor.
--
14------
5 volt supply voltage.
--
14------
Starter motor power supply.
ACTION
The system fault symbols relate to an operational fault in one or more of the tractors main components either electrical, components, electrical mechanical or hydraulic. The appearance of a fault pp symbol may be accompanied by a four digit fault code. Consult your authorised dealer.
--
14------
Fuel level sensor.
--
14------
Air brake system fault.
--
14------
Alternator lamp not working.
--
14------
AFS 200 monitor present but not configured ’ON LINE’.
Configure to ’ON LINE’ status.
5--3
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
ENGINE PROBLEM Engine will not start or is difficult to start
Engine runs roughly and/or stalls
5--4
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Incorrect starting procedure.
Review starting procedure.
Low or no fuel.
Check fuel level.
Air in fuel lines.
Bleed fuel system.
Low ambient temperature.
Use cold starting aid.
Contaminated fuel system.
Clean and bleed fuel system.
Clogged fuel filter(s).
Replace fuel filter element(s).
Malfunctioning fuel pump or injectors.
See your authorised dealer.
Malfunctioning fuel solenoid or solenoid relay.
See your authorised dealer.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity.
Use correct viscosity oil.
Incorrect fuel for operating temperature.
Use correct type fuel for temperature conditions.
Slow starter speed.
See slow starter speed in Electrical.
Clogged fuel filter(s).
Replace fuel filter element(s).
Contaminated fuel system.
Clean and bleed fuel system.
Fuel solenoid incorrectly adjusted.
See your authorised dealer.
Fuel cap vent blocked.
Wash cap in clean fuel oil.
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
ENGINE (continued) PROBLEM Engine lacks power
Engine knocks
Engine overheats
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Engine overloaded.
Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted.
Service air cleaner.
Low engine operating temperature.
Check thermostats.
Engine overheats.
See Engine overheats.
Clogged fuel filter(s).
Replace fuel filter element(s).
Incorrect fuel.
Use correct type fuel.
Malfunctioning fuel injectors.
See your authorised dealer.
Malfunctioning fuel injection pump.
See your authorised dealer.
Maximum ‘no--load’ speed set too low.
See your authorised dealer.
Leaking air intake boost pipes or exhaust manifold.
Check and rectify or see your authorised dealer.
Turbocharger malfunctioning.
See your authorised dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted.
See implement Operator’s Manual.
Fuel injection pump timing.
See your authorised dealer.
Low engine oil level.
Add oil, as required.
Low engine oil pressure.
See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operating temperature.
Check thermostats.
Engine overheats.
See Engine overheats.
Low engine oil level.
Add oil, as required.
Low engine coolant level.
Fill coolant recovery tank. Check cooling system for leaks.
Defective thermostat(s).
Check thermostat(s).
Dirty/blocked radiator core.
Clean.
Excessive engine overload.
Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or ballast carried.
5--5
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
ENGINE (continued) PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Faulty radiator pressure cap.
Replace cap.
Cooling system blocked.
Flush cooling system.
Loose or worn fan belt.
Check tension, adjust or replace belt if worn.
Leaking hose or connection.
Tighten connection and/or replace hose.
Malfunctioning temperature gauge or sender.
See your authorised dealer.
Malfunctioning vistronic fan.
See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operating temperature
Malfunctioning thermostat(s).
Replace thermostat(s).
Vistronic fan locked up.
See your Authorised dealer.
Low engine oil pressure
Low oil level.
Add oil, as required.
Wrong oil grade or viscosity.
Drain and refill with oil of the correct specification.
Excessive engine oil consumption
Engine oil level too high.
Reduce oil level, as required.
Wrong oil grade or viscosity.
Drain and refill with oil of the correct specification.
Malfunctioning turbocharger.
See your authorised dealer.
External oil leaks.
Repair leaks.
Worn valve guides/seals.
See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operating temperature.
See Low engine operating temperature.
Malfunctioning turbocharger.
See your authorised dealer.
Engine overloaded.
Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted.
Service air cleaner.
Incorrect fuel.
Use correct type fuel.
Engine overheats
Excessive fuel consumption
5--6
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
ENGINE (continued) PROBLEM Excessive fuel consumption (continued)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Malfunctioning fuel injectors.
See your authorised dealer.
Malfunctioning fuel injection pump.
See your authorised dealer.
Leaking air intake or exhaust manifold.
Check and rectify or see your authorised dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted.
See implement Operator’s Manual.
TRANSMISSION PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Tractor does not drive in any gear
Error code will indicate source of malfunction.
Recalibrate the transmission or see your authorised dealer.
Gear shift sequence incorrect or gears missing
Error code will indicate source of malfunction.
Recalibrate the transmission or see your authorised dealer.
Jumping out of gear or holding in gear
Worn synchronisers/couplers.
Recalibrate the transmission or see your authorised dealer.
Poor inching control when using inching pedal (clutch pedal) or jerky gear shifting
Transmission clutches require calibration.
Perform transmission clutch calibration procedure or see your authorised dealer.
High transmission operating temperature
Low oil level.
Add oil, as required.
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity.
Drain and refill with oil of the correct specification.
Dirty or blocked transmission oil cooler.
Clean.
Low oil level.
Add oil, as required.
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity.
Drain and refill with oil of the correct specification.
Blocked transmission oil filter.
Replace filter.
Low oil level.
Add oil, as required.
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity.
Drain and refill with oil of the correct specification.
Worn bearings or failed parts.
See your authorised dealer.
Low transmission oil pressure
Noisy transmission
5--7
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
HYDRAULICS PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Error code will indicate source of malfunction.
See your authorised dealer.
Hydraulics oil level very low.
Add oil, as required.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s).
Replace oil filter(s).
Hydraulics oil level too low or too high.
Adjust oil level, as required.
Hydraulics oil cooler blocked.
Clean.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s).
Replace oil filter(s).
Flow control incorrectly adjusted.
Allow to cool, adjust flow control before operating again.
Hydraulic load not matched to tractor.
See your authorised dealer.
Remote control valve detent disengages prematurely
Detent release pressure set too low.
Adjust detent pressure or see your authorised dealer.
Remote equipment cylinder operates too fast or too slowly
Flow control incorrectly set.
Adjust flow control.
Remote equipment does not operate
Hoses not correctly connected.
Attach hoses correctly.
Load exceeds system capacity.
Reduce load or use correct size cylinder (see your authorised dealer).
Remote control valve lever movement restricted.
Adjust cables or see your authorised dealer.
Hydraulic system does not operate
Hydraulic oil overheats
5--8
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
THREE--POINT HITCH PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Error code will indicate source of malfunction.
See your authorised dealer.
Hitch not in phase with the control lever.
Put lift control lever back in phase with lower links.
Fast raise switch in external control position.
Put switch in correct position.
Height limit control incorrectly positioned.
Adjust height limit control.
External power lift control does not operate
Fast raise switch not in external control position.
Centralise switch (external control position).
3--point hitch does not raise fully
Height limit control incorrectly positioned.
Adjust height limit control.
3--point hitch drops slowly
Drop rate control incorrectly positioned.
Adjust drop rate control.
3--point hitch slow to respond to draft loads
Position/draft control incorrectly adjusted.
Adjust position/draft control.
Drop rate too slow.
Adjust drop rate control.
Implement not functioning properly.
See implement operator’s manual.
3--point hitch too responsive to draft loads
Position/draft control incorrectly adjusted.
Adjust position/draft control.
3--point hitch status light flashes continually
Position/draft control incorrectly adjusted.
Adjust position/draft control.
3--point hitch does not move when control lever is moved
5--9
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
BRAKES PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Pedal(s) feel spongy
Air in system.
System requires bleeding. See your authorised dealer.
Excessive brake pedal travel
Brake piston seal leaking.
See your authorised dealer.
Brake bleed valve leaking.
See your authorised dealer.
Leakage in brake valve(s)
See your authorised dealer.
Worn brake discs.
See your authorised dealer.
CAB PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Improper seal around filter element(s).
Check seal condition.
Blocked filter(s).
Clean or replace filters.
Defective filter.
Replace filter.
Damaged seals around doors/windows or roof hatch.
Replace seal(s).
Low pressuriser air flow
Blocked filter(s).
Clean or replace filters.
Heater or evaporator core blocked.
See your authorised dealer.
Air conditioner does not produce cool air
Heater control turned on.
Turn temperature control knob fully anticlockwise.
Condenser blocked.
Clean radiator, condenser and oil cooler.
Drive belt slipping, worn or damaged.
Check automatic belt tensioner and belt condition.
Low refrigerant level.
See your authorised dealer.
Dust enters the cab
5--10
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
Electrical system completely inoperative
Loose or corroded battery connections.
Clean and tighten connections.
Sulphated batteries.
Check battery open circuit voltage for minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity.
Starter speed slow -engine cranks slowly
Loose or corroded battery connections.
Clean and tighten connections.
Low battery output.
Check battery open circuit voltage for minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity.
Incorrect viscosity engine oil.
Use correct viscosity oil for ambient temperature.
Loose or corroded battery or starter motor connections.
Clean and tighten connections.
Dead batteries.
Charge or replace batteries.
Starter safety switch(es) operative.
Place all gear shift levers in neutral and fully depress clutch pedal.
Low engine idle speed.
Increase engine idle speed.
Broken/loose drive belt.
Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.
Malfunctioning batteries.
Check battery open circuit voltage for minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity.
Malfunctioning alternator
Have alternator checked by your authorised dealer.
Malfunctioning alternator
Have alternator checked by your authorised dealer.
Loose or corroded terminals.
Clean and tighten connections.
Loose or worn drive belt.
Check belt and automatic belt tensioner. Replace belt, if required.
Malfunctioning batteries.
Check battery open circuit voltage for minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity.
Starter inoperative
Alternator light stays on with engine running
Batteries charge
will
not
5--11
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING NOTES
5--12
SECTION 6 ACCESSORIES
This section of the Manual describes the function and operation of features that are available for your tractor as dealer installed accessories. Unless otherwise stated, these features may also be available as factory fitted options.
Subject
Page
AFS 200 Monitor
6--2
Engine Coolant Immersion Heater
6--3
Maintenance requirements for these features will be found in Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance.
Transmission Oil Heater
6--3
Rotating Beacon
6--4
This subjects covered in this section are shown on the right. A comprehensive index is provided at the end of this book.
Auxiliary Headlights
6--4
40 Amp Socket and Cable
6--5
Battery Isolator Switch
6--6
Dynamic Front Fenders
6--7
6--1
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES AFS 200 MONITOR (where fitted) The optional AFS 200 monitor provides a comprehensive range of information on tractor operating functions. It can also be used to store, process and display information relating to applications and work environments.
2 USB Port A USB port is located at the top of the left--hand cab ’C’ pillar. This port is a direct link to the monitor and provides the ability to upload and download information between the monitor and a USB storage device. NOTE: Details on the operation of the monitor and ISO electrical system can be found in the AFS 200 Operator’s Manual.
3 ISO Connector Implements equipped with an ISO standard electronic control unit/s can be connected to the monitor via the multi--pin ISO connector at the rear of the tractor.
4
6--2
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES COOLANT IMMERSION HEATER
WARNING
To avoid shocks or other injuries, never use an unearthed or inadequate extension lead with the coolant or oil heater. Always use an earthed, three core extension lead, which is rated for at least a 15 amp load, in conjunction with a residual current circuit breaker or earth leakage trip device. This accessory consists of a heating element fitted into one of the core plug apertures on the right--hand side of the block. The heater is available in 115 or 230 volts A.C only. This accessory provides easier starting down to --29° C (--20° F).
5
To operate the heater, connect the heater extension cable to the socket (1) adjacent to the right--hand cab steps. Plug the free end of the heater cable into a suitable electrical outlet for up to four hours before carrying out the cold weather starting procedure.
TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER This accessory consists of a 115 or 230 volts A.C. heating element installed in the transmission housing. Connect the heater extension cable to the plug (1) on the left side of the rear axle housing. This accessory provides for faster warm up of the transmission/hydraulic oil when operating in cold climates To operate the heater, connect the plug on the free end of the heater cable to a suitable 115 volt outlet (using a voltage transformer, if necessary) for up to four hours before starting the engine.
6
NOTE: The coolant or transmission heaters may be left plugged in for more than four hours without harm. However, no noticeable increase in the heater’s effectiveness will be achieved after this period.
6--3
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES ROTATING BEACON The beacon switch is located in the control panel in the roof. Press in the button identified with the beacon symbol to provide power to the rotating beacon socket outlet. NOTE: Less cab models will have the beacon switch located on the main switch panel on the right--hand control console. The roof beacon kit consists of a rotating beacon, support bracket and fitting hardware to attach to the roof of the tractor.
7
A socket connected to the tractor electrical circuit (1), is provided each side of the cab at the rear of the tractor. When not in use, ensure the socket cover is replaced to prevent water ingress.
8
AUXILIARY HEADLIGHTS A set of additional dipping headlights are available for use with front mounted equipment. Located on the upper right and left--hand grab rails, the headlight beams pass over front mounted equipment to illuminate the road ahead. To turn on the auxiliary headlights, depress the switch on the lower left side of the instrument panel. When switched on the auxiliary headlight beams may be dipped using the multi--function switch on the left of the steering column. 9
6--4
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES ADDITIONAL 40 AMP SOCKET A second 4--pin, 40 amp socket is available as a dealer installed accessory. The socket is mounted on the underside of the lower, right-hand windscreen frame. A 4--pin to SAE 3--pin adaptor cable is available as an accessory from your dealer. (See Figure 10).
4--PIN TO 3--PIN ADAPTOR A 4--pin to SAE 3--pin adaptor cable is available as an accessory from your dealer. The adaptor may be used with the 4--pin, 40 amp implement socket.
10
6--5
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH Before disconnecting battery power with the isolator, ensure the key--start and any other electrical switches are turned OFF. IMPORTANT: After turning the tractor key--start off, wait for 60 seconds before isolating the battery power. This will permit any unsaved information in the tractor electronic processors to be memorised. An inbuilt power reserve will maintain a small amount of power to supply the electronic processors and radio memories when the tractor battery is isolated. Electronic Operation The solenoid operated battery isolator is controlled by a switch (1) located on the left--hand cab ’C’ pillar. Depress the top of the switch to disconnect battery power, an audible warning will sound for approximately 5 seconds. Depress the bottom of the switch to re--connect battery power. IMPORTANT: When in the ’ON’ position, the isolator switch solenoid consumes a small amount of electrical power. If the tractor is left for an extended period of time with the isolator on, battery power may be reduced. Always turn the battery isolator switch ’OFF’ when the tractor is not in use.
11
NOTE: The key--start switch must be in the ’OFF’ or ’ACCESSORIES’ position to operate the battery isolator, it will not function with the key--start in the ’ON’ (run) position. Mechanical Operation The mechanical isolator switch is attached to the battery carrier on the right--hand side of the tractor. Rotate the switch 1/4 turn anti--clockwise (position ’O’, red background) to disconnect battery power.
12
6--6
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES DYNAMIC FRONT FENDERS Two types of optional front fender are available, both offering a full range of adjustment to suit varying tyre sizes and track widths. The method of adjustment is very similar for both, but the following text describes the setting of the dynamic fender. Ensure all fixing bolts are re--tightened after adjustment. Dynamic fenders turn with the front wheels as the tractor is steered. As the steering angle increases, a spring centred pivot in the fender mount restricts the turn angle of the fenders. This prevents interference with the tractor hood or loader frame while allowing the wheels to continue turning beneath the fender. As a result, tighter turns can be achieved that would not be possible with a conventional fender, particularly at narrower track settings. Lateral adjustment, fender support A fender may be moved horizontally, towards or away from the tractor, by relocating the metal shims (2) either side of the fender support (1). Vertical adjustment The fender may be moved vertically by relocating the bolts (3) in the appropriate holes in the fender support. A number of the holes are elongated allowing the fender to be tilted forward or rearward.
Fender turn stop
13
An adjustable stop bolt (3), is fitted to both fender support brackets. When turning, the bolt contacts a fixed stop (2) on the axle housing restricting the angle at which the fender will turn while allowing the wheels to continue turning beneath the fender. The stops may require adjusting if the track width or tyre size is changed. Lateral adjustment, fender The support and bracket attachment points (1) beneath the fender, provide further lateral adjustment allowing the fender to be centered over the tyre. 14 Narrow Track Settings With certain options and/or tyre sizes, the smaller track settings may not be attainable due to minimal clearance between tyre or rim and any part of the fender or attaching hardware.
6--7
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES NOTES
6--8
SECTION 7 SPECIFICATIONS General The specification figures in this section are provided for your information and guidance. For further information concerning your tractor and equipment, consult your Case IH dealer. Case IH policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notice is reserved. All data given in this manual is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only. The illustrations do not necessarily show tractors in standard condition or imply that these features are available in all countries. For exact information about any particular tractor, please consult your Case IH dealer.
Subject General Dimensions Vehicle Weights
Page 7--2 NO TAG
Lubricant and Fluid Capacities
7--6
Engine
7--7
Fuel System
7--7
Cooling System
7--8
Transmission Options
7--8
Maximum Operating Angles
7--9
Rear Power Take Off
7--9
Front Power Take Off
7--9
Hydraulic System
7--10
Rear 3--Point Hitch
7--10
Remote Control Valves
NO TAG
Front 3--Point Hitch
7--14
Brakes
7--15
Steering
7--15
Electrical Equipment
7--16
Hardware Torque Tables
7--17
7--1
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL DIMENSIONS
ALL MODELS
NOTE:The following dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with tyre sizes as shown. Allowance must be made for tyres of larger or smaller dimensions: PUMA165, PUMA180, PUMA195 and PUMA210 2WD
The following dimensions are based on tractors with tyre sizes shown:
Front Rear
4WD Standard
11.00 x 16
4WD Suspension
480/70R30 (4WD models) 580/70R42 (2WD and 4WD)
A. Width across fenders Standard fenders
All models, 2158 mm (84.9 in)
Extended fenders
All models, 2334 mm (91.8 in)
Extra wide fenders
All models, 2682 mm (105.5 in)
7--2
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL DIMENSIONS
PUMA165, PUMA180, PUMA195 and PUMA210 2WD
B. Maximum ground clearance below front axle C. Front track setting
mm in
D. Rear track setting -- with flange axle
4WD Standard
4WD Suspension
----
All 4WD models, 613 mm (24.1 in)
1570 -- 2170 61.8 -- 85.4
All 4WD Models, 1552 -- 2269 All 4WD Models, 61.1 -- 89.3
All models, 1426 -- 2026 mm (56.1 -- 79.8 in)
-- with 98 in. bar axle
All models, 1524 -- 2438 mm (60.0 -- 96.0 in)
-- with 112 in. bar axle
All models, 1524 -- 2794 mm (60.0 -- 110.0 in)
-- with 119 in. bar axle
All models, 1524 -- 2998 mm (60.0 -- 118.0 in)
E.
Height to top of exhaust
All models, 3164 mm (124.5 in)
F.
Height to: -- Top of cab
All models, 3090 mm (121.6 in)
G. *Ground clearance below drawbar Swinging drawbars Tow hooks
All models, 398 -- 523 mm (15.6 -- 20.5 in) All models, 314 -- 392 mm (12.3 -- 15.4 in)
H. Front hitch projection Links horizontal Links in transport position
-------
4WD models only, 756 mm (29.7 in) 4WD models only, 316 mm (12.4 in)
*Ground clearance below the swinging drawbar or tow hook will be dependent on type of drawbar and tyre size. The figures shown are for guidance only. NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7--3
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL DIMENSIONS
J.
Wheelbase
PUMA165, PUMA180, PUMA195 and PUMA210
mm in
K. Overall length to end of lower links Minimum turn radius -- 2WD without brakes
mm in
m ft.
-- without brakes at 61.0 in. front track setting -- without brakes at 72.0 in. front track setting
m ft. m ift.
2WD
4WD Standard
4WD Suspension
xxxx xxx.x
2884 113.5
2884 113.5
5017 197.5
5017 197.5
5017 197.5
4.83 15.8
---
---
---
6.59 21.6
6.59 21.6
---
6.10 20.0
6.10 20.0
NOTE: All turn radius figures are measured without front fenders and steering stops adjusted to provide 20 mm (0.78in) wheel to chassis clearance on full lock with 0° front axle oscillation. NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7--4
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS TYPICAL OPERATING WEIGHTS
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
*2WD -- with cab On front axle
1970 kg (4343 lbs)
On rear axle
4454 kg (9819 lbs)
Total weight
6415 kg (14142 lbs)
2WD Maximum Permissible Weight On front axle
3800 kg (8377 lbs)
On rear axle
9500 kg (2093 lbs)
Total weight
10000 kg (22045 lbs)
**4WD -- with cab, standard axle On front axle
4199 kg (9257 lbs)
On rear axle
4297 kg (9473 lbs)
Total weight
8496 kg (18730 lbs)
**4WD -- with cab, Suspended axle On front axle
4340 kg (9567 lbs)
On rear axle
4278 kg (9431 lbs)
Total weight
8618 kg (18999 lbs)
4WD Maximum Permissible Weight On front axle
5200 kg (11463 lbs)
On rear axle
9500 kg (20943 lbs)
Total weight
12000 kg (26455 lbs)
PUMA210
NOTE:The above weights are approximate and are based on standard production tractors with full fuel tank, but without driver, or additional equipment. * Standard tractor without front or rear ballast and with 100 ltrs (26.4 US gals) of fuel. ** Includes front weight pack ’C’ (818 kg (1803 lbs).
7--5
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS CAPACITIES
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
Fuel tank (Total, both tanks)
440 litres (116.2 US gals)
Cooling system
26 litres (6.9 US gals)
Engine (including filter)
15 litres (3.96 US gals)
Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics Front PTO
100.0 litres (26.4 US gals) 400 ml. (0.42 US qts)
4WD Front hubs (w/o brakes) (quantity for one hub only)
2.15 litres (2.3 US qts.)
4WD Front hubs (with brakes) (quantity for one hub only)
x.x litres (x.x US qts.)
4WD Front axle differential (All axles)
PUMA210
14.0 litres (14.8 US qts)
Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using Remote Hydraulic Equipment When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark on the dipstick with the tractor parked on level ground. However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to the remote control valves it should be remembered that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and could seriously lower the oil level. Operating the tractor with a low oil level may result in. damage to the rear axle and transmission components. With the rear axle oil level up to the full mark on the dipstick, the following maximum oil volumes may be taken from the rear axle to power auxiliary equipment without the need to further top up the system: Operating stationary equipment on level ground:
21 litres (22.8 U.S. qts)
Operating while driving in. normal conditions (flat fields) for short periods only: 15 litres (15.8 U.S. qts) Operating in. other conditions, including longer periods of use:
9 litres (9.5 U.S. qts)
Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may be added to the rear axle above the normal FULL level is 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts). With this quantity added to the rear axle, the quantities stated above may be increased by the same amount, 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts), but no more.
7--6
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE
Engine power (unboosted) at rated speed, (ECE R120) Engine power (boosted) at rated speed, (ECE R129)
Kw Hp (cv) Kw Hp (cv)
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
PUMA210
123 167 150 204
134 182 160 218
145 197 172 234
157 213 175 238
6 cylinders
Number of cylinders
4 valves per cylinder
Valves per cylinder
Turbocharged and air to air intercooled
Aspiration Bore
104 mm (4.0 in)
Stroke
132 mm (5.19 in)
Displacement
6728 cm3 (410 in3) All Models, 16.5 : 1
Compression ratio Firing order
1.5.3.6.2.4
Rated engine speed
rev/min
All Models, 2200 e.r.p.m.
Idle speed
rev/min
All Models, 650 +/ -- 50 e.r.p.m.
Maximum no--load speed
rev/min
All Models, 2375 e.r.p.m.
Valve tappet clearance (cold) Intake
0.25 mm (0.009 in)
Exhaust
0.51 mm (0.020 in)
FUEL SYSTEM Type Dynamic timing (°°BTDC)
Electronically controlled, high pressure common rail 3.4
5.5
6.3
6.3
7--7
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS COOLING SYSTEM
PUMA165
Vistronic fan -- Number of blades
7 blades
-- Diameter
510 mm. (20.0 in)
째C 째F
-- Fully open at
Radiator pressure cap
PUMA195
81 degrees 178 degrees
째F
96 degrees 205 degrees
bar
1.0 bar (14.5 lbf.in2)
째C
TRANSMISSION Type
Full Powershift with Power Shuttle
Depending on tractor specification, a number of transmission options are available 17 x 6 -- 2WD and 4WD
30 km/h (18.4 MPH)*
18 x 6 -- 4WD only
40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 Economy -- 4WD only
40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 -- 4WD only (with front brakes & suspension)
50 km/h (31.0 MPH)*
Creeper Gears 34 x 12 -- 2WD and 4WD 36 x 12 -- 4WD only (with front brakes & suspension) Creeper Gear Operation *Approximate speeds depending on tyre size
7--8
PUMA210
Pressurised, with full flow bypass and recovery tank
Type
Thermostat -- Begins to open at
PUMA180
0.29 -- 30 km/h (0.18 -- 18.4 MPH)* 0.29 -- 40 km/h (0.18 -- 24.8 MPH)*
Electronic switch
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE
PUMA165
Front end up Rear end up Right side up Left side up
PUMA180
PUMA195
PUMA210
30 degrees 30 degrees 30 degrees 30 degrees
REAR POWER TAKE OFF Type -- Standard (except North America) -- Optional -- Optional
540E/1000 shiftable, independent 540/1000 shiftable, independent 540/1000 non--shiftable, independent
Engine speed @ PTO speed -- 540 -- 540E -- 1000 (shiftable and non--shiftable)
1950 e.r.p.m. 1526 e.r.p.m. 2178 e.r.p.m.
Maximum P.T.O power at Rated Engine Speed * With Power Boost
Kw Hp.
Optional
Fender mounted PTO controls (except North America)
FRONT POWER TAKE OFF (4WD only) Single speed, fully independent 6 or 21 Spline 39.4mm (1.375 in.) Elecro--hydraulic Anti--clockwise
Type -- Shaft -- Actuation -- Direction of rotation Engine speed @ PTO speed -- 1000 rpm only Maximum Power Output
All Models, 2120 e.r.p.m. Kw Hp.
All Models, 96.9 Kw All Models, 130 Hp
7--9
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
PUMA210
Variable displacement hydraulic pump with Electronic Hitch Control (EHC)
Type
Maximum system pressure at rated engine speed @ 2100 e.r.p.m.
200 +/ -- 5 bar (2750+/ -- 72 lbf.in2)
Flow at rated engine speed -- with standard pump
120.0 l/min (31.7 US gal/min)
-- with optional ’Hi--Flow’ pump
150.0 l/min (39.6 US gal/min)
THREE POINT HITCH Linkage Category -- with EDC, standard -- with EDC, Optional
Category II/III w/quick attach link ends Category II/III w/flexible link ends
LIFT CAPACITY Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure: with 2 x 80mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 3854 (8496)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 3640 (8024)
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic pressure, links horizontal: with 2 x 80mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 5526 (12182)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 5180 (11419)
NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical
7--10
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITY (Continued)
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
PUMA210
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure: with 2 x 90mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 4874 (10745)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 4609 ((10160)
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic pressure, links horizontal: with 2 x 90mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 6995 (15421)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 7056 (15555)
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure: with 2 x 100mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 6016 (13262)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 5690 (12544)
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic pressure, links horizontal: with 2 x 100mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 8647 (19063)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 7168 (15802)
NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical
7--11
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITY (Continued)
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
PUMA210
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure: with 2 x 80mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 4405 (9711)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 4180 (9215)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic pressure, links horizontal: with 2 x 80mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 5526 (12182)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 5180 (11419)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure: with 2 x 90mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 5577 (12294)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 5292 (11666)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic pressure, links horizontal: with 2 x 90mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 6995 (15421)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 6546 (14431)
NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical
7--12
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITY (Continued)
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
PUMA210
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure: with 2 x 100mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 6893 (15196)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 6536 (14409)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic pressure, links horizontal: with 2 x 100mm assist rams -- with Quick attach link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 8647 (19063)
-- with Flexible link ends
kg (lbs)
All Models, 8086 (17826)
NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical
7--13
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
Opt.
2 non--configurable valves 3 or 4 non--configurable valves
With mechanical remote valves
Opt.
3 or 4 configurable valves
With electronic remote valves
Opt.
3, 4 or 5 valves
With mechanical remote valves
Std.
200 +/ -- 5 bar (2750+/ -- 72 psi)
Maximum pressure at rated engine speed
95+/ -- 5 l/min (25+/ -- 1.3US gal/min)
Maximum flow through one valve at rated engine speed ISO Power Beyond couplers
PUMA210
Opt.
Compatible with configurable and electronic valves
FRONT 3--POINT HITCH Category II (ISO 8759/2)
Linkage Category Lift capacity through full lift range: @ ball ends
Standard and suspended axles -- 3859 kg. Standard and suspended axles -- 3788 kg.
@ 610 mm (24 in) in front of link ends
FRONT REMOTE VALVE COUPLERS With mechanical rear mount remote valves
Opt.
Dealer installed accessory
With electronic rear mount remote valves
Opt,
Dealer installed accessory
With electronic mid mount remote valves and joystick
Opt.
2, 3 or 4 electronic valves
Maximum flow through one valve at rated engine speed
7--14
95+/ -- 5 l/min (25+/ -- 1.3 US gal/min)
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS BRAKES
Service brake
Number of discs per side Front brakes (optional 4WD) Parking brake -- Number of discs
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
PUMA210
Self adjusting, oil immersed disc acting on differential shafts with power assistance 2 friction and 2 steel Oil immersed disc in each hub Oil immersed discs acting on bevel pinion shaft 6 discs
STEERING Type
Hydrostatic with tilt/telescoping steering wheel
Turns from lock to lock -- 2WD -- 4WD Std/Suspended axles -- 4WD with Fast Steer
All Models 4.4 turns All Models 4.3 turns 10° left or right from the sraight ahead position
Maximum angle of turn -- 2WD standard axle -- 4WD standard axle -- 4WD suspension axle Front wheel toe in -- 2 wheel drive Front wheel alignment -- 4 wheel drive
55 degrees 55 degrees 55 degrees
3 -- 6.5 mm (0.11 -- 0.25 in.)
0 +/-- 3 mm (0 +/-- 0.12 in.)
7--15
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Alternator
PUMA165
PUMA180
PUMA195
PUMA210
12 volt, 150 amp
Battery -- Isolator, mechanical -- Isolator, electronic
Minimum maintenance 12 volt 1300 cca Optional Optional
Starting motor
Positive engagement, solenoid operated 4.2 kw -- geared reduction
Cold starting aid Bulb rating and type -- headlights -- parking lights (front) -- parking lights (rear) -- work lights (hi--mount) -- work lights (auxiliary) -- turn indicators (front) -- turn indicators (rear) -- stop lights -- licence plate lights -- rotating beacon -- SMV lights (N America only) and extremity lights
7--16
Optional inlet manifold grid heater and fuel heater
60/55W -- H4 5W -- R5W 5W -- P21/5W 55W -- H3 50W -- GE866 21W -- PY21W 21W -- R21W 21W -- P21/5W 5W -- R5W 55W -- H1 21W--P21W
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS SAE GRADE 2 NOMINAL SIZE
UNPLATED or PLATED SILVER
PLATED w/ZnCr
1/4
SAE GRADE 5 PLATED w/ZnCr
GOLD
UNPLATED or PLATED SILVER
55* (6.2)
72* (8.1)
5/16
115* (13)
3/8
SAE GRADE 8 PLATED w/ZnCr
GOLD
UNPLATED or PLATED SILVER
86* (9.7)
112* (13)
121* (14)
149* (17)
178* (20)
229* (26)
17 (23)
22 (30)
26 (35)
34 (46)
7/16
27 (37)
35 (47)
42 (57)
54 (73)
1/2
42 (57)
54 (73)
64 (87)
83 (113)
9/16
60 (81)
77 (104)
92 (125)
120 (163)
5/8
83 (112)
107 (145)
128 (174)
3/4
146 (198)
189 (256)
7/8
142 (193)
1.0
213 (289)
LOCKNUTS GR.B w/GR5 BOLT
GR.C w/GR8 BOLT
157* (18)
61* (6.9)
86* (9.8)
250* (28)
324* (37)
125* (14)
176* (20)
37 (50)
48 (65)
19 (26)
26 (35)
59 (80)
77 (104)
30 (41)
42 (57)
91 (123)
117 (159)
45 (61)
64 (88)
130 (176)
169 (229)
65 (88)
92 (125)
165 (224)
180 (244)
233 (316)
90 (122)
127 (172)
226 (306)
293 (397)
319 (432)
413 (560)
160 (217)
226 (305)
183 (248)
365 (495)
473 (641)
515 (698)
667 (904)
258 (350)
364 (494)
275 (373)
547 (742)
708 (960)
773 (1048)
1000 (1356)
386 (523)
545 (739)
GOLD
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds. IDENTIFICATION CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE GRADE 2
SAE GRADE 5
SAE GRADE 8
REGULAR NUTS
SAE GRADE 5 HEX NUTS
SAE GRADE 8 NUTS
LOCKNUTS
GRADE IDENTIFICATION
GRADE IDENTIFICATION
GRADE A NO NOTCHES GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFRETIAL NOTCH GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFRENTIAL NOTCHES
GRADE A NO MARKS GRADE B THREE MARKS GRADE C SIX MARKS GRADE IDENTIFICATION
MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED AT CORNERS
GRADE A NO MARK GRADE B LETTER B GRADE C LETTER C
7--17
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS CLASS 5.8 NOMINAL
UNPLATED
SIZE
M4
CLASS 8.8
PLATED
UNPLATED
w/ZnCr
15* (1.7)
19* (2.2)
PLATED
CLASS 10.9 PLATED
LOCKNUT CL.8 w/CL8.8
w/ZnCr
BOLT
33* (3.7)
42* (4.8)
16* (1.8)
UNPLATED
w/ZnCr
23* (2.6)
30* (3.4)
M6
51* (5.8)
67* (7.6)
79* (8.9)
102* (12)
115* (13)
150* (17)
56* (6.3)
M8
124* (14)
159* (18)
195* (22)
248* (28)
274* (31)
354* (40)
133* (15)
M10
21 (28)
27 (36)
32 (43)
41 (56)
45 (61)
58 (79)
22 (30)
M12
36 (49)
46 (63)
55 (75)
72 (97)
79 (107)
102 (138)
39 (53)
M16
89 (121)
117 (158)
137 (186)
177 (240)
196 (266)
254 (344)
97 (131)
M20
175 (237)
226 (307)
277 (375)
358 (485)
383 (519)
495 (671)
195 (265)
M24
303 (411)
392 (531)
478 (648)
619 (839)
662 (897)
855 (1160)
338 (458)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.
IDENTIFICATION HEX CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS CLASSES 5.6 AND UP MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS CLASSES 05 AND UP MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS
7--18
CLOCK MARKING
SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED (Dealer’s copy) OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
All operative checks are to be performed with the tractor at normal operating temperature.
1. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
2. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . .
j
3. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16 ° C (60 ° F) . .
j
2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . .
j
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V--belt (air operated trailer brakes only) . . . . . . . .
j
4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . . .
j
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V--belt . . . . .
j
5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters .
j
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . .
j
9. Check front axle differential and hub oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
10. Check brake pedal equalization . . . . . . .
j
11. Check and adjust parking brake . . . . . . .
1. Lights and instruments for proper operation j
6. Hydraulic System:
Joystick operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j j j j
j
7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
12. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
8. Calibrate Full Powershift transmission clutches (see page 4--56) . .
j
13. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . .
j
PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
14. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness
j
15. Front wheel track alignment (2wd/4wd) . .
j
1. Engine operation including throttle and governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
16. Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . .
j
17. Grease front wheel bearings (2WD) . . .
j
3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
18. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . .
j
4. Differential lock engagement and disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
19. Clean air cleaner primary element . . . . .
j
5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
20. Check air intake and intercooler hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
6. All optional equipment and accessories
j
21. Check cooling system hose connections
j
22. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts .
j
Draft and Position Control operation . . . . . . Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . . .
SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS: 1. Cab or frame mounting bolt torque . . . .
j
2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . .
j
3. Seat belt and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
SERVICE PERFORMED Tractor Model Owner’s signature
Tractor Serial Number Date
Dealer’s signature
Date 8--1
SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS
8--2
SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED (Owner’s copy) OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
All operative checks are to be performed with the tractor at normal operating temperature.
1. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
2. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . .
j
3. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16 ° C (60 ° F) . .
j
2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . .
j
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V--belt (air operated trailer brakes only) . . . . . . . .
j
4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . . .
j
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V--belt . . . . .
j
5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters .
j
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . .
j
9. Check front axle differential and hub oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
10. Check brake pedal equalization . . . . . . .
j
11. Check and adjust parking brake . . . . . . .
1. Lights and instruments for proper operation j
6. Hydraulic System:
Joystick operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j j j j
j
7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
12. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
8. Calibrate Full Powershift transmission clutches (see page 4--56) . .
j
13. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . .
j
PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
14. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness
j
15. Front wheel track alignment (2wd/4wd) . .
j
1. Engine operation including throttle and governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
16. Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . .
j
17. Grease front wheel bearings (2WD) . . .
j
3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
18. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . .
j
4. Differential lock engagement and disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
19. Clean air cleaner primary element . . . . .
j
5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
20. Check air intake and intercooler hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
6. All optional equipment and accessories
j
21. Check cooling system hose connections
j
22. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts .
j
Draft and Position Control operation . . . . . . Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . . .
SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS: 1. Cab or frame mounting bolt torque . . . .
j
2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . .
j
3. Seat belt and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
j
SERVICE PERFORMED Tractor Model Owner’s signature
Tractor Serial Number Date
Dealer’s signature
Date 8--3
SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS
8--4
SECTION 9 INDEX
A Accessories 40 amp socket, Adaptor cable 4--pin to 3--pin, Auxiliary headlights, Battery isolator switch, Coolant immersion heater, Rotating beacon, Transmission oil heater,
Seat and seat belt,
6--5 6--5 6--4 6--6 6--3 6--4 6--3
4--71
Clutch pedal,
2--31
Console light,
2--10
Constant engine speed function,
3--11
Coolant temperature gauge,
2--36
D
Additional oil supply for remote services,
3--90
Differential lock operation,
2--97
Adjustable air vents,
2--11
Air conditioner control,
2--11
Dot matrix and central display, With performance monitor,
2--41 2--57
Dot matrix display Area accumulator, Area per hour forecaster, Odometer (distance record),
2--61 2--62 2--60
Air--operated trailer brakes,
3--121
Airborne noise emission,
1--20
Alarm functions,
2--67
Audible alarms,
2--67
Automatic cab temperature control,
2--13
Automatic engine shutdown,
3--8
B Ballasting and tyres, Ballast charts, Front weights, Liquid tyre ballast, Rear wheel weights, With front axle suspension,
3--144 3--150 3--147 3--149 3--147 3--144
Bar type rear axle, Track adjustment,
3--136 3--137
Beacon power socket,
2--21
C Cab air filters,
2--15
Cab air recirculation,
2--15
Cab and platform controls,
2--2
Cab general information, External rear view mirrors,
2--8
Cab introduction,
2--4
Cab pressurisation monitor,
2--16
Cleaning the tractor, Cleaning the cab interior, Cleaning the exterior,
1--1 4--71 4--71
Drawbars and towing attachments, Extendible pick--up hitch, Rear tow hitch, Safety chain, Swinging drawbars,
3--106 3--117 3--111 3--110 3--106
Dual wheels,
3--142
E Ecology and the environment,
1--6
Electrical power sockets, Implement sockets, Electronic hitch control, Control pod, Draft control operation, EHC control panel, External 3--point hitch controls, Hitch position display, Indicator lights, Position control operation, Pre--operation settings, Ride control, System malfunction warning, Transport lock,
2--20 2--22 3--57 3--58 3--62 3--58 3--52 , 3--67 3--59 3--59 3--65 3--61 3--66 3--59 3--66
Electronic remote valves, Connecting remote cylinders, Control levers, Manual lever operation, Operating continuous flow equipment, Relieving system pressure, Setting the flow rate,
3--75 3--87 3--75 3--82 3--88 3--86 3--80 9--1
SECTION 9 -- INDEX Timed programme operation, 3--83 Double acting service, 3--83 Replaying a timed programme, 3--86 Single acting service, 3--84 Transport lock, 3--75 Visual displays, 3--79 , 3--81 End User Licence Agreement,
1--2
Engine oil pressure gauge,
2--36
Enhanced keypad and performance monitor,
2--55
Error codes and warnings,
2--68
F Fault finding Brakes, Cab, Electrical system, Engine, Error codes, Hydraulics, Powershift transmission, Three--point hitch, First 50 hour service, Flange type rear axle, Track adjustment,
5--10 5--10 5--11 5--4 5--1 5--8 5--7 5--9 1--1 3--134 3--135
Foot throttle,
2--31
Footbrake pedals,
2--32
Four wheel drive, Operating precautions, Front 3--point hitch,
2--99 2--100 3--45
Front axle oscillation stops,
3--132
Front axle suspension,
2--101
Front fenders (4WD),
6--7
Front P.T.O.,
3--40
Front P.T.O. and 3--point hitch,
3--40
Front wheel alignment, Four wheel drive, Two wheel drive,
3--128 3--133 3--128
Front wheel track adjustment, Four wheel drive, Two wheel drive,
3--126 3--129 3--126
Fuel level gauge,
2--36
H Hand throttle,
2--32
Hazard warning lights switch,
2--35
9--2
Headland management control, HMC symbols,
3--13 3--17
Heater blower control,
2--10
Heater temperature control,
2--10
Hydraulic remote control valves, Configurable detent operation,
3--70
I Implement cable/harness routing,
2--19
Implement monitor installation,
2--18
In cab storage,
2--19
Indicator and warning lights,
2--37
Instructional seat,
2--30
Integrated Control Unit, Changing display settings,
2--36 2--43
Interior light,
2--10
International symbols,
1--19
K Key--start switch,
2--33
L Liquid crystal display, Digital clock, Engine function display, Groundspeed display,
2--40 2--40 2--40 2--40
Lubrication and maintenance 4WD axle oil level, 4--39 Adjust headlamp/worklamp beam, 4--61 Adjust parking brake, 4--32 Adjust pick--up hitch latching, 4--59 Air brake drier reservoir, 4--53 Bleed fuel system, 4--55 Cab air filters, 4--18 , 4--40 Cab suspension adjustment, 4--60 Calibrate transmission clutches, 4--56 Change 4WD axle oil, 4--42 , 4--43 Change fuel filters, 4--38 Change transmission oil and filters, 4--35 , 4--41 Check battery, 4--29 , 4--44 Check brake pedal latch, 4--58 Check drive belt tension, 4--28 Check engine air intake connections, 4--37 Check engine valve tappet clearance, 4--51 Check wheel nut torque, 4--26 Clean radiator/condenser cores, 4--17
SECTION 9 -- INDEX Drain air brake reservoir, 4--16 Drain cooling system, 4--46 Drain remote valve reservoir, 4--59 Electrical system protection, 4--72 Engine air cleaner, 4--11 , 4--36 , 4--50 Engine coolant level, 4--14 Engine oil and filter change, 4--33 Engine oil level, 4--15 First 50 hour service, 4--2 First 50 hours of operation, 4--1 Front P.T.O. gearbox oil level, 4--32 , 4--43 Fuel requirements, 4--3 Fuel system water separator, 4--13 Fuelling the tractor, 4--2 Fuse and relay locations, 4--65 General information, 4--1 Inspect poly V--belt, 4--30 Light bulb replacement, 4--62 Lubricants and coolants, 4--8 Lubricate grease fittings, 4--20 Lubrication and maintenance chart, 4--10 Safety precautions, 4--1 Service air conditioner, 4--54 Transmission and rear axle oil level, 4--31 Tyre pressures, 4--27 Windscreen wash reservoir, 4--16
M Multi--function light switch,
2--34
O Operator Protective Structure,
1--13
P Panel light dimming control,
2--49
Parking brake,
2--31
Power management,
3--10
Powershift transmission, Auto shift function, Changing gear shift threshold, Clutch/inching pedal, Creeper gears, Driving the tractor, Error codes, Go To mode, Ground speed charts, Powershift control, Programming reverse gear ratios, Shuttle lever, Speed matching,
2--76 2--81 2--86 2--77 2--91 2--79 2--92 2--87 2--76 2--77 2--89 2--78 2--88
Pre--operation checks,
3--2
Pressure washing the tractor,
3--2
Product identification,
1--3
Programming the visual displays Service period reminder, Setting implement width, Setting wheel slip alarm,
2--65 2--63 2--64
Programming tractor functions,
3--1
Protective guards,
4--5
R Radio/cassette player,
2--17
Rear power take--off (PTO), 3--26 Attaching equipment, 3--28 Auto PTO function, 3--36 , 3--42 Changing the output shaft, 3--35 External PTO controls, 3--38 General information, 3--30 Operating precautions, 3--29 Two speed shiftable PTO, 3--33 Two--speed with interchangeable shafts, 3--31 Relay and fuse panel covers, Remote valves, load sensing type, Bleeding remote cylinders, Connecting double--acting cylinders, Connecting remote cylinders, Connecting single--acting cylinders, Continuous flow hydraulic equipment, Operating remote valves and hydraulic lift simultaneously,
4--7 3--69 3--74 3--72 3--71 3--73 3--73 3--74
Right--hand footstep access,
4--6
Running in procedure,
3--2
S Safety decals, Driving the tractor,
1--14 1--8
Safety precautions, Diesel fuel, Operating the P.T.O., Operating the tractor, Personal safety, Servicing the tractor, The tractor, Using chemical sprays,
1--7 1--12 1--10 1--9 1--7 1--11 1--7 2--15
Seat belt,
2--30
Seats, Deluxe air suspension seat, Standard air suspension seat,
2--23 2--25 2--23
Service parts,
1--1 9--3
SECTION 9 -- INDEX Standard keypad, Starting the engine, Steering column adjustment, Steering stops,
2--42
Trailer braking systems,
3--119
2--33
Transporting the tractor,
3--3
3--132 3--8
Sun visor,
2--7
T
Towing the tractor,
3--93 3--93 3--103 3--98 3--96 3--96 3--97 3--99 3--104 3--101 3--95 3--97 3--98 3--3
Tractor ground speed display Calibrating the ground speed display, Ground speed calibration factors,
2--51 2--54
Tractor Specification Brakes, Capacities, Cooling system, Electrical equipment, Engine, Front 3--point hitch, Front power take off, Fuel system, Hardware tightening torques, Hydraulic system, Maximum operating angle, Rear power take off, Remote control valves, Steering, Three--point hitch, Transmission,
7--15 7--6 7--8 7--16 7--7 7--14 7--9 7--7 7--17 7--10 7--9 7--9 7--14 7--15 7--10 7--8
9--4
7--5
3--5
Stopping the engine,
Three--point hitch, Attaching equipment, Automatic stabilisers, Flexible link ends, Hitch float, Lift rod adjustment, Hydraulic adjust, Quick hitch, Sway block stabilisers, Telescopic stabilisers, Top link adjustment, Hydraulic adjust, Top link bracket,
Weights,
Turn assist,
3--24
Tyre inflation, Tyre pressures and permissible loads, Tyre symbol markings,
3--151 3--152
3--152 , 3--153
U Using battery booster, Using remote hydraulic equipment,
3--4 3--92 , 7--6
V Vehicle weight information,
1--5
W Warning and advisory symbols, Warranty,
2--70 1--1
Windscreen wash/wipe control,
2--35
Worklamp/beacon switch panel,
2--17
Numerical Listing Numerical Listing, When the warning symbol appears, Every 10 hours of operation, Every 50 hours of operation, Every 100 hours of operation, Every 300 hours of operation, Every 600 hours of operation, Every 1200 hours or 12 months of operation, Every 1200 hours or 24 months of operation, Every 36 months of operation, General maintenance,
4--11 4--11 4--14 4--17 4--28 4--29 4--33 4--40 4--46 4--54 4--55
CNH UK LIMITED AFTER SALES -- Technical Information
All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.
Case IH policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notice is reserved. All data given in this manual is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show tractors in standard condition. For exact information about any particular tractor, please consult your Case IH dealer.